Qx3440 Cpu CCPB 2ge Um en

QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE
Access DCS-MUX
User’s Manual
CXR.
Rue de l’Ornette – 28410 ABONDANT – France -
Tel: +33 237 628 790
Email: contact@cxr.com
Web: www.cxr.com
 2021 CXR. All rights reserved.
Version 1 October, 2021
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Disclaimers
I. Manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use
of this manual.
II. Manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties that may
arise through the use of this product.
III. Manufacturer assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by incorrect
use of this product.
IV. The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice due to
engineering improvements.
V. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written
consent of the Manufacturer.
VI. Sample displays shown in this manual may differ from the actual displays.
VII. Information in this manual may differ from software information due to firmware
changes.
VIII. All brands and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
CXR.
i
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
DE Bitte führen Sie das Gerät am Ende seinerLewbensdauer den zue Verfügung
stehended Rückgabeund Sammelsystemen zu.
GB At the end of the product's useful life, please dispose of it at appropriate collection
points provided in your country
FR Une fois le produit en fin de vie, veuillez le déposer dans un point de recyclage
approprié.
ES Para preservar el medio ambiente, al final de la vida útil de su producto,

depositelo en los laguares destinado a ello de acuerdo con la legislación vigente.
PT No final de vida útil do producto, por favor coloque no ponto de recolha

apropriado.
IT I Onde tutelare l'ambiente, non buttate l'apparecchio trai i normali rifiuti al termine
della sua vita utile, ma portatelo presso i punti di raccolta specifici per questi
rifiuti previsti dalla normativa vigente.
NL Wij raden u aan het apparant aan het einde van zijn nuttige levensduur, niet bij
hey gewone huisafval te deponeren, maar op de dearvoor bestemde adressen.
DK Når produktet er udtjent, bor det børtskaffes via de sæ rlige indsamlingssteder i

landet.
NO Ved slutten av produktets levetid bør det avhendes på en kommunal miljøstasjon

eller leveres til en elektroforhandler.
SW Lämna vänligen in produkten på lämplig återvinningsstation när den är förbrukad.
SU Hävitä tuote käytöiän päättyessä viemällä se asianmukaiseen keräyspisteeseen.
PL Gdy produkt nie nadaje sie juz do dalszego uzytku, nalezy zostawic go w jednym
ze specjalnych punktów zajmujacych sie zbiórka zuzytych producktów w
wybranych miejscach na terenie kraju.
CZ Po skončení jeho životnosti odložte prosím výrobek na přislušném sbĕrném místé

zřízeném dle předpisů ve vaší zemi.
SK Po skončení jeho životnosti odovzdajte prosím zariadenie na príslušnom zbernom

mieste podía platných miestnych predpisov a noriem.
SLO Ko se izdelku izteče življenska doba, ga odnesite na ustrezno zbirno mesto

oziroma ga odvrzite v skladu z veljavnimi predpisi.
GR Στο Тέλος тης λειτουργικής Ζωής του προϊόντος παρακαλώ

Πετξτε το στα ειōικά σημεία που Παρέχονται οτη χωρα σας.
PRC 当产品使用寿命结束,请在你的国家所提供的适当地点做好回收处理
CXR.
ii
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
CAUTION:
 Only qualified service personnel shall install and maintain the system.
 This equipment must be connected to an earth socket-outlet, which has a permanent
connection to protective earth with a cross-sectional area of not less than 2.5 mm2.
 Ensure protective earthing is connected before installing/uninstalling telephone
wires.
 Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
 Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet
locations.
 Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
 Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Précautions:
 Seul le personnel qualifié peut installer et entretenir le matériel.

 L’équipement doit être connecté à la prise de terre, qui doit avoir une connexion
permanente à la terre de protection avec une section de fil supérieure à 2.5 mm2.
 S’assurer que la terre de protection est branchée lors de l’installation ou
désinstallation des fils téléphoniques.
 Ne jamais installer les fils du téléphone pendant un orage.
 Ne jamais installer la prise téléphonique dans un endroit humide sans prendre la
précaution que cette prise téléphonique soit prévu pour un environnement humide.
 Ne jamais toucher les fils téléphoniques dénudés sans que la prise téléphonique soit
débranchée du réseau.
 Prendre toutes les précautions d'usages pendant l'installation ou les modifications
de la ligne téléphonique.
CXR.
iii
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Table of Contents
1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ..........................................................................................1
1.1. Function Description ............................................................................................1
1.2. Application ...........................................................................................................2
1.3. Specifications for QX3440 ...................................................................................5
2. INSTALLATION .........................................................................................................19
2.1. Site Selection .....................................................................................................19
2.2. Mechanical Installation ......................................................................................19
2.2.1. Chassis Grounding..................................................................................20
2.2.2. Rack Mounting Instruction.......................................................................21
2.3. Electrical Installation ..........................................................................................22
2.3.1. Power Connection ...................................................................................23
2.3.2. Fan Tray Setting (Optional) .....................................................................29
2.4. Controller Card ..................................................................................................30
2.4.1. DB9 Console Port ...................................................................................30
2.4.2. Micro USB Console Port .........................................................................30
2.4.3. SNMP Port ..............................................................................................31
2.4.4. ACO Button .............................................................................................31
2.4.5. Ethernet Port ...........................................................................................31
2.4.6. SFP Port .................................................................................................31
2.4.6.1. Fiber Optic Connections (Optional).................................................31
2.5. ClKa Common Module (Optional) ......................................................................32
2.5.1. Clock Input/Output ..................................................................................32
2.5.2. Alarm Input/Output ..................................................................................32
2.5.3. Alarm Relay ............................................................................................33
2.5.4. Fuse Relay ..............................................................................................34
2.6. Card Installation .................................................................................................35
2.6.1. Controller Card Installation......................................................................35
2.6.2. Tributary Card Installation .......................................................................35
2.6.3. Card Replacement ..................................................................................36
2.6.3.1. Remove the Old Tributary Card ......................................................36
2.6.3.2. Install the New Tributary Card ........................................................37
2.6.3.3. Remove the Old Controller Card.....................................................37
2.6.3.4. Install the New Controller Card .......................................................37
2.6.3.5. Dual-CTRL protection .....................................................................38
2.7. Configuration Setting .........................................................................................39
2.7.1. Software Configuration Setting ...............................................................39
3. OPERATION ..............................................................................................................40
3.1. Quick Start for QX3440 ......................................................................................40
3.1.1. Power On ................................................................................................40
3.1.2. Load Default ............................................................................................40
3.1.3. Using Terminal ........................................................................................40
3.1.3.1. Map Setup ......................................................................................41
3.1.3.2. Unit Selection..................................................................................41
3.1.3.3. Configuration Settings ....................................................................41
3.2. System Operation ..............................................................................................41
3.2.1. Date ........................................................................................................41
3.2.2. Master Clock ...........................................................................................41
3.2.3. Console Port ...........................................................................................42
CXR.
iv
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
3.2.3.1. DB9 Console Port ...........................................................................42

3.2.3.2. Micro USB Console Port .................................................................42
3.2.4. Logon, Logoff, and Password .................................................................42
3.3. Alarms................................................................................................................43
3.3.1. Alarms .....................................................................................................43
3.4. LED Operation ...................................................................................................44
3.5. Telnet Connectivity ............................................................................................45
3.6. Embedded SNMP Agent ....................................................................................46
3.7. In-Band Management Setup ..............................................................................46
4. MAINTENANCE .........................................................................................................49
4.1. Self-Test ............................................................................................................49
4.2. Diagnostics ........................................................................................................49
4.3. Near End Loopback ...........................................................................................49
4.3.1 Local Loopback .......................................................................................49
4.3.2 Line Loopback .........................................................................................50
4.3.3 Payload Loopback...................................................................................50
4.3.4 Time Slot Loopback ................................................................................50
4.4. Far End Loopback .............................................................................................50
4.5. Test Pattern .......................................................................................................51
4.6. Verifying QX3440 Operations ............................................................................51
4.6.1. Quick Test ...............................................................................................51
4.6.1.1. Independent Test ............................................................................51
4.6.2. Substitution .............................................................................................51
4.6.3. Using Loopback Plugs ............................................................................52
4.6.4. Using Bert Test Set .................................................................................52
5. TERMINAL OPERATION ...........................................................................................53
5.1. Menu Tree .........................................................................................................54
5.2. Main Menu .........................................................................................................55
5.2.1. System Configuration ..............................................................................57
5.2.1.1. System ............................................................................................58
5.2.1.2. Clock Source ..................................................................................58
5.2.1.3. TSI Map ..........................................................................................61
5.2.1.4. Current TSI Map .............................................................................62
5.2.1.5. Link Backup Function .....................................................................63
5.2.1.6. E1/T1 protection .............................................................................63
5.2.1.7. DS0 SNCP ......................................................................................64
5.2.1.8. Inband Protection Status ................................................................64
5.2.1.9. SNTP Status ...................................................................................65
5.2.1.10. Monitor Signaling ..........................................................................65
5.2.1.11. SNMP Port and Ethernet Port State .............................................65
5.2.1.12. SNMP Port and Ethernet Port Status............................................66
5.2.1.13. Ethernet Port Statistics .................................................................66
5.2.1.14. ANY-DS1 Status ...........................................................................67
5.2.2. Clock Source Configuration ....................................................................67
5.2.3. Alarm Queue Summary...........................................................................67
5.2.4. System Information .................................................................................68
5.2.4.1. Dual CTRL Information ...................................................................68
5.2.4.2. Tributary Card Information ..............................................................69
5.2.4.3. Power/Fan Status ...........................................................................69
5.2.4.4. Activation Status .............................................................................70
CXR.
v
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.4.5. Primary CTRL Syslog .....................................................................70

5.2.4.6. Redundant CTRL Syslog ................................................................71
5.2.4.7. SFP Information ..............................................................................72
5.2.5. Performance Report ................................................................................72
5.2.6. PseudoWire Status .................................................................................74
5.2.6.1. Bundle Protect Mode Display .........................................................74
5.2.6.2. Bundle Source IP Display ...............................................................74
5.2.6.3. Bundle Display ................................................................................75
5.2.6.4. Bundle Statistics Display ................................................................75
5.2.6.5. All Bundle Display ...........................................................................76
5.2.6.6. MAC Address Display .....................................................................77
5.2.6.7. Bundle Alarm Display .....................................................................77
5.2.6.8. ACR Clock Source Status...............................................................78
5.2.6.9. Bundle Arrival Time Display ............................................................78
5.2.6.10. Bundle Round Trip Display ...........................................................79
5.2.6.11. Bundle Protect Statistics Display ..................................................79
5.2.6.12. Bundle 15-Min/1-Hr/7 Days Perf ...................................................80
5.2.6.13. Bundle 15-Min/1-Day Perf.............................................................81
5.2.6.14. Bundle Arp Status Display ............................................................82
5.2.6.15. Bundle Ping Status Display...........................................................83
5.2.6.16. Bundle IP Conflict .........................................................................84
5.2.7. Advanced Status .....................................................................................85
5.2.7.1. BP SYNC Status Display ................................................................85
5.2.7.2. DPLL Status Display .......................................................................85
5.2.7.3. HDLC Status Display ......................................................................86
5.2.8. System Setup ..........................................................................................87
5.2.8.1. System ............................................................................................87
5.2.8.2. SNMP .............................................................................................90
5.2.8.3. SNMP Port Settings ........................................................................96
5.2.8.4. Password ........................................................................................97
5.2.8.5. TELNET/SSH/HTTP Setup .............................................................98
5.2.8.6. Unit Init/Clear ..................................................................................98
5.2.8.7. TSI Map Setup ................................................................................99
5.2.8.8. Select a New TSI Map ..................................................................100
5.2.8.9. Copy a TSI Map to another...........................................................101
5.2.8.10. Clear a TSI Map..........................................................................101
5.2.8.11. Signaling Convert Table .............................................................102
5.2.8.12. Link Backup ................................................................................103
5.2.8.13. E1/T1 Port Protection .................................................................103
5.2.8.14. DS0-SNCP Setup .......................................................................103
5.2.8.15. Inband Protection........................................................................104
5.2.8.16. Any-DS1 Protection ....................................................................107
5.2.8.17. Command Line ...........................................................................108
5.2.8.18. SNTP Setup ................................................................................109
5.2.8.19. SYSLOG Setup...........................................................................109
5.2.8.20. RADIUS Setup ............................................................................110
5.2.8.21. Multicast Mapping Procedure .....................................................110
5.2.9. System Alarm Setup .............................................................................113
5.2.10. Firmware Transfer.................................................................................116
5.2.10.1. FTP Type Setup..........................................................................116
CXR.
vi
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.10.2. Download Mainboard Firmware ..................................................117

5.2.10.3. Download Mainboard Boot-up ....................................................117
5.2.10.4. Application of upload / download configuration ...........................118
5.2.10.5. Copy Firmware to Redundant .....................................................119
5.2.10.6. Download Firmware Procedure ..................................................119
5.2.10.7. Controller (CTRL) Firmware Synchronization .............................122
5.2.11. Store/ Retrieve Configuration................................................................123
5.2.12. Clock Mode Setup.................................................................................124
5.2.13. Clock Source Setup ..............................................................................126
5.2.14. SSM Conversion Table Setup...............................................................130
5.2.15. Bit Error Rate Test ................................................................................131
5.2.16. PseudoWire Setup ................................................................................132
5.2.16.1. Bundle Protect Mode Setup ........................................................132
5.2.16.2. Bundle Source IP Setup .............................................................133
5.2.16.3. Bundle Setup ..............................................................................133
5.2.16.4. Ethernet Setup ............................................................................135
5.2.16.5. ACR Clock Source Setup ...........................................................135
5.2.16.6. Bundle Performance Clear .........................................................136
5.2.16.7. Bundle Round Trip Delay ............................................................136
5.2.16.8. PW Jitter Buffer Recenter ...........................................................137
5.2.17. Alarm Cut Off ........................................................................................137
5.2.18. Clear Alarm Queue ...............................................................................137
5.2.19. Return to Default ...................................................................................138
5.2.20. Controller Reset ....................................................................................138
6. APPENDIX A: LINK BACKUP FUNCTION .............................................................139
6.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................139
6.2. Physical Requirement ......................................................................................141
6.3. Setup Procedure ..............................................................................................141
7. APPENDIX B: INBAND MANAGEMENT .................................................................143
7.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................143
7.2. Inband Management Setup Procedure ............................................................144
8. APPENDIX C: E1/T1 PROTECTION........................................................................148
8.1. Introduction ......................................................................................................148
8.2. Setting up Circuit Protection ............................................................................149
8.2.1. Connecting the Y-Box to the QX3440 Shelf ..........................................149
8.2.2. Quad E1 card Location .........................................................................150
8.2.3. Setting up a VT-100 Monitor .................................................................150
8.2.4. Step by Step Quad E1 Plug-in card Circuit Protection Setup ................150
8.3. Setting up Line Protection ................................................................................152
8.3.1. Step by Step Quad E1 Card Line Protection Setup ..............................153
9. APPENDIX D: QX3440 ALARM TRAP INFORMATION ..........................................155
9.1. Trap definition ..................................................................................................155
9.2. ccAlarmModel: Plug-in card model type .........................................................157
9.3. ccAlarmSlot: Slot index ...................................................................................158
9.4. ccAlarmPort: Port index ..................................................................................158
9.5. ccAlarmType: Controller alarm .......................................................................159
9.6. ccAlarmType: Unit alarm.................................................................................160
9.7. Alarm Setup Indication .....................................................................................165
10. APPENDIX E: SETTING UP AN QX3440 PDH SHARED PROTECTION RING .....167
10.1. Overview ......................................................................................................167
CXR.
vii
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
10.2. Setup Instructions ........................................................................................168

11. APPENDIX F: SETTING UP AN QX3440 PDH SHARED PROTECTION RING (T1)
174
11.1. Overview ......................................................................................................174
11.2. Setup Instructions ........................................................................................175
12. APPENDIX G: 3E1/3T1 DS0-SNCP CIRCUIT LEVEL PROTECTION SETUP........180
12.1. Physical Requirements.................................................................................180
12.2. Setup Procedures ........................................................................................182
13. APPENDIX G: FAE PACKAGE ...............................................................................194
13.1. FAE Support.................................................................................................194
13.2. Activate iNET LCT/8UDTE/PDH Ring ..........................................................195
14. APPENDIX H: USER DEFINED CONFIGURATION ................................................198
14.1. Save Default Configuration ..........................................................................199
14.2. Upload Default Configuration .......................................................................200
14.3. Download Default Configuration...................................................................200
14.4. Clear Default Configuration ..........................................................................201
14.5. Using the New Default Configuration ...........................................................201
15. APPENDIX I: BUNDLE SETUP CONFIGURATION ...............................................203
15.1. Port(Bundle ID) ............................................................................................203
15.2. Format (CESoPSN/SAToP) .........................................................................204
15.3. Type (IP/CESoETH) .....................................................................................205
15.4. ToS (Type of Service) ..................................................................................205
15.5. UDP Number/ECID ......................................................................................207
15.6. Frame ...........................................................................................................207
15.7. Dest IP/MAC ................................................................................................208
15.8. Stratum.........................................................................................................210
15.9. Number of TS ...............................................................................................210
15.10. Number of Frame .........................................................................................211
15.11. Jitter Delay ...................................................................................................212
15.12. Jitter Size .....................................................................................................213
15.13. VLAN ............................................................................................................215
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 QX3440-CHPAa Application Illustration ...............................................................2
Figure 1-2 QX3440-C-CHPA Application Illustration .............................................................3
Figure 1-3 QX3440-CHPDa Application Illustration ...............................................................4
Figure 2-1 Ground Screw Location ......................................................................................20
Figure 2-2 Back Panel View and Chassis Ground Location (QX3440-C) ............................20
Figure 2-3 Back Panel View and Chassis Ground Location (QX3440-D) ...........................21
Figure 2-4 Rack Mounting Instruction (1)............................................................................22
Figure 2-5 Rack Mounting Instruction (2)............................................................................22
Figure 2-6 DC Power without/with Grounding Application ..................................................23
Figure 2-7 Panel Views - Main Shelf and Controller Card ...................................................24
Figure 2-8 DC Power without Grounding Application...........................................................25
Figure 2-9 Panel Views - Main Shelf and Controller Card ...................................................26
Figure 2-10 DC Power without/with Grounding Application .................................................27
Figure 2-11 Panel Views - Main Shelf and Controller Card .................................................28
Figure 2-12 SFP module......................................................................................................32
CXR.
viii
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Figure 2-13 Alarm Relay ......................................................................................................34

Figure 3-1 HDLC using E1 router ........................................................................................46
Figure 4-1 Loopback Block Diagram ...................................................................................50
Figure 5-1 QX3440 Controller: Menu Tree ..........................................................................55
Figure 7-1 Inband Management Diagram ..........................................................................144
Figure 8-1 Connection for QX3440 and Y-BOX with BNC connectors...............................149
Figure 8-2 Connection for QX3440 and Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors ...........................150
Figure 8-3 Line Protection for Quad E1 Card ....................................................................152
Figure 12-1 Sample Application for 3E1/3T1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Ring Setup
...................................................................................................................................181
Figure 12-2 Application for BERT and Loopback Diagnosis ..............................................191
List of Tables
Table 2-1 Cards Can NOT Use +48Vdc ..............................................................................27
Table 2-2 Power Connector for Fan Tray ............................................................................30
Table 2-3 Power Connector for Main Unit............................................................................30
Table 2-4 DB9 Console Port Pinout Table ...........................................................................30
Table 2-5 RJ-45 Pin out for Ethernet Port............................................................................31
Table 2-6 Pin out for Clock Input/Output..............................................................................32
Table 2-7 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Enabled.......................33
Table 2-8 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Disabled ......................33
Table 2-9 FUSE Relay Connector .......................................................................................34
Table 3-1 Alarm Action Table ..............................................................................................43
Table 3-2 System Alarm Setup Table ..................................................................................43
Table 3-3 Bundle Alarm Setup Table ...................................................................................44
Table 3-4 Front-Panel LED Table ........................................................................................45
Table 3-5 Error Message Table ...........................................................................................47
Table 5-1 Power consumption .............................................................................................70
Table 5-2 DS1 Protection Supported Card ........................................................................108
Table 5-3 Auto-Cleared Alarm Types ................................................................................114
Table 5-4 BOC Message for DS1(T1) Operation ...............................................................130
Table 5-5 SSM Message for E1 Operation ........................................................................130
Table 13-1 Hardware Info Display Commands ..................................................................195
Table 13-2 Hardware Info Upload Commands ..................................................................196
Table 15-1 Stratum Clock Requirements ..........................................................................210
CXR.
ix
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
1.1. Function Description

The QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE are the latest Packet Controller modules designed for the CXR
Access DCS-MUX series products which combine various access interfaces and transport over
GbE or E1/T1 uplinks. These interfaces are compatible with other CXR products.
The QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE controller supports SAToP/ CESoPSN/ MEF8 Pseudowire

Protocols to transport TDM data streams with timing information over packet switched network. It
provides ideal migration solutions from TDM to IP networks without hassle.
The QX3440 Access DCS-MUX provides full non-blocking Nx64K cross-connect matrix up to
4096 DS0. Traffic grooming and segregation between the TDM interfaces and the Pseudowires
provides flexibility and efficiency, and makes the QX3440 an ideal solution for DACS (Digital
Access Cross-Connect System) and ADCB (Add/Drop Channel Bank) applications: one or more
of the WAN ports can be used as a Drop & Insert function with fractional E1/T1 lines, which can
be muxed into a full E1/T1 line.
Different types of DS0 circuits (including voice, data, and etc.) can be cross-connected to the DS0
time slot of any E1 line and pseudowire circuits.
QX3440 has a number of plug-in slots in regular size and mini size. (Card size to slot compatibility
is detailed on the next page.) Most of the plug-in cards have LED indications. System redundancy
is available in dual controller and power modules, making it an excellent fit for critical applications.
While 1+1 link protection is available for E1, and T1 modules, path protection for end-to-end
Nx64K circuit protection is available for 3E1/T1.
The QX3440 supports local control and diagnostics by using a VT-100 terminal connected to the
console port. It supports Ethernet, Telnet, and SNMP, so that it can be controlled and diagnosed
from remote ends. An in-band management channel with GUI is available as well.
The QX3440 consists of a rugged reinforced aluminum chassis, giving this equipment a durable
structure and a long-lasting physical life.
CXR.
1
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
1.2. Application
E1/T1 E1/ T1 E1/T1

NETWORK
SNMP Ma nager
E1/T1 LAN
QX3440-CHPA
C D CTRL 1 CTRL 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 POWER 2
C C
P P
U U
A B POWER 1
1 2
Dual- slot plug-in cards:
TTA*
Mini- Slot plug - in Cards Single- Slot plug-in Cards :

1 - channel E1 3 - channel E1
1 - channel T1 4 - channel E1
Mini Quad E1 4 - channel T1
Mini Quad T1
8 - channel OCU - DP*
32 WAN port Router
64 WAN port Router 2 - channel G. SHDSL w/ o line power
Fiber Optical Interface 4 - channel G. SHDSL w/ o line power
1 - channel DTE (1X.21, 1V.35, 8 - channel G.703 64Kbps*
1RS232) 8 - channel Dry Contact I/O
3 - channel RS232
8 - channel Dry Contact I/O type B
CLKa, CLKb*
8 - channel 2W/4W E&MA, E&MB*
ECA
ABRA 12 - channel FXSA
QMAGA 12 - channel FXOA
QFXO 12 - channel Magneto
QFXSA 4 - channel C 37.94
QEMA 8 - channel RS232 with X.50 subrate
1- channel OCU-DP* 6 - channel V.110*
8 - LAN - port / 64 - WAN - port Router - B
8- Data Bridge*
1FOM-A*
8UDTEA
6UDTEA
VoIPGA*
*Future option
Figure 1-1 QX3440-CHPA Application Illustration

CXR.
2
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
E1/T1 E1/ T1 E1/T1

NETWORK
SNMP Ma nager
E1/T1 LAN
QX3440-C-CHPA
CTRL 2 P
Mi ni P lug-in (C) O
CTRL 1 Mi ni P lug-in (B)
W
E
Plug- in(3) Mi ni P lug-in (A)

R
Mi ni P lug -In (D)

Mini- Slot plug - in Cards
Plug- in(2) Plug-in (5)
Plug- in(1) Plug-in (4) 1 - channel E1
1 - channel T1
Mini Quad E1
Low-Speed Single-Slot plug-in Cards Mini Quad T1
3 - channel E1 64 WAN port Router
3 - channel T1 Fiber Optical Interface
4 - channel E1 1 - channel DTE (1X.21, 1V.35,
1RS232)
4 - channel T1
8 - channel G.703 64 Kbps* 3 - channel RS232
8 - channel OCU - DP* ECA

ABRA
2 - channel G. SHDSL w/ o line power
QMAGA*
4 - channel G SHDSL w o line power
QFXO
8 - channel Dry Contact I/O
QFXSA
8 - channel Dry Contact I/O type B
QEMA
8 - channel 2W/4W E&MA, E&MB*
M1C37
12 - channel Magneto
CLKa
4 - channel C 37.94
CLKb*
8 - channel RS232 with X.50 subrate
6 - channel V.110*
8- LAN - port / 64 - WAN - port Router - B
VOIPGA*
8UDTEA
*Future option
6UDTEA
Figure 1-2 QX3440-C-CHPA Application Illustration
CXR.
3
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
E1/T1 E1/T1
E1/T1 NETWORK
SNMP
Mana ger
E1/T1
LAN
Mini Slot Plug-in Cards
1-channel T1 interface card
1-channel E1 plug-in card
QX3440-D-CHPA Mini Quad E1 plug-in card
CPU 2 P
CPU 1
O
W
E
R
Mini Quad T1 plug-in card
A B C D E F H J K 1-channel C37.94 mini plug-in card
2-LAN ports/64 WAN port Router/bridge plug-in card
Fiber Optical Interface
1 - channel DTE
(1X.21, 1V.35, 1RS232)
3 - channel RS232a
4 - channel E&M voice plug-in card

4 - channel FXS voice plug-in card
4 - channel FXO voice plug-in card
4 - channel magneto voice plug-in card
3 - channel Terminal Server (D)
1 - channel OCU-DP*
Echo Cancellation plug-in card
Analog Bridge card
CLKa
CLKb*
*Future option
Figure 1-3 QX3440-D-CHPA Application Illustration
CXR.
4
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
1.3. Specifications for QX3440

QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE Controller
Number of Ports 2
Speed 10/100/1000M bps
Connector RJ45 for twisted pair GbE, LC for optical GbE, auto detection
Ethernet Function
Basic Features MDI/MDIX for 10/100/1000M BaseT auto-sensing
Ping function contained ARP
Pseudowire
Concurrent PW Up to 64
Encapsulation Format SAToP, CESoPSN, MEF-8 (CESoETH)
QoS User configurable 802.1p CoS, ToS in out-going IP frame
Clock Source Internal, Line Interface, External (E1/T1/2048 KHz from CLKa/CLKb* module), Adaptive Clock
Recovery for Pseudowires, SyncE
Alarm Relay Max. Current: 1A for 24VDC, 0.625A for 48VDC

Fuse alarm, performance alarm from CLKa/CLKb* module
Management
Console DB9S(DCE), female, RS232 connector
Micro USB connector
User Interface: Menu driven VT-100
Ethernet 2 Combo GE port, Connector: RJ45 & SFP
SNMPv1/v3, Telnet/SSH, support Radius client function
Web GUI support
Inband Management Inband 64 Kbps, support HDLC/PPP
System Configuration Parameters Active Configuration, Stored Configuration, and Default Configuration (Stored in
Non-volatile Memory)
Configuration Upload/Download through TFTP/SFTP
Performance Monitor
Performance Registers Last 24 hours performance in 15 minute intervals and last 7 days in 24 hour summaries
Separate Registers Network, user, and remote site
Performance Reports Reports include E1 Bursty Errored Second, Severe Errored Second, Degraded Minutes. Also
available in Statistics (%)
Alarm Queue To record the latest alarm type, location, date and time
Threshold Bursty Seconds, Severely Errored Second, Degraded Minutes
Diagnostics
Loopback E1/T1 interface (Line Loopback, Payload Loopback, Local Loopback), DTE Loopback
(DTE-to-DTE, DTE to Line)
Test Pattern For Controller: 220-1, 215-1, 211-1, 29-1, and 4-byte user define pattern
Front Panel
Controller LED Indicators Power, ACTIVE, ALARM
Physical /Electrical
Model QX3440-CHPA QX3440-C-CHPA QX3440-D-CHPA
Dimensions (W×H×D) 442 x 222.5 x 223.5 mm 442 x 137 x 223.5 mm 442 x 88.5 x 223.9 mm
Power Single/ Dual -48 Vdc: -36 to -75 Single/ Dual -48 Vdc: -36 to -75 Single/ Dual -48 Vdc: -36 to -75
Vdc, 150 Watts max. Vdc, 150 Watts max. Vdc, 100 Watts max.
CXR.
5
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Single AC plug-in power supply Single AC: 100 to 240 Vac,

(100 to 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz) 50/60 Hz
Temperature Operating -20 to 65°C -20 to 65°C -20 to 65°C
Storage -30 to 70°C -30 to 70°C -30 to 70°C
Weight Net Weight 5.0Kg (11.02lbs) 3.5Kg (7.72lbs) 5.0Kg (11.02lbs)
Max. Weight 10.0 Kg (22.05lbs) 7.5Kg (16.53lbs) 10.0 Kg (22.05lbs)
Humidity 0-95%RH (non-condensing) 0-95%RH (non-condensing) 0-95%RH (non-condensing)
Mounting Desk-top stackable, 19” /23” Desk-top stackable, 19” /23” rack Desk-top stackable, 19” /23”
rack mountable mountable rack mountable
Power Consumption Max 110 Watts Max 57 Watts Max 45 Watts
Certification
EN55032 Class A, EN55035, FCC Part 15 Class A, EN62368-1, IEC61850-3
Compliance
ITU G.703, G.704, G.706, G.732, G.736, G.823, G.826, G.711, G.712, G.775, O.151, V.11, V.28, V.54
IETF SNMP v.3 (RFC2571~2575), ITU-T Rec.G.821, ITU-T Rec.G.827
Transportation Cards
Network Line Interface - T1
Line Rate 1.544 Mbps ± 32ppm Output Signal DSX1w/0, -7.5, -15 dB LBO
Line Code AMI or B8ZS Framing D4/ESF (selectable)
Input Signal DSX-1 0 dB to -30 dB w/ALBO Connector RJ48C
Network Line Interface - E1

Line Rate 2.048 Mbps ± 50 ppm Framing ITU G.704
Line Code AMI or HDB3 Connector BNC/RJ48C
Input Signal ITU G.703 Electrical 75 ohm Coax/120 ohm twisted pair
Output Signal ITU G.703 Jitter ITU G.823
Network Line Interface - Mini 4E1

Line Code AMI or HDB3 Connector DB25S
Network Line Interface - Mini 4T1

Line Rate 1.544 Mbps ± 32 ppm Framing D4/ESF
Line Code AMI/B8ZS Connector DB25S
Input Signal ITU G.703 DSX-1 0dB to -30dB w/ALBO Output Signal ITU G.703 DSX-1 w/o, -7.5, -15dB LBO
ITU G.703 DSX-1 w/short (0-110,
110-220, 220-330, 330-440, 440-550,
550~660 feet)
Jitter AT&T TR 62411 Pulse Template AT&T TR 62411
Data Rate n * (64) Kbps (n=1-24)
Network Line Interface - 3E1

Function Support DS0-SNCP circuit level protection
Network Line Interface - 3T1

Line Rate 1.544 Mbps ± 32 ppm Framing D4/ESF
Output Signal DSX-1 w/0, -7.5, -15dB LBO
Line Code AMI/B8ZS Connector RJ48C
Input Signal DSX-1 0dB to -30dB w/ALBO Pulse Template AT&T TR 62411
Jitter AT&T TR 62411 Surge Protection FCC Part 68 Sub Part D
Data Rate N * (64) Kbps (n = 1 to 24)
Network Line Interface - 4E1

CXR.
6
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Network Line Interface - 4T1

Line Rate 1.544 Mbps ± 32 ppm Output Signal DSX1w/0, -7.5, -15 dB LBO
Line Code AMI or B8ZS Framing D4/ESF (selectable)
Input Signal DSX-1 0 dB to -30 dB w/ALBO Connector RJ48C
Fiber Optical Interface (FOM)

Source MLM Laser Line Code Scrambled NRZ
Wavelength 1310 ± 50 nm, 1550 ± 40 nm Detector Type PIN-FET
50 Km reach Protection Optional 1+1 APS
NOTE: Longer or shorter, 15 to 120Km, on special order.
Optical Module Fiber Direction Wavelength (nm) Connector Distance (km)

NHB3S Dual uni-directional 1310 SC (Subscriber Connector) 30
(was SAA)
NHB5S Dual uni-directional 1310 SC (Subscriber Connector) 50
(was SBB)
NHB3F Dual uni-directional 1310 FC (Fiber Connector) 30
(was SCC)
*NHC2S Dual uni-directional 1550 SC (Subscriber Connector) 20
(was SDD)
SEE Dual uni-directional 1550 SC (Subscriber Connector) 100
WHD2S Single bi-directional (master) 1310/1550 SC (Subscriber Connector) 30
(was SSM)
WHE2S Single bi-directional (slave) 1550/1310 SC (Subscriber Connector) 30
(was SSS)
NOTE: Other fiber optical options available on special order
* For the orders of the listed optical module, please contact your CXR sales representative.
G.SHDSL Line Interface

Number of ports 2 or 4
Line Rate for 4-channel G.shdsl n x 64Kbps (n= 3 to 31)
Line Rate for 2-channel G.shdsl n x 64Kbps (n= 3 to 15)
Line Code 16-TCPAM, full duplex with adaptive echo cancellation
Connector RJ45
Electrical Unconditioned 19-26 AWG twisted pair
Sealing current Max. 20 MA source current
Clock Source From System, Line
Diagnostic Test G.SHDSL Loopback: To-LINE, To-bus
BERT: QRSS
TDMoEA
Combo Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) Interface
Number of Ports 2
Speed 10/100/1000M bps
Connector RJ45 for twisted pair GbE, LC for optical GbE, auto detection
Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) Interface
Number of Port 2
Speed 10/100/1000 BaseT
Connector RJ45
Ethernet Function
Basic Features MDI/MDIX for 10/100/1000M BaseT auto-sensing
Ping function contained ARP
Packet Transparency Packet transparency support for all types of packet types including IEEE 802.1q VLAN and
802.1ad (Q-in-Q)
QoS User configurable 802.1p CoS, ToS in out-going IP frame
Traffic Control Ingress packet Rate limiting buckets per port for Ethernet port
Supporting Rate-based and Priority-based rate limiting for LAN port
Granularity:
a. From 64 Kbps to 1 Mbps in increments of 64 Kbps
b. From 1 Mbps to 100 Mbps in increments of 1 Mbps
c. From 100 Mbps to 1000 Mbps in increments of 10Mbps
Pause frame issued when the traffic exceeding the limited rate before packet dropped
CXR.
7
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
following IEEE802.3X
Link Aggregation WAN supports Link Aggregation
Jitter & Wander
PPM: per G.823 Traffic
Standards Compliance
IEEE IETF
802.1d MAC Table Learning and STP RFC2236 IGMP Snooping v2*
802.1p Priority Code Point
802.1q VLAN RFC2495 E1/T1 OAM
802.1s MSTP*
802.1w RSTP
802.1ad Tag Stacking (Q-in-Q) RFC 4553 SAToP
802.3ad Link Aggregation RFC 5086 CESoPSN
ITU
MEF G.823/G.824 Traffic Interface
8 CESoETH
Certifications
EMC EN55022 Class A, EN50024, FCC Part 15 Subpart B Class A
Safety EN60950-1(CE)
* Future option
Serial and Digital Access

DTE Interface (X.21)
Data Port 1-port DTE X.21 card
Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps, n = 1 to 32
Connector DB15S
DTE Interface (V.35)

Data Port 1-port V.35 card
Connector DB25S (optional conversion cable DB25S to M34 connector)
DTE Interface (RS449)

Data Port 1-port EIA530 card
Connector DB25S (optional conversion cable DB25S male to DB37 female connector for RS449)
DTE Interface (RS232/V.24)

Data Port 1-port RE232 card
Data Rate 56 or 64 Kbps *n, n=1 - 2
Mapping Any sequential time slots
DTE Interface (RS232-X.50 mux. 8-port)

Data Port Up to twelve 8-port RS232 cards
MUX Maximum 5 subrate port per 64K bps
Data Rate Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K
Asynchronous
Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K
Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K
Synchronous
Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K, 48K, 64K
Card Type Port Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Eight RJ48 Async/ Async/ Async Async/ Async/ Async Async Async
Sync Note 1 Sync Note 1 Sync Note 1 Sync Note 1
Two DB44 + Two RJ48 Async/Sy Async/Sync Async Async/Sync Async/Sync Async Async Async
nc
Connector Eight RJ48 (port 1 to port 8)
DB44 (port1,port2,port3), DB44 (port4,port5,port6), RJ48 (port7) and RJ48(port8)
Conversion Cable A three-into-one conversion cable adapts the DB44 connector to 3 connecters (one DB9S and two
DB25S)
Electrical RS232 Interface, DCE
CXR.
8
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Note 1: Sync- with rate up to 19.2 Kbps achieved by oversampling at 64 Kbps
DTE Interface (RS232 with V.110 encoding, 6-port)

Data Port Up to 6 port
MUX Maximum 6 subrate port / 64Kbps
Protocol Supports V.110
Data Rate Asynchronous Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K
Synchronous Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K,
Card Type Port Number
1 2 3 4 5 6
RJ48 Async Async Async Async Async Async
DB44 Sync/Async Sync/Async Async Sync/Async Sync/Async Async
Connector DB44 (port1,port2,port3) DB44 (port4,port5,port6) or
RJ48 (port 1 to Port 6 are 6RJ48)
Alarm Remote Alarm
RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical RS232 Interface, DCE
DTE Interface (RS232 with V.110 encoding, 3-port)

Data Port Up to 3 ports
Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 7.2K**, 9.6K, 14.4K**, 19.2K
Asynchronous
Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 7.2K**, 9.6K, 14.4K**, 19.2K, 38.4K
Data Rate Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 7.2K**, 9.6K, 14.4K**, 19.2K
Synchronous 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 7.2K**, 9.6K, 14.4K**, 19.2K, 38.4K, 48K,
Independent mode
64K
Connector DB44
Port Number
DB44 1 2 3
Sync/Async Sync/Async Async
Remote Alarm
Alarm
RTS Loss
To-DTE (To Line)
Loopback
To-DS1
Electrical RS232 Interface, DCE or DTE
**proprietary transport mode for 7.2K and 14.4K data rate
6UDTEA Card
Mode 1: Sub-Rate mode

Data Port Up to 2
Data Rate Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K
Asynchronous
Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K,
Synchronous Independent mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K, 48K, 64K
Connector RJ48-ASYNC (Port5, Port6)
Alarm Remote Alarm
RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE
Protocol V.110
DTE Interface (X.21/RS232/RS422)

Data Port Up to 4
Data Rate Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K
Asynchronous
CXR.
9
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K,

Synchronous
Connector DB44 (Port1, Port2), DB44 (Port3, Port4)
Alarm Remote Alarm
RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE
Protocol V.110
Mode 2: N*64K Mode

DTE Interface (X.21/RS232/V.35/V.36/EIA530/RS449)
Data Port Up to 4 (Port 1 to 4)
Data Rate Synchronous N*64kbps, N = 1 to 32
Asynchronous mode is not supported.
Connector DB44 (Port 1, Port 2), DB44 (Port 3, Port 4)
Alarm RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE
Note: When oversampling is enabled in MODE2, port 5 ~ 6 will be disabled.
Mode 3: Hybrid Mode

DTE Interface (X.21/RS232/V.35/V.36/EIA530/RS449)
Data Rate Synchronous N*64kbps, N = 1 to 32 for port 1 ~ 3 ; N = 1 to 20 for port 4
Asynchronous mode is not supported.
Connector DB44 (Port 1, Port 2), DB44 (Port 3, Port 4)
Alarm RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE

Data Port Up to 2 (Port 5 and Port 6)
MUX Maximum 2 oversampling port
Data Rate No Synchronous mode supported
Asynchronous 200, 300, 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K, 57.6K, 115.2K, 128K
Connector RJ48 (Port 5, Port 6)
Alarm Remote Alarm
RTS Loss
Loopback To-DTE
To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE
Mode 4: Clock Pass Through

DTE Interface (X.21/RS449/RS422/RS232/V.35/V.36/EIA530)
Data Rate Synchronous 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K, 38.4K
Tx and Rx byte count
Connector DB44
Alarm LOLC, LOCH, CRE
Loopback To-DTE, To-DS1 (To Line)
Electrical DCE
Note: Port 5~6 are disabled in Mode 4.
Mode 5: N x 64K with Local and Remote Loopback

DTE Interface (X.21/RS449/RS422/RS232/V.35/V.36/EIA530)
Data Rate Synchronous N*64kbps, N = 1~32
Connector DB44
Protection DTE signal duplicated via Y-box and transported by working and protection cards
Alarm RTS Loss, FPGA fail
Diagnostics DTE Loopback: To-DTE, To-DS1 (To Line)
Local and Remote Loopback (except for X.21 interface)
V.54 standard
CXR.
10
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
BERT
Electrical DCE
Note: Port 5~6 are disabled in Mode 5.
8 Port OCU-DP Interface Card

Ports 8 Ports for each card
Line Status Indicator Per Port 1 dual color LED; Red for LOS, Green for SYNC
Network Connector RJ48S
Electrical Network Connection Tip/Ring and Tip1/Ring1
Transmit Source Impedance 135 Ohms +/-20%
Receive Input Imdednace 135 Ohms +/-20%
Receiver Sensitivity 0 to 43 dB loop loss at 72K & 56K
Dynamic Range 0 to 34 all other rates Automatic line equalization
Pulse Amplitude +/- 1.5V (+/-10%) peak, all rates except 9.6K
+/-0.75 (+/-10%) peak at 9.6K
Bipolar Return to zero, 50 duty cycle
Sealing Current Typically 16mA DC
Operating Modes 4-wire DDS
Switched 56 support is optional
Circuit Rates SYNC: 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 56, 72 kbps (64k) clear channel
Conforms with AT&T Pub 41458
Encoding and decoding rules Use bipolar violation to indicate control information: Idle, out of service, Zero
Subsitution using unframed loops
Maintenance control DSU Non-latching loop-back code (for 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 56k circuit rate)
DSU Latching loop-back (TIP, LSC, LBE, FEV) code (for 72k circuit rate)
Machine maintenance OCU/DP card operation:

Payload loopback
OCU loopback
Local loopback
Bi-directional loopback
V.54 remote loopback code
Custom defined remote loopback code
BERT test support all ones, all zeros, 2047,511,63 pattern.
Fault and Performance LOS, OOS, ES, SES and UAS alarm.
Current, last 96 registry and 7 days performance storage.
Enviroment Operating: 0-50°C
Storage: -25-75°C
Humidity: Up to 90% RH non-condensing
Specification Standard ANSI T1.410; AT&T Pub 62319, AT&T Pub 62310, ITU-T V.54
Co-directional Interface
Interface ITU G.703 64 Kbps co-directional interface
Connector 120ohm, RJ48
Line Distance Up to 500 meters
Loopack DTE Payload Loopback, Local Loopback
Voice and Analog Access

Voice Card (QEMA)
Connector One 44-pin connector, adaptor cable included for 4 RJ45 connectors.
Power 110-220Vac, ±48Vdc
Alarm Conditioning CGA busy after 2.5 seconds of LOS, LOF
Encoding A-law or µ-law, user selectable as a group
Impedance Balanced 600 or 900
Gain Adjustment -10 to +7 dB / 0.1dB step for transmit (D/A) gain
(Per-port setting)
Gain Variation ± 0.5 dB at 0 dBm0 input
Frequency Response
I/O Power Range ± 0.5 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz, coincide with ITU-T G.712
A/D Analog input level: -66 dBm (0.00039 Vrms) ~ + 3 dBm (1.09 Vrms)
D/A Analog output level: -66 dBm (0.00039 Vrms) ~ + 4 dBm (1.22 Vrms)
Longitudinal Balance > 63dB
Longitudinal Conversion Loss ＞ 46dB
Total Distortion
CXR.
11
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Idle Channel Noise ＞ 35 dB at 0 dBm0 input

Wire Mode
Signaling ＜ -65 dBm0p
M Lead Output Current 2 wire and 4 wire
E Lead Sensor Current Type I, Type II, Type III, Type IV, Type V, and TO (Transmission Only)
EM Type Setting 18 mA (maximum)
Relative Humidity 0.3 mA (minimum)
Carrier Connection Jump Selectable
0% to 95%
Side A and side B setup by Jump
All in-band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process.
Customer is responsible for in-band signaling compatibility between a telephone and a switch, or between a PBX and a
switch.
Voice Card (8EMA)

Connector Eight RJ45
Power 100-240Vac or ±48 Vdc for 8EMA
Encoding A-law or µ-law, user selectable together for all
Impedance Balanced 600 or 900 ohms
Gain Adjustment (Per-port setting) -16 to +7 dB / 0.1dB step for transmit (D/A) gain
-16 to +14 dB / 0.1dB step for receive (A/D) gain
I/O Power Range A/D Analog input level: -66 dBm (0.00039 Vrms) ~ + 3 dBm (1.09 Vrms)
D/A Analog output level: -66 dBm (0.00039 Vrms) ~ + 4 dBm (1.22 Vrms)
Gain Variation ±0.5 dB at 0 dBm0 input
Frequency Response ±0.5 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz, coincide with ITU-T G.712
Longitudinal Conversion Loss > 46dB
Total Distortion ＞ 35 dB at 0 dBm0 input
Idle Noise ＜ -65 dBm0p
Carrier Connection Side A ( exchange side) and Side B (carrier side) setup by side switch
Idle Channel Noise Max. –65 dBm0p
Wire Mode 2 wire and 4 wire (programmable)
Signaling Type 1, Type 2, Type 3, Type 4, and Type 5, Transmit only (programmable)
Modems Full compatibility with V.90 modems
 All in-band signaling tones are carried transparently by the digitizing process.
 Customer is responsible for in-band signaling compatibility between a telephone and a switch, or between a PBX and a
switch.
QMAGA (old crank-handle hot-line telephones), MRD (Manual Ring Down) Voice Card
Connector RJ11 x 4
Power 110-220 Vac or ±48 Vdc
Impedance Balanced 600 or 900 ohms (for magneto telephone impedance )
Gain Adjustment -16 to +7 dB / 0.1dB step transmit gain (D-A)
-16 to +13 dB/0.1dB step receive gain (A-D)
Signal/ Distortion > 25dB with 1004 Hz, 0dBm input
Frequency Response ± 0.5 dB from 300 to 3400 Hz, coincide with ITU-T G.712
Signaling
Minimum Detectable Ringing Voltage 16 Vrms
Crank Detectable Across L1 & L2 Mode (Tip and Ring), L1 & GND Mode(Tip and GND)
Crank Detected time Valid crank: more than 250 ms
Invalid crank: less than 160 ms
Ringing Generation Voltage: 76 Vrms (sine wave)
Frequency: 25Hz
Ring duration Software configurable options:
1. PLAR OFF
Continuous
Ring duration depends on cranking time
CXR.
12
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
One Time
Crank the phone for one time, and the ring duration of the far-end phone
could be 0.7, 1.0, 1.5 or 2.0 sec
2. PLAR ON
when FXS phone off-hooked, the ring duration of the far-end magneto phone
could be 0.7, 1.0, 1.5 or 2.0 sec
Ringing Send Across L1 & L2 Mode (Tip and Ring), L1 & GND Mode(Tip and GND)
Signaling Turn Magneto Phone crank (Ringing across Tip and Ring or Tip and
Ground)
Signaling Bit A,B,C,D Programable
 Signaling is carried transparently by the digitizing process.
 Use Magneto card default setting (PLAR OFF) for communications between magneto telephones
 Use Magneto card PLAR ON mode setting for communications between a magneto telephone and a regular
telephone
 PLAR stands for Private Line Auto Ring down.
12 MAGA (old crank-handle hot-line telephones), MRD (Manual Ring Down) Voice Card
Connector RJ11 x 12
Power 110-220 Vac or ±48 Vdc
Encoding A-law or µ-law, user selectable per card configurable
Impedance Balanced 600 or 900 ohms (for magneto telephone impedance )
Gain Adjustment -21 to +7 dB / 0.1dB step transmit gain (D-A)
-21 to +13 dB/0.1dB step receive gain (A-D)
Signaling
Minimum Detectable Ringing Voltage 16 Vrms
Crank Detectable Across L1 & L2 Mode (Tip and Ring), L1 & GND Mode(Tip and GND) per port
software programmable
Crank Detected time Valid carnk: more than 250 ms
Invalid crank: less than 160 ms
Ringing Generation Voltage: 76 Vrms (sine wave)
Frequency: 25Hz
Ring duration Software configurable options:
1. PLAR OFF (Continuous Mode)
Ring duration depends on cranking time
2. PLAR OFF (One-time) Mode

Crank the phone for one time, and the ring duration of the far-end phone
could be 0.7, 1.0, 1.5 or 2.0 sec
3. PLAR ON
When FXS phone off-hooked, the ring duration of the far-end magneto
phone could be 0.7, 1.0, 1.5 or 2.0 sec
Ringing Send Across L1 & L2 Mode (Tip and Ring), L1 & GND Mode(Tip and GND)
Signaling Turn Magneto Phone crank (Ringing across Tip and Ring or Tip and Ground)
Signaling Bit A,B,C,D Programable
 Signaling is carried transparently by the digitizing process.
 Use Magneto card default setting for communications between magneto telephones
 Use Magneto card PLAR mode setting for communications between a magneto telephone and a regular telephone
Voice Card (QFXO)

Quad FXO voice card (4 FXO per plug-in)
Connector 1, 2, 3, or 4 FXO per RJ11 connector
Power for QFXO 110-220Vac, -24Vdc, and –48Vdc
AC impedance Balanced 600 or 900 ohms (selectable together for all)
Longitudinal Rejection 55 dB
Loss Adjustment 0, 3, 6, or 9 dB transmit & receive
CXR.
13
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
FXS Loop Feed -48Vdc with 25mA current limit per port
Jumper Selectable: 25mA, 30mA, 35mA
FXO Ringing REN 0.5B (AC)
Detectable Ringing 25 Vrms
Loop Resistance ≤ 1800 Ω
DC impedance > 1M Ω
(ON-HOOK)
DC 235 Ω @ 25mA feed
impedance(OFF-HOOK)
90 Ω @ 100mA feed
FXS Ringing Support 2 REN per port (1 REN = 6930Ω + 8 µF)
20 Hz, other frequencies: 16.7Hz, 25 Hz, 50Hz (Jump selectable)
78 Vrms (sine wave) (45 Vrms to 86 Vrms wide range by Resistor selectable)
2 sec on 4 sec off, or 1 sec on 2 sec off optional for PLAR
Metering Pulse 12KHz/ 16KHz
 Power: 10dBm
 Sensitivity: -27dBm (-21dBm to -45dBm by Resistor selectable)
Signaling Loop Start, GND-Start, Metering Pulse (12KHz, 16KHz), DTMF, Dialing Pulse, PLAR,
Battery Reverse (supports Line Reverse Signaling for Billing)
switch.
 -24Vdc power is for FXS PCB version C and up
Voice Card (QFXSA)

Quad FXSA voice card (4 FXS per plug-in)
Connector 1, 2, 3, or 4 FXS per RJ11 connector
Power ±48Vdc
Encoding A-law or µ-law, user selectable
AC impedance Balanced 600 or 900 ohms (user selectable)
Longitudinal Rejection 55 dB
Gain Adjustment -21 to +3 dB / 0.1 dB step for transmit (D/A) & receive (A/D) gain
Loop Feed ±48Vdc with 25mA current limit per port
Jumper Selectable: 25mA, 30mA, 35mA
Ringing Support 2 REN per port (1 REN = 6930Ω + 8 µF)
16.7Hz, 20Hz, 25 Hz, 50Hz (user programmable)
Default 78 Vrms (sine wave) (64 Vrms by Jumper setting)
2 sec on 4 sec off, or 1 sec on 2 sec off optional for PLAR (user programmable)
Metering Pulse 12KHz/ 16KHz (2.4Vrm/1Vrm user programmable)
Signaling Loop Start (Metering Pulse, DTMF, Dialing Pulse, PLAR), GND-Start (Tip Open, Ring GND),
OOS Alarm, Battery Reverse
switch.
Voice Card (12FXSA, 12FXOA)

Connector Twelve RJ11
AC Impedance Balanced 600 or 900 ohms (selectable together for all)
Cross talk measure Max -70dBm0
Gain Adjustment FXSA: -21 to +3 dB / 0.1dB step transmit & receive
FXOA: -21 to +10 dB / 0.1dB step transmit & receive
Variation of Gain ±0.5dB
FXOA Ringing REN 0.5B (AC)
Detectable Ringing 25 Vrms
Loop Resistance ≤ 1800 Ω
DC Impedance (ON-HOOK) > 1M Ω
CXR.
14
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
DC Impedance (OFF-HOOK) 235 Ω @ 25mA feed ; 90 Ω @ 100mA feed

FXSA Loop Feed -48Vdc with 25mA current limit per port
Jumper Selectable: 25mA(default=25mA), 30mA, or 35mA(sn=S1)
FXSA Signalling Normal / PLAR: Private Line Auto Ring down
FXSA Ringing 1 REN at 5K meters per port

16.7Hz, 20Hz, 25Hz, 50Hz, user selectable for all ports
Jumper selectable: 64, 76, and 85 Vrms (triangle wave), (default= 76 Vrms for Ring
Voltage)
2 sec on 4 sec off, or 1 sec on 2 sec off optional for PLAR ON
FXSA Tone Alarm Tone: 480Hz/620Hz/-24dBm
Ring Back Tone: 440Hz/480Hz/-19dBm
FXSA functions Basic functions: Bettary Reverse, Loop Star, PLAR
Optional functions: PLAR ON/PLAR bit programmable, Ground Start, and/or Metering
Pulse.
Signaling Bit A,B,C,D Programable bit
switch.
 FXSA specification shown above support FXSA hardware version N and up.
Data Processing
Dry Contact Type A Interface
Inputs - Outputs -
8-channel 2-port per card, 4-pair per port 8-channel 8-pair per card
Connector RJ45 Connector Screw type
Internal Resistance 1K Initial Insulation Resistance Min. 100M ohm (at 500 Vdc)
Activation Current 3 ma Max. Current 5A
Deactivation Current 1.5 ma Max. Voltage 100 Vdc, 250 Vac
Allowable Current 4 ma Short-circuit Current 5A
Input port Provide 3.3V output
Dry Contact Type B Interface

Inputs - Outputs -
8-channel 2-port per card, 4-pair per port 8-channel 8-pair per card
Connector RJ45 Connector Screw type
Internal Resistance 100 K Initial Insulation Resistance Min. 1000M ohm (at 500 Vdc)
Activation Current 3 ma Max. Current 2A
Deactivation Current 1.5 ma Max. Voltage 220 Vdc, 250 Vac
Allowable Current 4 ma
Echo Canceller Card

Echo Cancellation 64ms uni-directional, 64ms bi-directional and 128ms uni-directional
Channel Up to 64 channels
Functions - one way or bi-direction cancellation from PCM bus to ECA card
- E1/T1 multichannel echo cancellation
PCM encoder/decoder Compatible with ITU-T G.711 A-law/Mu-law coding.
LED Indicator Multi-color indication
Compliant ITU-T G.165 and ITU-T G.168-2000 and 2002
ABRA Card
Group Up to 8 groups per card, 16 members per group
Analog Bridge Mode Master/Slave Architecture

Downstream : 2 to many
Upstream : many to 2
Voice Conference Mode with Any-to-any conference bridge

CAS Signalling
Up to 16 members in one conference group
Silence detection/suppression
RS232 Data Bridge Mode Master/Slave Architecture
CXR.
15
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Downstream : 2 to many (up to 14 Slave units)

Upstream : many to 2
Voice Protection Mode One Master to two Slaves for 1+1 protection
Analog signals only
42 protection groups
OCU-DP Data Bridge Mode Master/Slave Architecture

Downstream: 1 to many (up to 14 Slave units)
Upstream: many to 1
PCM encoder/decoder Compatible with ITU-T G.711 A-law/Mu-law coding.
LED Indicator Multi-color indication
DTE Interface (Data Bridge Card)

Data Port Up to twelve 8-port data bridge card (each card supports up to 120 DS0 for data bridge)
Feature 20 end points per multi-drop circuit to into a logical ended 56K or 64K channel
Per port supports bridge function to N remote Trib. Site (N=1~20)
Data Rate Asynchronous Support to receive 1200 to 19200 bps asynchronous data via oversampling
channel
Bridge function one port with one DS-0 to many (Maximum is 20 for remote Tributary data box )
20 drops for each DS0 to remote Tributary data box and 8 ports RS232 shared the 128 channels.
Packet Access
Router-A Interface
Number of ports 2 LAN ports, Max. 64 WAN ports, Each WAN port has data rate n x 64K bps, 1≤ n ≤32 (≤ 4Mbps for
total of all 64 WAN ports
Physical Interface 10/100 BaseT x 2
Connector RJ45
Routing protocol RIP-I, RIP-II, OSPF, Static
Supporting Protocols PPP (IPCP/BCP), MLPPP, HDLC, Frame Relay, and Cisco compatible HDLC, NAT/NAPT, DHCP
Diagnostic Ping, Trace route
QoS Rate limit
Router-B Interface
Number of ports 8 LAN ports, Max. 64 WAN ports. Each WAN port has data rate n x 64K bps, 1≤ n ≤32 (≤ 8Mbps for
total of all 64 WAN ports
Physical Interface 10/100 BaseT x 8
Connector RJ45
Routing protocol RIP-I, RIP-II, OSPF, Static
Supporting Protocols PPP (IPCP/BCP), MLPPP, HDLC, Frame Relay, and Cisco compatible HDLC, NAT/NAPT, DHCP
Diagnostic Ping, Trace route
QoS Rate limit, Policy based Diffserv/DSCP
VLAN Q-in-Q IEEE 802.1ad
Teleprotection Access
C37.94 Interface
820nm
Ordering Code Mode Data Rate (Mb/s)
ZRATT 1*8 Multi-Mode 2M
Wavelength (nm) Distance (km) Connector
820 2 ST
TX Power (dBm Peak) RX Power (dBm Peak) Note

MIN. TYP. MAX. Wavelength MIN. TYP. MAX. Wavelength
-19.8 --- -12.8

792/820/865 --- --- --- --- 50/125μm Fiber Cable
-16 --- -9 --- --- --- 62.5/125μm Fiber Cable
--- --- --- --- --- --- -40

792/820/865 Peak Optical Input Power
Logic Level HIGH
CXR.
16
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
--- --- --- -24.0 --- -10.0 Peak Optical Input Power
Logic Level LOW
1310nm
NFB3T 1*9 Single-Mode 125M
1310 30 ST
TX Power (dBm) RX Power (dBm)

-15 --- -8 1261/1310/1360 --- --- -34 1260/---/1610
1310nm
QFBTT 1*9 Multi-Mode 125M
1310 2 ST
TX Power (dBm) RX Power (dBm) Note

-20 --- -14 1270/1310/1380 --- --- -32 1260/---/1610 Output Optical Power
62.5/125 μm fiber
-23.5 Output Optical Power
50/125 μm fiber
1550nm
NHC2S 1*9 Snigle-Mode 155M
1550 20 SC
TX Power (dBm) RX Power (dBm)

-15 --- -18 1480/1530/1576 --- --- -34 1260/---/1610
Transfer Trip Card

Input
Number of channels 4-channel : 4 pairs per card
Input Connector Screw type
Voltage Range 48/125V type
Output
Number of Channels 4-Channel: 4 pairs per card
Output Connector Screw type
Max Current 30A (200ms per C37.90)
Max Voltage 280 Vdc
Operation time 3ms
Alarm Relay
Maximum continuous current 1A (inductive)
Maximum breaking current 1A (resistive)
Maximum open circuit voltage 280 Vdc
Maximum operation time 15ms
Environmental
Operating temperature -20°C to +60°C
Humidity 5 - 95% non-condensing
Isolation
CXR.
17
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
ANSI ANSI C37.90.1 SWC
EMI/RFI
ANSI ANSI C37.90.2
Y-BOX
LINE
Connector BNC or RJ48C
Port Number For Y-BOX with BNC connectors: 4 line ports
For Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors: 16 line ports
Protection For Y-BOX with BNC connectors: support 2 Quad E1 plug-in card, 4 active E1, 4 standby E1
For Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors: support 8 Quad E1 plug-in cards, 16 active E1, 16 standby E1
For Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors: support 8 Quad T1 plug-in cards, 16 active T1, 16 standby T1
Mechanical
Height 44.5 mm/ 1.75 in
Width 432 mm/ 17 in
Depth 100 mm/ 3.9 in
Front Panel View (with BNC connectors)
Y-BO X
A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX A-TX LINE-TX B-TX
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4
A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX A-RX LINE-RX B-RX
Front Panel View (with RJ48C connectors)
A L INE 9 B A LINE 10 B A LINE 11 B A LINE 12 B A LINE 13 B A LINE 14 B A LINE 15 B A LINE 16 B
Y-BO X
A L INE 1 B A L INE 2 B A L INE 3 B A L INE 4 B A L INE 5 B A L INE 6 B A L INE 7 B A L INE 8 B
Clock and Alarm

CLKa Card Specifications
Clock Input (CLK1_In, CLK2_In) 2.048Mbps, 1.544Mbps, 2048KHz
Clock Output (CLK1_Out) 2.048Mbps, 1.544Mbps, 2048KHz
Alarm Output (Fuse, SYS_ALM) Max. Current: 1A for 24VDC, 0.625A for 48VDC
Fuse alarm, System alarm

LED Indicator Multi-color LED indication
CXR.
18
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
2. INSTALLATION
• Only qualified service personnel shall install and maintain the system.
• This equipment must be connected to an earth socket-outlet, which
has a permanent connection to protective earth with a cross-sectional
area of not less than 2.5 mm2.
• Ensure protective earthing connected before install/uninstall
telephone wires.
• Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
• Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is
specifically designed for wet locations.
• Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the
telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.
• Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
2.1. Site Selection

The following list indicates site selection guidelines. Follow this list to choose a proper installation
site.
QX3440/-C:
 Location of the rack should be part of the central office equipment layout design.
Considerations should be given to entrance cable routing and -48 Vdc (150W) power.
 The installation site should have -48 Vdc power. An optional AC/DC power converter can be
used. Use only with Class 2 power source, -48 Vdc, 150 watts.
QX3440-D:
 Ensure that your installation site confirms to all environmental and structural regulations. A
power supply must be available that conforms to the QX3440-D power requirements.
2.2. Mechanical Installation

The QX3440 can be installed as a desk top unit or mounted on a 19 inch or a 23 inch rack.
Mounting of the unit in a rack follows standard telephone rack mount practices. Accessories for
installing on a 19 inch or 23 inch rack is provided. As a desk-top unit, the QX3440 is stackable.
CXR.
19
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
2.2.1. Chassis Grounding
QX3440-CHPA
The chassis ground screw is located at the left-hand side of the rear panel.
FAN TRAY FAN TRAY
-V +V ALM -V +V ALM
DC48V DC48V
Grounding Screw
Figure 2-1 Ground Screw Location
When attaching a ground wire to the chassis ground screw, follow these instructions.
 Use copper grounding conductors of 18 AWG
 Conductors should not be of dissimilar metals.
 The bare conductors should be coated with anti-oxidant before crimp connections are made.
 Any unplated connection surfaces, connectors, braided strap and bus bars must be bought to a bright finish
and coated with anti-oxidant before connections are made.
QX3440-C-CHPA
The chassis ground screw is located in the left hand side of the rear panel.
Grounding Screw
Figure 2-2 Back Panel View and Chassis Ground Location (QX3440-C)
When attaching a ground wire to the chassis ground screw, follow these instructions.
 Any unplated connection surfaces, connectors, braided strap and bus bars must be bought
to a bright finish and coated with anti-oxidant before connections are made.
QX3440-D-CHPA
When attaching a ground wire to the chassis ground screw, please follow these instructions.
CXR.
20
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Grounding Screw
Figure 2-3 Back Panel View and Chassis Ground Location (QX3440-D)

 Any un-plated connection surfaces, connectors, braided strap and bus bars must be bought to
a bright finish and coated with anti-oxidant before connections are made.
2.2.2. Rack Mounting Instruction

Rack mounting ears (brackets) and screws are included in the shipping package. QX3440-D can
be installed as a desk top unit or mounted on a 19 inch or a 23 inch rack. Mounting of the unit in a
rack follows standard telephone rack mount practices. Accessories to install on a 19 inch or 23
inch rack is provided.
Wear a grounding wrist strap while installing the CXR equipment. Familiarize yourself with the
instructions in this manual before commencing any work.
See the example with QX3440-D.
When installing QX3440-D equipment into racks, follow these guidelines:
· Consider the effect of additional electronic equipment and its generated heat on the
QX3440-D system equipment.
· Make sure the equipment rack is properly secured to the ground and, if required, to the
ceiling.
· Ensure that the weight of the equipment does not make the rack unstable.
· When mounting equipment between two posts or rails, ensure that the minimum clearance
between the sides is 485 mm (19 in.).
· Maintain a minimum clearance of 500 mm (19.7 in.) in front of the equipment and 500mm
(19.7 in.) at the rear.
NOTE: For proper operation of the QX3440-D and the terminal server module in
particular, the QX3440-D chassis must be grounded. Connect the chassis
ground screw to a good earth connection with an AWG 16 wire at least.
There are two differenet ways to use the mounting ears. To install the device on a wider rack,
tighten the mounting ears on the device as follows:
CXR.
21
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Figure 2-4 Rack Mounting Instruction (1)
To install on a narrawer rack, tighten the mounting ears on the device as follows:
Figure 2-5 Rack Mounting Instruction (2)
2.3. Electrical Installation

Central office -48 Vdc power is wired to terminal blocks in the front of the QX3440. Central office
alarm system is wired to the Alarm Relay terminal blocks. For connection to the CONSOLE port
for maintenance and administration (For example, VT-100 terminal connection), a CONSOLE
port port with DB9 connector and the other CONSOLE port with micro USB connector are located
on the front panel.
NOTES: 1. Usually the CTRL1 is primary unless the CTRL1 fails to boot up. Users can tell which
controller card is primary or redundant from the status of controller cards' ACTIVE LED
light. If ACTIVE LED is flashing green, that specific controller card is primary. When one
controller card fails, the other becomes master and remains master even when the failed
one is recovered.
CXR.
22
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
2.3.1. Power Connection

QX3440
The application drawing of DC power with grounding and without grounding is shown below.
When the user uses DC power without grounding ( ), noise problems and E1 errors may occur.
Grounding Application With/Without DC Power:

The application of DC power with grounding and without grounding is as follows.
NOTE: When the user uses DC power without grounding ( ), noise problems and E1
errors may occur.
Power
Module
C C
P P Location
U U
A B 1 2 POWER 1
Power Module Power Supply

(1) 48 Vdc
POWER
-V +V
-V
+V 48V 12A
-V
+V
(2) -48 Vdc
-V
-V +V
+V
GND
-V
-V +V
+V
(3) +48 Vdc GND
: means short
Figure 2-6 DC Power without/with Grounding Application
CXR.
23
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
CCPB-2GE C C
P P
PWR ACT ALM U U
A B 1 2 POWER 1
ACO
CONSOLE
10/10 0/1G LINK/AC T

SNMP
Main Access DCS-Mux Shelf - Front Side

LIN K/AC T 10/10 0/1G
ETH 2
Sp eed/ALM
RX
LINK/ACT
TX
LIN K/AC T
ETH 1
FAN TRAY FAN TRAY

10/10 0/1G
-V +V ALM -V +V ALM
DC48V DC48V
Sp eed/ALM
RX
LINK/ACT
TX
Main Access DCS-Mux Shelf - Rear Side
Figure 2-7 Panel Views - Main Shelf and Controller Card
CXR.
24
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-C
The application drawing of DC power with grounding and without grounding is shown below. When the user
uses DC power without grounding ( ), noise problems and E1 errors may occur.
QX3440-C
Power Module
CPU 2
Mi ni P lug - in (C )
P
O
Location
CPU 1 W
E
Mi ni P lug - in (B )
48V
R
-V +V
Plug- in ( 3 ) Mi ni P lug - in (A ) Mi ni P lug - in ( D )
Plug- in ( 2 ) Plug- in ( 5 )
5A
PWR
(1) 48 Vdc
-V
-V +V
+V
(2) -48 Vdc

-V
-V +V
+V
GND
* : 12FXS/FXO, 24FXS/FXO, QFXS/QFXO,

8E&M, QE&M, and 12 MAG can NOT use
(3) +48 Vdc* +48 Vdc.
-V
-V +V
+V
GND
: means short
NOTES: 1. 12FXS & 24FXS HW: Ver.N and up can support +48Vdc.
2. The re-sync time for repluging any voice card into QX3440-C shelf is about 1 minute.
Figure 2-8 DC Power without Grounding Application
CXR.
25
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
CPU 2 P
Mini Plug - in (C) O
CPU 1 W
Mini Plug - in (B ) E
R
CCPB-2GE Plug- in ( 3 ) Mini Plug- in (A) Mini Plug- in (D)
PWR ACT ALM Plug - in ( 2 ) Plug- in ( 5 )

ACO Plug - in ( 1 ) Plug- in ( 4 )
Main Access DCS – Mux Shelf – Front Side

CONSOLE

SNMP
LIN K/AC T 10/10 0/1G
ETH 2
Sp eed/ALM
RX
LINK/ACT
TX
LIN K/AC T
ETH 1
10/10 0/1G
Sp eed/ALM
RX

LINK/ACT
TX
CXR.
26
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-D
The application of DC power with grounding and without grounding is as follows.
NOTE: When the user uses DC power without grounding ( ), noise problems and E1
errors may occur.
QX3440-D
Power Module
CPU 2 P Location
O
W
CPU 1 E
48V
R
-V +V
A B C D E F H J K
5A
PWR
(1) 48 Vdc
-V +V
-V
+V
(2) -48 Vdc

-V
-V +V
+V
GND
* : QFXS/QFXO and QE&M can NOT use +48 Vdc.

(3) +48 Vdc * -V
-V +V
+V
GND
: means short
Figure 2-10 DC Power without/with Grounding Application
Table 2-1 Cards Can NOT Use +48Vdc

Product Cards Can NOT Use +48Vdc
QX3440-D QFXS/QFXO and QE&M
Note: QEMA CAN support +48V.
CXR.
27
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
CCPB-2GE
CPU 2 P
PWR ACT ALM

O
W
CPU 1 E
R
ACO
A B C D E F H J K
CONSOLE
Main Access DCS – Mux Shelf – Front Side

SNMP
LIN K/AC T 10/10 0/1G
ETH 2
Sp eed/ALM
RX
LINK/ACT
TX
LIN K/AC T
ETH 1
10/10 0/1G
Sp eed/ALM

RX
LINK/ACT
TX
CXR.
28
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
2.3.2. Fan Tray Setting (Optional)
FAN TRAY
C C
P P
U U
A B 2 POWER 1
1
NOTES: 1. The external fan tray is optional (applicable to A chassis only). The QX3440
chassis does not contain a fan.
2. The fan power socket in the back of the QX3440 chassis would be activated if it
uses -48 Vdc power supply. In addition, the fan power module will not work when it
uses -24 Vdc power supply.
Figure 2-12 Front Panel View - Fan Tray
Figure 2-13 Rear Panel View - Fan Tray
Figure 2-14 Top View - Fan Tray
CXR.
29
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Table 2-2 Power Connector for Fan Tray

Signal Description
ALM Alarm
+V +DC Return
-V -DC 48 Volts
Table 2-3 Power Connector for Main Unit

Signal Description
-V -DC 48 Volts
+V +DC Return
Chassis Ground
The QX3440-C/D also offer 100 to 240VAC power module.
2.4. Controller Card

The Controller Card features the following interfaces:
2.4.1. DB9 Console Port

The controller card offers a DB9 CONSOLE port interface for connecting a VT-100 monitor. The
interface runs at a data rate of 9600 baud. Pinout details are displayed in Table 2-4 below.
Table 2-4 DB9 Console Port Pinout Table

Pin Number Signal Source
1 Data Carrier Detect To DTE
2 Receive Data To DTE
3 Transmit Data From DTE
4 Unassigned
5 Signal Ground
6 Data Set Ready To DTE
7 Unassigned
8 Clear to send To DTE
9 Unassigned
2.4.2. Micro USB Console Port

The micro USB CONSOLE port on the QX3440 Controller card connects directly to the USB port
of a PC using a USB cable. It allows the connection to use the VT-100 terminal.
NOTE: QX3440-CCPB-DC controller offers two Console ports with different interfaces. If you
connect both QX3440 DB9 Console and Micro USB Console ports to your PC, the priority of
the Micro USB Console will be higher than DB9 Console port.
CXR.
30
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
2.4.3. SNMP Port

Management and configuration of a QX3440 device can be achieved via built-in SNMP port. The
SNMP port (RJ45 connector) is for connection via Ethernet to an SNMP-based NMS or to the
VT-100 terminal console via Telnet or SSH.
2.4.4. ACO Button

The ACO (Alarm Cut-off) button on the front panel can be pushed to cut off alarm relay.
2.4.5. Ethernet Port

The 10/100/1000 Ethernet Port has an RJ-45 Connector. The pin-out assignments are listed
below.
An ethernet port can be connected via Ethernet 10/100/1000-Base-T interface. Pin definitions are
listed in the table below.
Table 2-5 RJ-45 Pin out for Ethernet Port

Pin Signal Description
1 Transmit Data + Output from QX3440
2 Transmit Data - Output from QX3440
3 Receive Data + Input to QX3440
4 No Connection
5 No Connection
6 Receive Data - Input to QX3440
7 No Connection
8 No Connection
2.4.6. SFP Port

SFP optical module is not included. Please order separately for SFP optical modules from SFP
optical brochure.
NOTE: The SFP connector becomes active when the SFP transceiver establishes a link to a
network device.
2.4.6.1. Fiber Optic Connections (Optional)

To install fiber-optic cables, connect a fiber cable with an LC type connector to transmit and
receive ports of the transmission system.
To set up an optical line, a SFP module and an optical cable are required.
CXR.
31
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
NOTE: Non-CXR SFP modules are not guaranteed to work with our equipments. It is
strongly recommended to buy CXR-logo SFP modules.
Figure 2-15 SFP module
First install the SFP module into the cage on the plug-in card. Then, plug the optical cable into the
SFP module. The LED light will turn from red to green. The optical installation is now complete.
2.5. ClKa Common Module (Optional)

2.5.1. Clock Input/Output
External timing input and output is provided by the QX3440-CLK module: T1/E1 bits/Hz
input/output clock.
Table 2-6 Pin out for Clock Input/Output
PIN Signal Direction Description

CLK1 IN 1 RX TIP 1 Into QX3440
CLK1 IN 2 RX RING 1 Into QX3440
External Clock 1
CLK1 OUT 1 TX TIP 1 Out of QX3440
CLK1 OUT 2 TX RING 1 Out of QX3440
CLK2 IN 1 RX TIP 2 Into QX3440
CLK2 IN 2 RX RING 2 Into QX3440 External Clock 2
2.5.2. Alarm Input/Output

The QX3440 provides facilities to report an alarm input for associated equipment, e.g. power unit
failure battery condition, cabinet door etc. and 2 dedicated alarm outputs. The alarm outputs are
related to the fuse alarm indicator and the system alarm indicator.
CXR.
32
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
PIN Signal
ALM IN 1 Alarm Input GND
ALM IN 2 Alarm Input POWER
2.5.3. Alarm Relay

The Alarm Relay is applied to configure the Alarm Relay output present on the front panel of
QX3440-CLK card.
Alarm Relay outputs are provided for operators to drive external alerting devices, such as flashing
lights and sirens. The Alarm Relay signals when an alarm occurs. The Alarm Relay will act on
pre-set conditions configured by the user according to the tables below.
When the alarm setup is Enabling, the alarm relay circuit will be triggered if the alarm is detected.
To return the alarm relay to the normal state after it is enabled, the user has three modes to
choose from: Auto, Period and Manual. For detailed information, please refer to the section
“System Alarm Setup” in the chapter of “System Setup”. When the alarm setup is Disabling, the
alarm relay circuit will stay in the normal state. Activated alarm relay can be deactivated by
pushing the ACO (Alarm Cut-Off) button.
The module supports four inputs (open/short) and three outputs (NC/NO) as shown in the picture
below.
Table 2-7 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Enabled
Circuit
NC + COM NO + COM
Condition
System Power Off Short Open
Alarm On Open Short
Normal State for Auto, Period and Short Open
Manual Mode:
Alarm Cut Off or No Alarm
Table 2-8 Alarm Relay Circuit Contact State When Alarm Setup is Disabled
Circuit
NC + COM NO + COM
Condition
System Power On Short Open
Alarm On Short Open
CXR.
33
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
NOTE: The maximum voltage for the alarm relay is 48Vdc, and the maximum current is 1A.
Figure 2-16 Alarm Relay
2.5.4. Fuse Relay

The fuse relay interface is on the QX3440-CLK card as below:
The fuse relay will be triggered when the condition of the power supply changes (ON/OFF). For
example, when the power is “ON”, NC will open relative to COM, and NO shorted relative to COM.
If the fuse in the power supply card is brown (“OFF”), NC will be shorted relative to COM, and NO
will be open relative to COM.
Table 2-9 FUSE Relay Connector

Circuit
NC + COM NO + COM
Condition
System Power On Open Short
NC = Normal Close
COM = Common
NO = Normal Open
CXR.
34
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
2.6. Card Installation

QX3440 Controller, plug-in card, and power modules are all hot-swappable.
2.6.1. Controller Card Installation
QX3440-CHPA
C C
P P
U U
A B 2 POWER 1
1
QX3440-C-CHPA
CPU 2 P
Mi ni P lug - in (C ) O
CPU 1 W
E
Mi ni P lug - in (B ) R
QX3440-D-CHPA
CPU 2 P
O
W
CPU 1 E
R
A B C D E F H J K
- Two slots for controller card

- Procedure for installing controller card:
Step 1 Take out the controller card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Make sure the ejector handle on the controller card is in DOWN position and then insert
the edges of the controller card into the rail guides in corresponding slot.
Step 3 Slide the controller card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Push up the ejector handle and inject the controller card into place. Do not force the card
into the slot because this may damage the pins in the card.
Step 5 Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws in the latching chassis in order to secure the card
to the mechanism.
2.6.2. Tributary Card Installation
CXR.
35
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CHPA
C C
P P
U U
A B 2 POWER 1
1
QX3440-C-CHPA
CPU 2 P
Mi ni P lug - in (C ) O
CPU 1 W
E
Mi ni P lug - in (B ) R
QX3440-D-CHPA
CPU 2 P
O
W
CPU 1 E
R
A B C D E F H J K
- Four mini-slots, twelve regular size slots

- Procedure for installing plug-in cards:
Step 1 Take out the plug-in card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Insert the edges of the plug-in card into the rail guides in corresponding slot.
Step 3 Slide the plug-in card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Press the plug-in card into the slot so that the front panel is flush with the chassis. Do not
force the card into the slot because this may damage the pins in the card.
to the mechanism.
2.6.3. Card Replacement

There are two main activities for replacing plug-in cards for the CXR device: Remove the old card
and then install the new one. Please follow the step-by-step procedures below.
2.6.3.1. Remove the Old Tributary Card

Step 1 Locate the old card.
Step 2 Use a screwdriver to loosen the captive screws that secure the card to the chassis.
CXR.
36
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Step 3 Pull the card out of the slot.
NOTE: It may result in static damage when handling the cards. Please utilize an antistatic wrist
strap, static-dissipating work surface, and antistatic bags when dealing with them.
2.6.3.2. Install the New Tributary Card

After you remove the old tributary card, follow the steps below to install a new tributary card.
Step 1 Take out the new card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Insert the edges of the card into the rail guides in corresponding slot.
Step 3 Slide the card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Press the plug-in card into the slot so that the front panel is flush with the chassis.
Step 5 Secure the plug-in card in the chassis by pushing the ejector levers in so it locks in place.
Do not force the ejectors in because this may damage the pins in the card.
to the mechanism.
If the same type of plug-in card is inserted, no additional configuration changes are required. The
QX3440 system will apply old card’s configuration to the new one automatically. When a plug-in
card is removed and replaced with a plug-in card of a different type, the default configuration is
assigned to the new plug-in card. The user must set the configuration for each change of plug-in
card type. If the same type of plug-in card is inserted, depending on plug-in card type.
NOTE: Please note that the QX3440 system will NOT apply the configuration of previous cards
when a new RTA/RTB is inserted; RTA & RTB would keep the original configuration.
2.6.3.3. Remove the Old Controller Card

Step 1 Locate the old controller card.
Step 2 Use a screwdriver to loosen the captive screws that secure the card to the chassis.
Step 3 Make sure the ejector handle on the controller card is in UP position.
Step 4 Push down the ejector handle and pull the controller card out of the slot.
NOTE: It may result in static damage when handling the cards. Please utilize an antistatic wrist
strap, static-dissipating work surface, and antistatic bags when dealing with them.
2.6.3.4. Install the New Controller Card

After you remove the old controller card, follow the steps below to install a new controller card.
Step 1 Take out the controller card from the antistatic bag.
Step 2 Make sure the ejector handle on the controller card is in DOWN position and then insert
the edges of the controller card into the rail guides in corresponding slot.
Step 3 Slide the controller card into the chassis until it stops.
Step 4 Push up the ejector handle and inject the controller card into place. Do not force the card
into the slot because this may damage the pins in the card.
to the mechanism.
If user replaces both controller cards at the same time, the new controller card will start with the
default configuration. On the other hand, if the backup controller card is replaced by a new one,
CXR.
37
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
and the hardware/firmware/brand of the new controller card is the same to the working controller
card, then the configuration on the new controller card will synchronize to the working controller
card automatically.
2.6.3.5. Dual-CTRL protection

When a QX3440 has two controller cards, on applying power, the left or the lower controller
(CTRL1) will always be the primary, and the right or the upper controller (CTRL 2) will always be
the redundant. If the redundant card’s configuration is different from the primary, the redundant
CTRL will synchronize its configuration from the primary CTRL after the boot up and initiation
process. This synchronized takes 1-2 minutes. During configuration synchronization, the LED will
show the following sequence:
 LED for primary CTRL: <power> green, <active> flashing green.

 LED for redundant CTRL: <power> flashing green, <active> dark.
 LED for redundant CTRL: <Alarm> RED means Redundant version (brand, hardware, or
firmware) is different with Primary
The redundant CTRL will send heart beat every 0.5 second. After 5 consecutive no response
from the primary CTRL, meaning the primary CTRL dead, then the redundant CTRL will take over
the QX3440 and become the primary. Primary warm restart (reset) will not switch control back to
the left CTRL, yet Primary cold restart will. Switching time is less than 50ms.
Condition:
 The Brand, Hardware and the Firmware version of CTRL1 and CTRL2 MUST be the
SAME for controller protection.
 Go to Controller Menu > (I) System Information > (A) Dual CTRL Information to check the
redundant CTRL info: the serial number, hardware and software version and the state of the
redundant controller card. Both Controller cards need to have the same hardware and
firmware version to enable the protection.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = D ua l C T RL I nf o rma t i on == = 1 5: 2 0:3 3 08 / 11 / 20 2 1
[ - - -- - -- - -- - -- C TR L 1 - - - -- - -- - -- - -- - ] [-- - - -- - -- - -- - C T R L2 --- - - -- - -- - -- - -]
S e r ia l N u mb e r : 7 80 Ser i a l N um b er : 77 9
H a r dw a re Ve r si o n : V er. C Har d w ar e V e rs i on : Ve r .C
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n : V 13. 0 3 .0 1 ( 0 57 5 ) Sof t w ar e V e rs i on : V1 3 .03 . 0 1 ( 05 7 5)
C T R L S ta t e : W ork i n g ( SY N C) CTR L St a te : St a ndb y (S Y NC )
 In the Controller Menu, the Redundant Controller shows Enabled, meaning the Dual
Controller Protection function is ON.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = C on t ro l l er Men u == = 1 5: 2 2:0 9 08 / 11 / 20 2 1
S e r ia l N u mb e r : 7 80 Red u n da n t C on t ro l l er : En a b le d
H W : Ve r .C , F P GA 1 : V7 ( 100 ) , F P GA 2 :V 5 (4 0 ) Sta r t T i me : 10 : 0 9: 3 9 1 1 / 17 / 20 2 9
C P L D: V 3( 2 ) Dev i c e N am e : Q X3 4 4 0
S o f tw a re Ve r si o n : V 13. 0 3 .0 1 ( 0 57 5 )
 In the Controller Menu, the Redundant Controller shows Disabled, meaning the Dual
Controller Protection function is not applied.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = C on t ro l l er Men u == = 1 5: 2 2:0 9 08 / 11 / 20 2 1
S e r ia l N u mb e r : 7 80 Red u n da n t C on t ro l l er : Di s a bl e d
CXR.
38
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
H W : Ve r .C , F P GA 1 : V7 ( 100 ) , F P GA 2 :V 5 (4 0 ) Sta r t T i me : 10 : 0 9: 3 9 1 1 / 17 / 20 2 9
2.7. Configuration Setting
2.7.1. Software Configuration Setting

There are three system configurations:
 Factory default
 Current working
 User stored
The factory default configurations are not changeable. Each QX3440 is shipped with all three
configurations set to the factory default configuration.
The current working configuration, which can be saved into nonvolatile memory as a user-stored
configuration, can be changed at any time. When the system is reset, the previous configuration
will be retrieved as the current working configuration.
The user-stored configuration can be retrieved at any time. User can retrieve the user-stored
configuration to overwrite the current working configuration. Please refer to the section of Store/
Retrieve Configuration for the detail operation.
CXR.
39
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
3. OPERATION
3.1. Quick Start for QX3440

After installation, the user may want to familiarize with the equipment immediately. The following
abbreviated instructions will give the user a quick start.
3.1.1. Power On
Turn power on by attaching a power cable to the front of the unit.
3.1.2. Load Default

The unit is shipped with factory default setting. Upon initial power up you will see the following
screen on your VT-100 monitor. The QX3440 will automatically load the system hardware
configuration stored in the flash memory. If you prefer to load the factory default configuration,
press the ACO button during the countdown (ie. 3….2…1).
P r e ss AC O k e y t o l o ad d e fa u lt co n fi g u ra t ion . . .3 . .. 2 .. . 1. . .
I n i t S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n. . .. . Lo a d P r ev i ous
I n i t 3 44 0 P W C o n fi g ura t i on . .. . .
H e a de r c o rr e ct , pa r se c o nf i g. . .
C o n fi g s y nt a x c o rr e ct, s et co n fi g .. . L oa d 34 4 0 P W P r ev i ou s
W a r m R es t ar t .. . s et awd t to wa r m
R e d un d an t b o ar d . .. . .
< < < ta s k r ou t er k is run n i ng > >>
3.1.3. Using Terminal
There are two ways to configure the unit:

(1) Via DB9 CONSOLE port
To use the RS232 interface to configure the unit, connect a VT-100 terminal to the DB9
CONSOLE port.
(2) Via Micro USB CONSOLE port
To use the Micro USB interface to configure the unit, connect a VT-100 terminal to the CONSOLE
port using the USB cable.
CXR.
40
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
The VT-100 terminal can be a PC running a VT-100 emulator software. Upon connection, press
ENTER and ESC alternately to bring the main menu into view. Press O (Log On) to see the full
menu. Press “S” (System Setup) to review or change the configuration.
NOTE: Before starting using VT-100 terminal, a Virtual COM port (VCP) driver is required. The
Virtual COM port driver will stimute the USB device to appear as an additional COM port
available on the PC. In case the USB device is not recognized automatically by Windows
OS, users can download the VCP driver from the below URL.
https://www.silabs.com/products/development-tools/software/usb-to-uart-bridge-vcp-drivers
3.1.3.1. Map Setup

Connect a VT100 terminal to the Console port. Press <O> to logon, then press <S> for system
setup. Move the cursor to <c> TSI MAP Setup. The TSI MAP Setup screen shows up. To change
the settings, use arrow keys to select time slot. Press <Tab> to change the port values and enter
numbers for the time slot. Press <Esc> to exit the TSI map.
3.1.3.2. Unit Selection

To review or change Slot settings, press <U> Choose a Slot from the main menu.
3.1.3.3. Configuration Settings

The entire configuration is shown when (S) -> System Setup is pressed. To change any setting,
use the arrow keys to move to the target setting. Then press the TAB key repeatedly to cycle to
the desired setting for any selected parameter.
3.2. System Operation
3.2.1. Date
The QX3440 is equipped with a RTC (Real Time Clock). User can change the current date and
time as necessary. RTC also can manage leap year. To save RTC battery life, the RTC is
activated by the manufacturer just before shipping. The RTC battery has a 10 years power-off life
cycle.
3.2.2. Master Clock

This product has a system clock PLL (Phase Lock Loop) which may be phase locked to the DS1
line clock, external clock or internal clock. The default value is “Internal”.
CXR.
41
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
3.2.3. Console Port

3.2.3.1. DB9 Console Port
The DB9 CONSOLE port on the QX3440 Controller connects directly to a COM port of a PC
using a DB9 cable. It allows the connection to use the VT-100 terminal.
3.2.3.2. Micro USB Console Port

The Micro USB CONSOLE port on the QX3440 Controller connects directly to the USB
connector of a PC using a USB cable. It allows the connection to use the VT-100 terminal.
NOTE: Only one console port is active at a time if both are connected to the PC at the same time.
The priority of USB console will be higher than that of DB9 Console port.
Before starting using VT-100 terminal, a Virtual COM port (VCP) driver is required. The
Virtual COM port driver will stimute the USB device to appear as an additional COM port
available on the PC. In case the USB device is not recognized automatically by Windows
OS, users can download the VCP driver from the below URL.
https://www.silabs.com/products/development-tools/software/usb-to-uart-bridge-vcp-drivers
3.2.4. Logon, Logoff, and Password

To log on, you will be asked for a user name and a password. There are two presets of user
privilege levels: OPERATOR and ADMIN.
OPERATOR: Authorized for query the status of certain information and allowed partial
access to the Controller Menu only.
ADMIN: Authorized for the full access to all functions on the Controller Menu and
allowed to change passwords for ADMIN and OPERATOR.
Users can choose either one to logon with different authrozations. Both default passwords are
cxr (case sensitive).
 Password are enabled by default and can only be reset when logon with ADMIN privilege.
 To change the password for the first time, enter the default password when prompted for the
old password.
The password feature is used to augment lock control against unauthorized terminal users from
changing system parameters from the terminal. With password enabled, logon requires entering
the correct password. If password is disabled, no password is required to logon.
To change the password for the first time, enter the default password when prompted for the old
password.
CXR.
42
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
3.3. Alarms
3.3.1. Alarms
The QX3440 has many types of alarm. This includes system to control all of alarm, as listed in
Tables below. Also, QX3440 has alarm queue which records the latest 300 alarms with time
stamp. Alarm queue support controller switched. QX3440 also has alarm history and alarm status
registers which is used to track the alarm count. Each alarm can be individually enabled or
disabled. When disabled, no action is taken. When enabled, alarm counter increments on the
occurrence of the specific type of alarm. When alarm occurs or the counter threshold exceeds,
alarm is triggered.
When alarm is triggered, a relay is activated if it is enabled. Otherwise, no action is taken and only
the specific alarm count is incremented. When threshold level is implemented, it is based on the
15 minutes alarm count register. All alarms are disabled by default. The relay is also disabled by
default.
Table 3-1 Alarm Action Table

Alarm Action Description Alarm Severity
Alarm enable or disable all alarm/event (include plug-in Disable/Enable
card alarm
Relay enable or disable relay while alarm occurs Disable/Manual/Auto/Period
Table 3-2 System Alarm Setup Table

Alarm Type Alarm Description Alarm Severity
Alarm Cut Off issue alarm to Management if "AOC" button is pressed. Disable/Major/Minor/
Critical
Slot Inactive alarm control for: Disable/Major/Minor/
a. slot inactive: pull out plug-in card or plug-in card failed. Critical
b. redundant loss: redundant controller card pull out or failed.
c. redundant checksum error: checksum error while transmit
data from primary to redundant.
d. redundant unsync: redundant SW is not same with primary
controller card.
Slot Start-up alarm control for: Disable/Major/Minor/
a. slot startup: plug in plug-in card. Critical
b. primary startup: first startup controller card.
c. redundant insert: redundant controller card inserted.
d. redundant to primary: redundant controller card become to
primary if primary controller card loss.
Clock Loss alarm control for clock loss (line clock or external clock). Disable/Major/Minor/
Critical
Link Switch alarm control for link switch in e1/t1 protection mechanism. Disable/Major/Minor/
Critical
Map Switch alarm control for map switch (timing switch) mechanism. Disable/Major/Minor/
Critical
Power Alarm alarm control for: Disable/Major/Minor/
a. power fail: power plug-in card failed. Critical
b. fan fail: fan failed.
c. power consumption: power over load.
CXR.
43
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Alarm Type Alarm Description Alarm Severity

Type Mismatch alarm control for: Disable/Major/Minor/
a. plug-in card type mismatch: if plug in plug-in card different Critical
with previous record.
b. link change: if link ID different with previous record.
Dual-CPU Alarm alarm control for: Disable/Major/Minor/
Redundant loss or redundant insert. Critical
Management Alm alarm control for: Disable/Major/Minor/
Logon/off from Telnet or Console port. Critical
SNMP LINK alarm control for: Disable/Major/Minor/
DOWN Alarm Ethernet cable unplugging Critical
NOTES: 1. Disable: no alarm issue.

Major: issue major alarm and enable major relay (if enabled).
Minor: issue minor alarm and enable miner relay (if enabled).
Critical: issue critical alarm and enable major relay (if enabled).
2. If Redundant Loss and Redundant Insert are a pair, the alarm condition will be cleared
when Redundant Insert occurs after Redundant Loss. If Slot no work and Slot start are a
pair, the alarm condition will be cleared when Slot start occurs after Slot no work.
3. ACO button is on the controller’s front panel.
Table 3-3 Bundle Alarm Setup Table

Alarm Type Alarm Severity
ARP/bundle Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
Rx-Lost/bundle Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
Loss of bundle Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
Underrun/bundle Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
Overrun/bundle Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
Bundle L Bit Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
Bundle R Bit Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
IP Conflict Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
ELEC ETH1 LINK Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
ELEC ETH2 LINK Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
OPTI ETH1 LINK Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
OPTI ETH2 LINK Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
ETH1 Looping Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
ETH2 Looping Disable/Major/Minor/Critical
3.4. LED Operation

The front of the QX3440 has LEDs for operation and error indications. The indication can be in
one or more colors. Note that when powering up and self-test is in progress, the unit’s front panel
LEDs are also used to indicate fault conditions.
CXR.
44
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Table 3-4 Front-Panel LED Table

LED Color Indication
Primary CPU
Power Off Power off
Green Power on and operational
Active Off CPU fails
Flashing Green Normal
Alarm Off Normal or alarm disable
Red Alarm
Redundant CPU
Power Off Power off
Flashing Green Normal
Active Off Normal
Alarm Off Normal
Red  Off Redundant CPU board is synchronizing to primary CPU
board.  The synchronization is done.
LED Color Indication

Off Link Down
Green Link Up
LINK/ACT
Flashing Active. Data is being transmitted or received
Green through the Ethernet port.
ETH1-ETH2/SNMP Off 10Mbps
Electrical
Amber 100Mbps
10/100/1000
Green 1000Mbps
SFP Amber 100Mbps
100/1000 Green 1000Mbps
3.5. Telnet Connectivity

To manage the system from internet, QX3440 controller offers Telnet connectivity and SSH
(Secure Shell) to allow user access to the QX3440 controller from any workstation in the network.
SSH (Secure Shell) is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged over a secure channel
between two computers. Encryption provides confidentiality and integrity of data. SSH uses
public-key cryptography to authenticate the remote computer and allow the remote computer to
authenticate the user, if necessary.
There are two interfaces for Telnet function, one is Ethernet port, and the other is in-band port
(in-band management). To use Ethernet interface, use Ethernet/RJ45 port at back panel to
connect with Ethernet network directly. Ethernet and in band port cannot be used at the same
time. To use the Telnet function, make sure IP Address, and Interface parameters are matched.
Once the IP parameters are set, users can verify that the QX3440 is operating properly by using
the ping command to check for a response from the QX3440:
$ping 192.1.100.45
192.1.100.45 is active
CXR.
45
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
The Telnet utility simulates VT-100 to connect with the QX3440 controller. The controller main
menu of terminal screen described at Chapter 6 will be displayed after Telnet connection is
established. Refer to Chapter 6 to manage the QX3440 controller. The QX3440 controller can
maintain 4 Telnet connections simultaneously but only one to log-on at one time.
3.6. Embedded SNMP Agent

The embedded SNMP agent for QX3440 offers standard RFC 1213 MIB II and RFC 1406 DS1
MIB as well as CXR's enterprise MIB. Network manager can use any SNMP compatible network
management system such as Hewlett-Packard's HP Open View to monitor and control QX3440.
Please refer to each respective SNMP manager operation instruction to incorporate the QX3440
enterprise MIB to the system.
E1
QX3440
Telnet
Station E1 Router
QX3440
Ethernet
Figure 3-1 HDLC using E1 router
3.7. In-Band Management Setup

In addition to the console port and the Ethernet port, QX3440 can also allow remote management
through a 64 Kbps time slot from the network line. To achieve remote management by using this
“in-band” technique, two steps are necessary.
First, the Ethernet connection of the remote management terminal must be inserted to a
designated time slot in the network. This time slot can be a DS0 channel in an E1 or a T1 line, or
a DS0 channel in any of the broadband facilities, such as E3, DS3, STM1, or OC3. This can be
achieved through a router-CSU/DSU-mux series of equipment or in one step through a router
interface on the QX3440.
CXR.
46
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
LAN QX3440 QX3440

64 Kbps
E1/ T1 E1/ T1 E1/ T1
Router E1/ T1 NETWORK E1/ T1
In-Band Insertion In-Band Extraction
Management
Terminal
Next, the equipment to be management, namely this QX3440, must extract this 64 Kbps time slot
to the management port. This is accomplished through the TSI screen.
NOTE: Please refer to Appendix B Inband Management for detail.
Table 3-5 Error Message Table

The error messages defined here should correspond to the error codes.
Error Code Error Description
ERROR01 A loopback is in effect
ERROR02 LCD operation is locked
ERROR03 Channel is already in use
ERROR04 can't be in TTM if MCLK=DTE
ERROR05 DTEn is in TTM or speed is 0
ERROR06 Line unsync
ERROR07 No channel is assigned
ERROR08 Please select speed first
ERROR09 A test is in progress
ERROR10 DTE loopback is in progress
ERROR11 Please reduce speed first
ERROR12 Illegal Date/Time format
ERROR13 the DTE1 channel should be B2
ERROR14 the DTE1 channel should be B1+B2
ERROR15 the DTE1 channel should be B1
ERROR16 the DTE1 channel should be B1/B2
ERROR17 Remote doesn't have this function
ERROR18 Remote unit rejected this request
ERROR19 Remote unit didn’t respond
ERROR20 Remote DTE1 TTM should be off
ERROR21 the DTE1 channel should be IDLE
ERROR22 the DTE1 is not installed
ERROR23 undefined response
ERROR24 the unit didn't response
ERROR25 speed can't be zero if MCLK=DTEn
ERROR26 the unit is not installed
ERROR27 ESF or ESF&T1.403 mode is required
ERROR28 ESF&T1.403 mode is required
ERROR29 E1 CRC and FDL must set to be on
ERROR30 LLB or LOCAL LOOPBACK activated
ERROR31 EOC is not ready
ERROR32 Current slot is not HDSL plug-in card
ERROR33 Current slot is not DTE plug-in card
ERROR34 Not enough channels
ERROR35 Slot need to download firmware
CXR.
47
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Error Code Error Description

ERROR36 Time slot conflict
ERROR37 Reserved for future use
CXR.
48
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
4. MAINTENANCE
4.1. Self-Test
When the QX3440 is powered up, a complete self-test routine will check all I/O ports, read/write
memory, and data paths to validate system integrity.
4.2. Diagnostics
Diagnostics for the QX3440 covers Loopback and Test Pattern. Generally, the Loopback
functions might be varied in different type of plug-in cards. Please go to individual plug-in card
manuals for detailed information.
4.3. Near End Loopback

The near end loopbacks such as local loopback, line loopback, payload loopback, DTE loopback,
are activated by the QX3440. The loopbacks are at the near end facility.
NOTE: Deactivate the near-end loopbacks from the terminal, depending on where it was activated.
4.3.1 Local Loopback

Local loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The outgoing signal is looped back through the T1
PCM transceiver. All DS0 time slots are looped back to the receiver path. This loopback test is
activated by the Test command. This loopback test can be used with the PRBS/QRSS diagnostic
test pattern to validate the framer and the line interface circuits of any one port. When used with
a test set connected to another port, this loopback validates the TSI function. An AIS (Alarm
Indication Signal) is sent to the network during the local loopback test. The local loopback test can
be activated from the front panel and terminal.
CXR.
49
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
D Line
S Driver
1
DTE Port
5 4 6
(e.g., V.35) F
E1 Line port
3 r 2 1
a
DTE Card m
e Line
r
(TSI) Driver
Time
Slot E1 Card
Interchange
D Line
S Driver
1
F
3 r 2 1 T1 Line port
FXS Port a
m
FXS Card
e Line
r
Driver
T1 Card
① Local Loopback
② Line Loopback (LLB)
③ Payload Loopback (PLB)
④ DTE port TO-LINE Loopback
⑤ DTE port TO-DTE Loopback
⑥ Time Slot Loopback
Figure 4-1 Loopback Block Diagram
4.3.2 Line Loopback

Line loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The incoming line signal is loopback to the outgoing
signal before the transceiver framer. This loopback is used to isolate the local equipment from a
troubled transmission line. Line loopback test can be activated from the front panel and terminal.
4.3.3 Payload Loopback

Payload loopback is illustrated in Figure 4-1. The incoming signal is loopback to the outgoing line
signal after the transceiver framer. This loopback is used to isolate the TSI from the troubled
transmission line. Payload loopback test can be activated from the front panel and terminal.
4.3.4 Time Slot Loopback

Each individual time slot from an E1 or T1 line can be looped back towards the line, as shown in
Figure 4-1. This is done by use of the time slot interchange function. As many time slots can be
looped back in this way at the same time.
4.4. Far End Loopback

Far-end loopbacks (remote line loopback, remote payload loopback, remote channel loopback,
and DTE loopback) can be activated by the local QX3440 to cause a remote loopback commands
to the far-end facility.
CXR.
50
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
4.5. Test Pattern

To test the DS1 line, four test patterns are available to determine faults such as deficient clock
recovery, fault ALBO level recovery, inadequate jitter margin, presence of bridge taps, and
mis-optioned network interface. These four patterns are framed pattern with proper DS1 frame
pattern as described in the following paragraph.
4.6. Verifying QX3440 Operations

The purpose of this section is not to help the user determine where a possible fault in the network
may lie. For this, users need to know the exact geometry of the network. Then standard network
trouble shooting procedures should be followed, which involve sectionalizing the network and
performing loopback tests on pieces of the network.
The purpose here is to help the user determine whether the QX3440 equipment is at fault after
tests have pointed a suspicious finger at this equipment. The procedures outlined here depend on
test equipment and other equipment the user may have on hand.
The organization of these procedures starts from the simple to the complex. The procedure ends
when a definitive conclusion is made that the QX3440 equipment is at fault. To verify that the
QX3440 equipment is not at fault, specialized equipment such as a BERT (bit error rate test) set
is needed.
4.6.1. Quick Test
4.6.1.1. Independent Test

Remove all line and interface connections to the QX3440. Remove power. After a few seconds,
re-apply power. Observe the power-up self-test sequence. If this fails, then the QX3440 has failed.
See if the LEDs show any abnormal displays. If yes, use the LED indications to guide the user to
test other parts of the network, such as the E1 line, or interface plug-in.
Especially during initial installation, excessive errors may be due to (a) incorrect configuration of
either the QX3440 or of the equipment at the other end of the line, or (b) due to faulty line
installation, which results in excessive noise, cross talk, or impedance mismatch. Especially in
electrically noisy environments, such as central offices, use of shielded cables is mandatory.
4.6.2. Substitution
If a spare QX3440 plug-in is available, then replace the working one with the spare. The user
must carefully configure the spare exactly as the working one. If the substitution clears the
problem, then the original working one is suspect. Note that this is not definitive as other reasons
may cause the same symptom. A good practice is to reconfigure the original one and swap once
more. If both units behave the same, then the problem is probably elsewhere.
CXR.
51
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
4.6.3. Using Loopback Plugs

Without a spare, loopback plugs are handy for diagnosis. Note that internal loopback facilities of
the QX3440 do not include the interface circuitry. Thus a set of plugs, one for each of the
interfaces, line and DTE, are needed for complete tests. These plugs are wired such that signals
from the QX3440 are loopback by hard wire back to the receive pin of the same plug.
Replace the line connector with a loopback plug. Observe if the line is in sync. If not then QX3440
has failed. Then perform a BERT test towards the line. If this fails, then QX3440 has failed.
For the DTE interfaces, a loopback plug must be used in concert with a far end QX3440 if such a
terminal is available, then a PRBS test will determine if that DTE interface is at fault.
Note that if a far end terminal is available, the first test should be a local line loopback to see if the
line is good.
If tests with loopback plug all pass, then the problem is probably elsewhere.
4.6.4. Using Bert Test Set

If a BERT (bit error rate test) set and another QX3440 are available, such as the Fireberd 6000,
then a comprehensive suite of test are available to examine the health of the QX3440. If another
QX3440 is not available, use of the loopback plugs would provide some of the tests otherwise
possible.
With a BERT, each of the ports of the QX3440 can be tested individually. The user must configure
the BERT in the exact way the QX3440 is configured. This is easily done by comparing each of
the options one by one. After checking that the configuration matches, if any one of the ports fails,
then QX3440 has failed.
CXR.
52
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5. TERMINAL OPERATION
QX3440 provides comprehensive report and enhanced configuration capability through the
console port on the front panel. Using single-character commands and arrow keys, the QX3440,
including all its ports, can be configured and monitored through the use of a VT-100 terminal. The
single-character commands are not case sensitive. On each screen, the available commands
and the configurable fields are highlighted.
When a VT-100 terminal is connected to the CONSOLE of front panel, make sure the button is up,
upon power up, a main menu is shown. Users need to log on using the "O" command, after which
the full screen is shown.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === C on t ro l le r M e n u = == 12 : 42 : 3 8 0 9/0 3 / 20 2 1
H W : Ve r .C , F P GA 1 : V8 ( 10) , FP G A2 : V5 ( 49 ) Sta r t T i me : 07 : 1 9: 3 9 0 9 / 03 / 20 2 1
[ D I SP L AY ] [SE T U P]
C - > S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n S - > Sy s te m S e tu p
B - > C lo c k S ou r c e C onf i g ur a ti o n M - > Sy s te m A l ar m Se t up
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e S u mma r y W - > Fi r mw a re Tr a n sf e r
I - > S ys t em In f o rm a tio n V - > St o re / Re t ri e v e C onf i g ur a ti o n
P - > P er f or m an c e R e por t K - > Cl o ck So u rc e Se t up
L - > P se u do W ir e St a tus T - > Bi t E r ro r R a t e T est
N - > A dv a nc e d S t at u s D - > Ps e ud o Wi r e S e tu p
[ L O G] [MI S C ]
F - > L og Of f A - > Al a rm Cu t O f f
O - > L og On X - > Cl e ar Al a rm Q ue u e
U - > C ho o se a S l ot Y - > Co n tr o ll e r R e tu r n t o De f au l t
Z - > Co n tr o ll e r R e se t
> > S PA C E b ar to r ef r esh o r e nt e r a c o m ma n d = = = >
If the password option is turned on, a prompt asking for username and password is shown.
U S E RN A ME : A D MI N P AS S WO R D : X XXX
With the password option is turned on, only after a valid password is entered, the full menu is
shown, otherwise the user is asked to enter the correct password again.
> > I nv a li d i n pu t of pas s w or d ! Tr y a g a in ?[Y / N ]
If password is correctly entered, or if the password option is OFF, the full controller main menu is
shown. Otherwise, only display menu items will be shown, which are in the lower left half of the
screen.
A Radius client function is available for user to login by the account number registered at Radius
Server. For setup details, refer to the RADIUS Setup section under System Setup.
CXR.
53
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.1. Menu Tree

When a VT-100 terminal is connected to the console port, a main menu is displayed on the
VT-100 monitor. The main menu consists of four groups of commands, DISPLAY, LOG, SETUP,
and MISC. The DISPLAY and SETUP sections are introduced in detail in the following chapters.
All commands can be found in the VT-100 Menu Tree illustration below.
A -> System
B -> Clock Source
C -> TSI map
C -> System Configuration D -> Current TSI map
[DISPLAY] A -> Dual CTRL Information

G -> Link Backup Function
B -> Tributary Card Informa
Q -> E1/T1 Port Protection
C -> Power/Fan Status
K -> DS0-SNCP Status
D -> Activation Status
B -> Clock source Configuration
E -> Primary CTRL Syslog
Q -> Alarm Queue Summary M -> Inband Protection Status
F -> Redundant CTRL Syslog
I -> System Information N -> SNTP Status
G -> SFP Information
P -> Performance Report S -> Monitor Signaling
L -> PseudoWire Status
N -> Advanced Status O -> SNMP Port and Ethernet Port State
P -> Bundle Protect Mode Display P -> SNMP Port and Ethernet Port Status
A -> Bundle Source IP Display X -> Ethernet Port Statistics
B -> Bundle Display W -> Any-DS1 Protection Status
C -> Bundle Statistics Display
D -> All Bundle Display
E -> MAC Address Display
F -> Bundle Alarm Display
K -> ACR Clock Source Status
O -> Bundle Arrival Time Display
Q -> Bundle Round Trip Display
R -> Bundle Protect Statistics Display
1 -> Bundle 15-Min/1-Hr/7 Days Perf

2 -> Bundle 15-Min/1-Day Perf
H -> Bundle Arp Status Dispaly
I -> Bundle Ping Status Dispaly
J -> Bundle IP Conflict
N -> BP SYNC Status Display

G -> DPLL Status Display
L -> HDLC Status Display
CXR.
54
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
A -> SNMP System Setup

B -> V1: Trap Setup
A -> System C -> V3: User-Based Security Model Setup
System S -> SNMP Setup D -> V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 1
B -> Password E -> V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 2
H -> TELNET/SSH Setup F -> V3: Target & Notify Setup
I -> Unit Init/Clear G -> Load default SNMPV3 settings
H -> SNMP Port settings
C -> TSI Map Setup
S -> System Setup Map D -> Select a New TSI Map
E -> Copy a TSI Map to Another
F -> Clear a TSI Map
J -> Signaling Convert Table
G -> Link Backup Function

Q -> E1/T1 Port Protection
Protection K -> DS0-SNCP Setup
R -> PDH Ring Protection (NOTE)
T -> PDH Ring Diagnostic (NOTE)
M -> Inband Protection
[Setup]
W -> Any-DS1 Protection
L -> Command Line

N -> SNTP Setup
U -> SYSLOG Setup
Other V -> RADIUS Setup
A -> General Alarm Setup
B -> Bundle Alarm Setup
M -> System Alarm Setup 0 -> FTP type: TFTP or SFTP
W -> Firmware Transfer A -> Download Mainboard Firmware
C -> Download Configuration
D -> Upload Configuration
E -> Download Mainboard Boot-up
R -> Copy Firmware to Redundant
F -> Upload FAE info
V -> Store/Retrieve Configuration A -> Clock Mode Setup
K -> Clock source Setup B -> Clock Source Setup
T -> Bit Error Rate Test C -> SSM Conversion Table Setup
D -> PseudoWire Setup
P -> Bundle Protect Mode Setup
A -> Bundle Source IP Setup
B -> Bundle Setup
C -> Ethernet Setup
K -> ACR Clock Source Setup

F -> Bundle Performance Clear
T -> Bundle Round Trip Delay
R -> PW Jitter Buffer Recenter
Figure 5-1 QX3440 Controller: Menu Tree
NOTE: “PDH Ring Protection Status”, “PDH Ring Protection” and “PDH Ring Diagnostic” are
optional functions. To access these optional functions, you must order the PDH Ring
software separately, or these functions will not show on the VT100 menu.
5.2. Main Menu

The Controller Menu for the QX3440 is shown below. Press “O” to log on. You will be asked for a
user name and a password. Two default users: one is ADMIN; and the other is OPERATOR. Both
default passwords are cxr (case sensitive).
NOTE: Default user names and default password must be keyed in using upper case letters.
CXR.
55
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == Co n tr o ll e r M e nu = = = 1 2 : 56 : 15 0 8 /3 0 /2 0 21
[ L O G] [MI S C ]
F - > L og Of f
O - > L og On
If you log in as ADMIN, key in the password and then press the Enter key, the following full-menu
screen will appear. It allows access to all functions on DISPLAY, SETUP and MISC screens.
C - > S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n S - > Sy s te m S e tu p
B - > C lo c k S ou r c e C onf i g ur a ti o n M - > Sy s te m A l ar m Se t up
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e S u mma r y W - > Fi r mw a re Tr a n sf e r
I - > S ys t em In f o rm a tio n V - > St o re / Re t ri e v e C onf i g ur a ti o n
P - > P er f or m an c e R e por t K - > Cl o ck So u rc e Se t up
L - > P se u do W ir e St a tus T - > Bi t E r ro r R a t e T est
[ L O G] [MI S C ]
F - > L og Of f A - > Al a rm Cu t O f f
O - > L og On X - > Cl e ar Al a rm Q ue u e
U - > C ho o se a S l ot Y - > Co n tr o ll e r R e tu r n t o De f au l t
Z - > Co n tr o ll e r R e se t
CXR.
56
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
If you log in as OPERATOR, key in the password and then press the Enter key, the following
menu screen will appear. It allows access to all functions on DISPLAY screen and partial on
SETUP screen.
C - > S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n
B - > C lo c k S ou r c e C onf i g ur a ti o n
Q - > A la r m Q ue u e S u mma r y
I - > S ys t em In f o rm a tio n
P - > P er f or m an c e R e por t
L - > P se u do W ir e St a tus
[ L O G] [MI S C ]
F - > L og Of f
O - > L og On
U - > C ho o se a S l ot
NOTE: If the terminal screen is illegible, press the "Enter" and "Esc" key alternatively to bring up
the main menu. This is particularly needed if the terminal is connected to the controller
while the power is already applied. If the main menu still fails to appear, check to see that
the terminal is configured as 9600, 8, n, 1, and that a proper null modem or a null modem
cable is used.
5.2.1. System Configuration

Press “C” from the Controller Menu, the screen of System Configuration will show as below:
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = Co n tr o ll e r C o nf i gur a t io n = = = 1 3 :0 7 :16 0 8/ 3 0/ 2 02 1
A -> S y st e m
B -> C l oc k So u rce
C -> TSI map
D -> C u rr e n t T SI m a p
G - > L i nk B ac k up F u nc t io n
Q - > E 1 /T 1 Po r t P r o te c ti o n
K - > D S 0- S N CP Sta t u s
M -> I n ba n d P r ote c t io n S t at u s
N -> S N TP s ta t us
S -> M o ni t o r S ign a l in g
O -> S N MP P or t an d Et h er n et Po r t S t ate
P -> S N MP P or t an d Et h er n et Po r t S t atu s
X -> E t he r n et Por t St a ti s ti c s
W -> A n y- D S 1 P rot e c ti o n S ta t us
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to Ma i n M e nu or e n te r a co m ma n d > >
NOTE: “PDH Ring Protection Status” only available when the “PDH Ring” software has purchased.
You must order the PDH Ring software separately, or these related functions will not show
on the VT100 menu.
CXR.
57
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.1.1. System
Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (A) System
The System Configuration shows the current status of device name, network, console port, TSI
map, and clock
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n = == 1 3 :0 7 :59 0 8/ 3 0/ 2 02 1
[ S y st e m]
D e v ic e N a me : Q X3 4 40
[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: RO U TE R E t h p o rt BP D U: N A
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Fr a m e L B T i m er In t e rf a ce
L A N : ON 19 2 .1 6 8 .0 0 1.0 0 1 2 5 5. 2 55 . 25 5 . 00 0 Et h e rn e t RJ ( e le c tr i c)
W A N : O FF 00 0 .0 0 0 .0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 . 00 0 HD L C 1
U P L IN K : O FF VL A N : OF F CV I D: 1 S V I D: 1 TP I D: 8 8A 8 ( B R ID G E m o d e o nl y )
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: LA N G a te w ay IP A d dr : 19 2 . 16 8 .0 0 1. 2 54
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D [MG M T p o rt ]
[ C O NS O LE po r t] Lin k St a tu s : D ow n
B a u d R at e : 9 60 0 Lin k Sp e ed : N A
D a t a L en g th : 8 -B i ts
S t o p B it : 1 -B i t
P a r it y : N ON E
X O N _X O FF : X OF F
[ T S I m ap ] [Cl o c k]
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Clo c k M o de : N o r ma l
I d l e S ig n al l in g : 1 0 10
< < ES C k e y t o r e tu r n t o pr e vi o us me n u , S PAC E ba r t o r e fr e s h > >
NOTE: NI = Network Interface, EN = Enable (DIS=Disable), LB Timer = Loopback Timer

Clock Mode: Normal and SSM (Synchronous Status Message)
5.2.1.2. Clock Source
Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (B) Clock Source
Normal Mode
The screen of Clock Source Setup will show as below.

Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == Clo c k S o ur c e S ta t u s ( Nor m a l M od e ) = == 1 3 :0 8 :56 0 8/ 3 0/ 2 02 1
M a s te r _C l k S ou r c e : IN T E RN A L C lo c k H ol d -O v e r : OF F
S e c on d _C l k S ou r c e : IN T E RN A L H ol d - O v er St a t e : No r m al
C u rr e nt Cl o c k : MA S T ER _ CL K F r a me Pu l se Pe r i od : 80 0 0 .0 0
C l k_ R ec o ve r _M o d e : MA N U AL
C lo c k S ta t u s : NO R M AL
CXR.
58
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
NOTE: When the option of Clock Hold-Over is ON and the current clock is MASTER_CLK, the
Hold-Over State in the screen will show “NORMAL”. When clock source loss occurs, the
Hold-Over State in the screen will show “Hold-Over”.
SSM Mode with Clock Hold-Over Function is ON
The Clock Source Setup is SSM Mode and the Clock Hold-Over Function is ON. This function will
hold the last loss clock source.
The sample below shows three clock sources are loss started from First, Second and to Third.
The Hold-Over State showed Hold Over means the current clock will use the third clock source
even the third clock source is loss.
The current clock is in First_Clock: Slot_A P1 which means port 1 of slot A. The clock status
shows NORMAL and clock hold-over is OFF.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Clock Source Setup (SSM Mode) === 19:12:45 02/23/2018
ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Change options by TAB, or by typing
First Clock Source : SLOT_A - P1 (Static SSM)

Second Clock Source : SLOT_A - P2 (Static SSM)
Third Clock Source : NONE
Current Clock : FIRST_CLK
Clock Status : NORMAL
Clock Hold-Over : OFF

[Static SSM message]
Internal Clock SSM Message: B
Line Clock SSM Message: B
External Clock SSM Message: B
<< Press ESC key to return to previous menu >>
When first clock is loss, it will switch to second clock source. The clock status shows NORMAL
and clock hold-over is OFF.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Clock Source Setup (SSM Mode) === 21:21:47 02/24/2018

Third Clock Source : INTERNAL (Static SSM)
Current Clock : SECOND_CLK

When second clock is loss, it will switch to third clock source. The clock status shows normal and
clock hold-over is off.
CXR.
59
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CCPB-2GE = == Clo c k S o ur c e S et u p ( S SM M o de ) = = = 21 : 2 1: 4 7 0 2 / 24 / 20 1 8
A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; C h an g e o pt i o ns by T A B, or by ty p i ng

Current Clock : THIRD_CLK

[External Clock 1] [External Clock 2]

Clock Type : E1-CRC Clock Type : T1-D4
Impedance : 75ohm
SSM Sa-bit : Sa4
When third clock is loss, the Hold-Over function is active and the Hold-Over State shows
Hold-Over. The current clock stays in Third Clock Source.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE = == Clo c k S o ur c e S et u p ( S SM M o de ) = = = 21 : 2 1: 4 7 0 2 / 24 / 20 1 8

Current Clock : THIRD_CLK
Clock Hold-Over : Ho l d - o ver


Impedance : 75ohm
SSM Sa-bit : Sa4
You can go to Alarm Queue Summary to check the Alarm report. There are two selections: all
alarm and current active alarm.
Controller Menu > (Q) -> Alarm Queue Summary
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === A la r m Q ue u e = = = 1 1 :4 3 :4 4 07 / 07/ 2 0 21
> > Se l ec t ? *A L L _A l arm C u rr _ Ac t iv e
Use the ARROW keys to move the cursor and then press ENTER key to enter the summary
page as follows:
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === A la r m Q ue u e S u mm a ry = = = 15 : 06 : 1 6 0 1/2 2 / 20 2 1
1 M G MT : M A JR : SU P V_P O R T A DM I N L OG - I N- - --- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - - 1 5 :03 : 4 3 0 1/ 2 2/ 2 02 1
2 C T RL : M A JR : SL O T 5 ST A RT U P- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - - 1 5 :02 : 4 6 0 1/ 2 2/ 2 02 1
3 C T RL : M A JR : SL O T 6 CA R D T YP E M I S MA T CH- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - - 1 5 :02 : 4 0 0 1/ 2 2/ 2 02 1
CXR.
60
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5 C T RL : M A JR : PR I MAR Y ST A RT - UP - -- - - -- - --- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - - 1 5 :02 : 4 0 0 1/ 2 2/ 2 02 1
< < SP A CE ba r t o re f res h or ES C k e y r e tu r n t o ma i n m en u > >
5.2.1.3. TSI Map

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (C) TSI Map
The TSI Map shows the map configuration status for all map, slots and ports.
The sample screen shows Map 1 Slot A Single E1 current map configuration status. It indicates
Slot A Timeslot (TS) 5 to 9 mapping to Slot B Port 1 Timeslot (TS) 5 to 9.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE = = = S y ste m Co n fi g ur a ti o n ( M ap) = == 1 5: 5 0: 4 5 0 6 /28 / 2 02 1

M a p N um b er : MA P _ 1
S l o t N um b er : A P/ T D S L /P O /T S C i rc u i t I nfo . P / T D S L / PO / TS C i rc u it In f o.
P o r t N um b er : P1 = = = == = == = = = == = = == = === = = == = = = = == = = == = == = = == = == = == = == = =
1 d 5 1 1 17 d
M o de l : E1 2 d 18 d
T yp e : N ON - CA S 3 d 5 2 1 19 d
4 d 20 d
5 d B 1 5 21 d
6 d B 1 6 22 d
7 d B 1 7 23 d
8 d B 1 8 24 d
9 d B 1 9 25 d
10 d 26 d
11 d 27 d
12 d 28 d
13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d
15 d 31 d
16 d
< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o p re v io u s m e nu >>
NOTE: D displays either d/v/n. D for data, v for voice, and n for A/u transparent.
Another example shows Slot C with no plug-in card.

QX3440-CCPB-2GE === System Configuration (Map) === 15:50:45 06/28/2021
Map Number:MAP_1
Slot Number: C P/T D SL/PO/TS Circuit Info. P/T D SL/PO/TS Circuit Info.
Port Number:P1 ========= ================ === ========== ===============
Model:
Type:
<< Press ESC to return to previous menu >>
Bundle Setup’s Pseudo Wire will show PW in mapping screen.
CXR.
61
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === System Configuration (Map) === 15:50:52 06/28/2021

MAP NO: MAP_1 Auto Activate: Yes
XCtype: 1:1 Target PW NON-CAS Source
Target P/T D SL/PO/TS P/T D SL/PO/TS P/T D SL/PO/TS P/T D SL/PO/TS
Slot : PW === ========== === ========== === ========== === ==========
Port : P1 1 d 12 1 1 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d
Circuit Info: 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d
5 d 21 d
T.S.# : 01 6 d 22 d
Clear : No 7 d 23 d
d/v : d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d
Source 10 d 26 d
Slot : A 11 d 27 d
Port : 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d
Confirm?Yes 15 d 31 d
16 d 32 d
<< Press ESC to return to Controller Setup menu, then Press D to active >>
5.2.1.4. Current TSI Map
Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (D) Current TSI Map
The screen of Current TSI Map will show as below. The sample screen shows Slot A Single E1
current map configuration status. It indicates Slot A Timeslot (TS) 5 to 9 mapping to Slot B Port 1
Timeslot (TS) 5 to 9.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE = = = S y ste m Co n fi g ur a ti o n ( C urr e n t M ap ) = = 22 : 4 1: 1 5 0 2 / 24 / 20 1 8
C u r re n t M ap _ 1
S l o t N um b er : A P/ T D S L /P O /T S C i rc u i t I nfo . P / T D S L / PO / TS C i rc u it In f o.
P o r t N um b er : P1 = = = == = == = = = == = = == = === = = == = = = = == = = == = == = = == = == = == = == = =
1 d 5 1 1 17 d
M o de l : E1 2 d 18 d
T yp e : N ON - CA S 3 d 5 2 1 19 d
4 d 20 d
5 d B 1 5 21 d
6 d B 1 6 22 d
7 d B 1 7 23 d
8 d B 1 8 24 d
9 d B 1 9 25 d
10 d 26 d
11 d 27 d
12 d 28 d
13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d
15 d 31 d
16 d
Another example of Slot C Quad E1 current map configuration status. It indicates Slot C Mini
Quad E1 Port 1 Timeslot 5 to 9 mapping to Slot D Time Slot 5 to 9.
CXR.
62
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CCPB-2GE = = = S y ste m Co n fi g ur a ti o n ( C urr e n t M ap ) = = 22 : 4 3: 1 5 0 2 / 24 / 20 1 8

C u r re n t M ap _ 1
S l o t N um b er : C P/ T D S L /P O /T S C i rc u i t I nfo . P / T D S L / PO / TS C i rc u it In f o.
P o r t N um b er : P1 = = = == = == = = = == = = == = === = = == = = = = == = = == = == = = == = == = == = == = =
1 d 5 1 1 17 d
M o de l : M Q- E 1 2 d 18 d
T yp e : N ON - CA S 3 d 5 2 1 19 d
4 d 20 d
5 d D 1 5 21 d
6 d D 1 6 22 d
7 d D 1 7 23 d
8 d D 1 8 24 d
9 d D 1 9 25 d
10 d 26 d
11 d 27 d
12 d 28 d
13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d
15 d 31 d
16 d
NOTE: D displays either d/v/n. D for data, v for voice, and n for A/u transparent. See below screens
for more examples.
5.2.1.5. Link Backup Function

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (G) Link Backup Function
The Link backup function supports 1:1 and 1 + 1 protection. This occurs when the system is set
up so that a backup line (or lines in the case of 1: n) will be switched into service if the working line
fails. In such a case, it must be switched in at each end of the line.
The 1:1 protection function exists only for E1, T1, and FOM cards.
Refer to Appendix A: Link Backup Function.
5.2.1.6. E1/T1 protection
Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (Q) E1/T1 Port Protection
This function displays the current E1/T1 Port protection status. Below sample shows the port 1
and port 2 of slot 9: 10 as circuit protection.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === E1/T1 Port Protection === 18:07:07 01/21/2021
Protect Pair(Master:Backup) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

=========================== =========== =========== =========== ===========
Slot A :B ( :MQT1 ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot C :D ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 1 :2 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 3 :4 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
CXR.
63
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Slot 5 :6 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 7 :8 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 9 :10 (QuadE1:QuadE1) CIRCUIT CIRCUIT ----------- -----------
Slot 11:12 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
<< ESC key to return to previous menu, SPACE bar to refresh >>
5.2.1.7. DS0 SNCP

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (K) DS0-SNCP Status
This function is to view the current status of DS0-SNCP circuit level protection.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === DS0-SNCP Status === 18:10:30 01/21/2021

DS0-SNCP : DISABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 0
Ind Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode

Slot Port Grp TS Sl/Po/TS Sl/Po/TS
==============================================================================
1 6 1 01 W10 1 01 11 1 01 D Non-revertible
NOTE: d/v means data or voice mode
5.2.1.8. Inband Protection Status
Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (M)> Inband Protection Status
This function is to view the current status of Inband Protection Status.

Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === Inband Protection Status === 12:18:20 02/26/2018
Protection: ENABLE
Using Map : MAP_1
Primary Slot: A WORKING

Port: P1
T.S.: 1
Secondary Slot: B BACKUP

Port: P1
T.S.: 1
Switch Mode: Non-revertible
CXR.
64
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.1.9. SNTP Status
Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (N)> SNTP Status
This function is to view the synchronization status of the computer clock on the Internet.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === SNTP Display === 18:12:52 08/08/2017
Last update time: 11:10:46 08/07/2017 from 192.168.013.169
21:10:45 08/06/2017 Server 1: Update success

5.2.1.10. Monitor Signaling

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (S)> Monitor Signaling
This function is to view the signaling status for all slots and ports.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === Monitor Signaling === 10:55:14 04/02/2019

Slot Number: A FE1 PO/TS D Rx PO/TS D Rx

Port Number: NON-CAS === ========== ================ === ========== ===
=============
<< Press ENTER key to show signaling, ESC key to stop or return >>
5.2.1.11. SNMP Port and Ethernet Port State

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (O)> SNMP Port and Ethernet Port State
Shows layer one configuration for SNMP and Ethernet ports. This includes the state, speed, and
the enabling or disabling of unidirectional mode.
CXR.
65
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === Ethernet Port State === 16:09:07 06/28/2021
[Port State]
SNMP: ENABLE
ETH1: ENABLE
ETH2: ENABLE
[SNMP Port Speed]

SNMP: AUTO
[Electrical Port Speed]

ETH1: AUTO
ETH2: AUTO
[Optical Port Speed]

ETH1: 1000M
ETH2: 1000M
[Unidirect mode]
ETH1: DISABLE
ETH2: DISABLE
NOTE: Unidirect Mode allows the data transmission and communication in a unidirectional
manner.
5.2.1.12. SNMP Port and Ethernet Port Status

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (P)> SNMP Port and Ethernet Port Status
Shows layer one configuration for SNMP and Ethernet ports. This includes the link state, speed,
and mode (the type of cable connection to the SNMP and Ethernet port).
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === Ethernet Port Status === 11:30:50 07/07/2021
[SNMP]
link state: LINK-UP Speed: 100M-FULL Mode: Copper
[ETH1]
link state: LINK-DOWN Speed: NONE Mode: Copper
[ETH2]
link state: LINK-DOWN Speed: NONE Mode: Copper
5.2.1.13. Ethernet Port Statistics

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (X) > Ethernet Port Statistics
This function is to view the transmission and receiving status for Ethernet Port.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Ethernet Port Statistics === 17:37:06 10/06/2021
[ETH1] [ETH2]
=================================== ===================================
Tx Good Packets : 69027 Tx Good Packets : 0
Rx Good Packets : 0 Rx Good Packets : 0
Rx FCS error : 0 Rx FCS error : 0
Rx Bad Count : 0 Rx Bad Count : 0
CXR.
66
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.1.14. ANY-DS1 Status

Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (W)> ANY-DS1 Status
This function is to view the status for DS1 Protection.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = A N Y- D S1 St a t us === 1 1 :3 6 : 02 07/ 0 7 /2 0 21
P r o te c ti o n: EN A B LE T ota l Gr o up : 0
Grp Pr i mar y S e co n d ar y d /v M o de
Sl / Po S l /P o
= = = == = == = == = == = = == = === = = == = == = == = == = = == = === = = == = == = == = == = = == = === = = == = == = == = == =
00 W1 1 - 1 11- 2 d No n -r e v er t ibl e
5.2.2. Clock Source Configuration
Controller Menu > (B) Clock Source Configuration
This function shows the current clock source configuration info. Normal mode and SSM mode
sample screens show as below:
QX3440-CCPB === Clock Source Status (Normal Mode) ===12:06:47 08/31/2021
Master_Clk Source : INTERNAL Clock Hold-Over : OFF

Second_Clk Source : INTERNAL Hold-Over State : Normal
Current Clock : MASTER_CLK Frame Pulse Period: 8000.00
Clk_Recover_Mode : MANUAL
5.2.3. Alarm Queue Summary
Controller Menu > (Q) Alarm Queue Summary
This function is to view the Alarm Queue Summary. There are two selections: all alarm and
current active alarm.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = A la r m Q u eu e == = 1 5 : 05 : 15 0 1 /2 2 /2 0 21
> > Se l ec t ? *A L L _A l arm C u rr _ Ac t iv e
CXR.
67
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Use the ARROW keys to move the cursor and then press ENTER key to enter the summary
page as follows:
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === A la r m Q ue u e S u mm a ry = = = 15 : 06 : 1 6 0 1/2 2 / 20 2 1
1 M G MT : M A JR : SU P V_P O R T A DM I N L OG - I N- - --- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - - 1 5 :03 : 4 3 0 1/ 2 2/ 2 02 1
2 C T RL : M A JR : SL O T 5 ST A RT U P- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - - 1 5 :02 : 4 6 0 1/ 2 2/ 2 02 1
5 C T RL : M A JR : PR I MAR Y ST A RT - UP - -- - - -- - --- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - - 1 5 :02 : 4 0 0 1/ 2 2/ 2 02 1
< < SP A CE ba r t o re f res h or ES C k e y r e tu r n t o ma i n m en u > >
5.2.4. System Information

Controller Menu > (I) System Information
Press “I” from the Controller Menu, the screen of System Information will show as below:
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === S ys t em In f or m a ti o n = = = 1 6 :1 6 : 24 06/ 2 8 /2 0 21
A -> D u al C TR L In f o rm a ti o n
B -> T r ib u t ar y Ca r d I n fo r ma t io n
C -> P o we r / Fa n St a t us
D -> A c ti v a ti o n S t a tu s
E -> P r im a r y C TRL S ys l og
F -> R e du n d an t CT R L S y sl o g
G -> S F P I n fo r mat i o n
5.2.4.1. Dual CTRL Information

Controller Menu > (I) System Information > (A) Dual CTRL Information
This function shows the serial number, hardware version and software version and the status of
both the primary controllers and the redundant controller.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Dual CTRL Information === 13:32:47 08/30/2021
[------------- CTRL1 ---------------] [------------- CTRL2 ---------------]

Serial Number : 750 Serial Number : 742
Hardware Version: Ver.C Hardware Version: Ver.C
Software Version: V23.01.01 (0006) Software Version: V23.01.01 (0006)
CTRL State : Working (SYNC) CTRL State : Standby (SYNC)
CXR.
68
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.4.2. Tributary Card Information

Controller Menu > (I) System Information > (B) Tributary Card Information
This function displays the current information of all plug-in cards.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Tributary Card Information === 13:37:12 08/30/2021
Slot Card/Interface Serial Software Version Reg. Card Comment

==== ================ ====== =================== ========= =========
A
B
C CLKa N/A CLKa
D 3RS232 N/A V1.01.01(0076) 3RS232
==== ================ ====== =================== ========= =========

1 8DBRA 086405 V1.07.01 (0012) 8DBRA
2 E&M 128035 V6.08.01 (0072) E&M
3 E&M 128037 V6.07.01 (0007) E&M
4 FXS 128044 V4.09.02 (0003) FXS
5 FXO 128038 V3.04.01 (0045) FXO
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
5.2.4.3. Power/Fan Status

Controller Menu > (I) System Information > (C) Power/Fan Status
This shows the current status of the power (power consumption included) and fan, as well as the
temperature of the working controller. Furthermore, it displays the DPWM (Digital Pulse Width
Modulator) information which details the power step-down regulator IC status including Vin (Input
Voltage) and Iout (Output Current) together with the IC temperature.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = P o we r /F a n S t atu s == = 1 3 :3 8 :35 0 8/ 3 0/ 2 02 1
P o w er 1 S ta t us : - 4 8V 1 5 0W DC
P o w er 2 S ta t us : N / A
T o t al po w er co n s um p tio n (E s ti m at i on ) : 3 5W
F a n 1 St a tu s : F ai l or n ot ex i st
F a n 2 St a tu s : F ai l or n ot ex i st
= = = P r im a ry CT R L = = =
C P U T e mp e ra t ur e : 0 7 7 D e g C
= = = D P WM St a tu s == =
V o l ta g e V in : 5 . 8 00 0 00 V Te m p: 42 . 0 00 0 00 C
C H 0 S ta t us : O k Vol t a ge : 2 . 48 9 00 0 V Iou t : 0 . 52 0 00 0 A
CXR.
69
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
NOTE: Power consumption table shows below to estimate total power consumption and detect
power plug-in card status. Power consumption does not include –48V DC power supply
consumption.
Table 5-1 Power consumption

Condition
Alarm Trap Warning message
Total Power DC Power
Consumption Supplies
Single 100W Power supplies over loading Please remove plugged-in
Dual 100W Power protection not supported plug-in cards or upgrade to
>= 90W
100W + 150W Power protection not supported 150W power supplies.
Dual 150W Normal
Single 150W Power supplies over loading
100W + 150W Power protection not supported Please remove plugged-in
>= 135W
cards
Dual 150W Power protection not supported
5.2.4.4. Activation Status

Controller Menu > (I) System Information > (D) Activation Status
This function is to view the slot activation status.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === A ct i va t io n S t a tu s == = 1 6 :2 3 : 20 06/ 2 8 /2 0 21
S l o t: CT R L
< < ES C k e y i gn o r e a nd r e tu r n, EN T ER k ey acc e p t c ha n ge >>
An example shows status of Slot CTRL for warranty due date, PDH-Ring and iXC3440 status.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == Ac t iv a ti o n S t atu s == = 1 3 :4 3 :11 0 8/ 3 0/ 2 02 1
S l o t: CT R L
Item P r ima r y Re d u nd a nt
= = = == = == = = = = === = = == = = == = = == = === =
W a r ra n ty
P D H -R i ng D e act i v at e d D ea c t iv a ted
i X C 34 4 0 D e act i v at e d D ea c t iv a ted
i N E T- L CT D e act i v at e d D ea c t iv a ted
P s e ud o wi r e A c tiv a t ed A ct i v at e d
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o re t u rn to pr e vi o u s m enu > >
5.2.4.5. Primary CTRL Syslog

Controller Menu > (I) System Information > (E) Primary CTRL Syslog
CXR.
70
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
This function displays the current primary controller information from last boot.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Primary CTRL Syslog === 15:35:04 01/22/2021

2021-01-22 15:14:42 User ADMIN LOG-ON from TELNET_PORT3
2021-01-22 15:14:39 TELNET3 connect from 192.168.11.102
2021-01-22 14:54:18 Flash update configuration done...
2021-01-22 14:54:18 Compress FAE from 115476 to 32838 bytes
2021-01-22 14:54:18 Compress text config from 273504 to 11452 bytes
2021-01-22 14:54:18 Compress config from 446580 to 3606 bytes
2021-01-22 14:54:18 Auto Save: write config to Flash...
2021-01-22 14:54:18 --- Configuration Auto Save ---
2021-01-22 14:49:18 SNMP basic config change from TELNET_PORT1
2021-01-22 14:48:08 SNMP basic config change from TELNET_PORT1
2021-01-22 14:13:01 TELNET2 CLOSE
2021-01-22 14:04:04 --- Configuration Auto Save ---
(22/1999). Press <Space> next page, <A> show all, <ESC> quit...
Press <Space> to go to next page, press <A> to show all information or press <ESC> key twice to
quit and returns to System Information menu.
5.2.4.6. Redundant CTRL Syslog
Controller Menu > (I) System Information > (F) Redundant CTRL Syslog
This function displays the current redundant controller information from last boot.
QX3440-2GE === Redundant CTRL Syslog === 15:35:41 01/22/2021

2021-01-22 14:54:18 Save Backup Config...
2021-01-22 14:54:18 User Save: write config to Flash...
2021-01-22 14:04:04 Save Backup Config...
2021-01-22 14:04:04 User Save: write config to Flash...
2021-01-22 13:59:15 Current Map Changed from MAP1
CXR.
71
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

2021-01-22 13:59:10 RED SYNC end...
2021-01-22 13:59:06 RED SYNC start...
(20/1999). Press <Space> next page, <A> show all, <ESC> quit...
Press <Space> to go to next page, press <A> to show all information or press <ESC> key twice to
quit and returns to System Information menu.
The Redundant Controller shows Disabled in controller menu:

· When the Hardware, Software, or Brand version of the Redundant CTRL card is different
from Primary, the Redundant Controller will show Disabled in controller menu.
· When there is no redundant CTRL card.
If there is no redundant CTRL card, press “F” will show “Command no response!”
5.2.4.7. SFP Information
Controller Menu > (I) System Information > (G) SFP Information
It shows the specification of the SFP module plugged into the optical port of QX3440 controller.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === SFP Information === 13:54:32 08/30/2021
[--------------- ETH1 ---------------] [--------------- EHT2 ---------------]

Connector : LC Unequipped
Transceiver : long distance(L)
Link Length : Not available
Technology : Longwave laser(LL)
Encoding : 8B10B
Length(9/125 mm fiber) : 20000 m
Length(50/125 mm fiber) : ----
Length(62.5/125 mm fiber) : ----
Length(copper) : ----
Temperature : 83.270 degrees C
Vcc : 2.052 mV Tx Power: 0.9 dBm
Tx Bias: 25.184 mA Rx Power: 2.3 dBm
Date Code : 2014-01-22,
Vendor Name:
Vendor OUI :00.00.00 (0)
Vendor PN : PTD2D
Vendor Rev: V2.0
WaveLength : 1310
5.2.5. Performance Report
Controller Menu > (P) Performance Report > (A) DS0-SNCP Performance
CXR.
72
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
The performance report of DS0-SNCP circuit level protection displays as follows:
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Performance Report === 15:36:49 01/22/2021
A -> DS0-SNCP Performance
<< Press ESC key to return to Main Menu or enter a command >>
DS0-SNCP circuit level protection report is the 7-day performance data of the settled DS0-SNCP
circuit level protection group. The sample screen below shows the system now has five working
DS0-SNCP groups. You can see the timeslot, elapsed seconds of the protected slot and port.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === DS0-SNCP Performance Report === 18:04:15 10/08/2020
Idx Protected AS
S P TS Elapsed [Today][10/07][10/06][10/05][10/04][10/03][10/02][10/01]
1 A 0 01 165 82 . . . . . . .
2 A 0 02 165 82 . . . . . . .
3 A 0 03 165 82 . . . . . . .
4 A 0 04 165 82 . . . . . . .
5 A 0 05 165 82 . . . . . . .
Before you get access to “DS0-SNCP Performance Report”, make sure you have already set up
at least one DS0-SNCP circuit level protection group with 3E1 plug-in cards. To set up
DS0-SNCP circuit level protection, choose the DS0-SNCP setup function on the VT100
menu(command path: Main Menu> (S)System Setup> (K)DS0-SNCP Setup), set DS0-SNCP to
“ENABLE”, and set Action to “Create”. Then, press ENTER.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === DS0-SNCP Setup === 14:49:42 02/26/2020

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE
Using Map: MAP_1
Action : Create
Select two 3E1 cards for DS0-SNCP circuit level protection and a particular plug-in card as the
protected unit and confirm with the setting.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === DS0-SNCP Creation === 14:57:15 02/26/2020

Please Input decimal number (1~32), BACKSPACE to edit
Protection Group Creation, Using map 1 Total DS0-SNCP: 0

==============================================================================
Protected Slot: 9 ( 8UDTE) [m.m.m...........................]
Port:P1
Circuit Group:00
T.S.:01
Count:01
Primary Slot: 5 ( 3E1) [.m.m............................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS Protection Delay: 00
T.S.:01 Upstream Send AIS: On
Secondary Slot: 6 ( 3E1) [.mm.............................]

CXR.
73
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Switch Mode:Non-revertible
Data/Voice:Data
Confirm:Yes
5.2.6. PseudoWire Status
5.2.6.1. Bundle Protect Mode Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (P) Bundle Protect Mode Display
This function is to display the controller protect mode (Mode 1 or Mode 2).
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Protect Mode Display === 16:34:24 06/28/2021
Mode1: Single CTRL Protect

Mode2: Dual CTRL Protect
Protect Mode Select: Mode1
Cascade Channel: ready
5.2.6.2. Bundle Source IP Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (A) Bundle Source IP Display
This function is to display the source IP information.

QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Source IP Display === 16:35:47 06/28/2021
Mode2
Primary Path
---------------------------------
Src. IP Address : 002.002.220.188
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.000
Gateway IP : 000.000.000.000
Src. MAC Address: 00:50:C6:C5:06:32
Secondary Path
---------------------------------
Src. IP Address : 002.002.220.088
Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.000
Gateway IP : 000.000.000.000
Src. MAC Address: 00:50:C6:C5:00:D7
Active Timer(S) : 5 (Bundle ARP Interval)

Remote ARP Loss : Continue
PW SVLAN TPID : 88a8
CXR.
74
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.6.3. Bundle Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (B) Bundle Display
This function is to display the bundle information. Input the Port(Bundle ID) number (1~64) you
want to view its bundle information and press the down button to refresh the screen.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Display === 14:22:03 08/30/2021
Please input decimal number (1~64), BACKSPACE to edit
Mode1 Primary Secondary
Port(Bundle ID): 01 01 -------- Primary ---------
Format : CESoPSN CESoPSN PW Delay(ms):
Type : IP IP PW Pkt Size(Byte):
ToS : 0 0 PW PayLoadOH % :
UDP Number/ECID: 0 0 PW BW(Mbps):
Frame : E1CAS nonCAS Total PW BW(Mbps):
Dest IP/MAC: 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000
Stratum : 3 1
Number of TS : 0 0 -------- Secondary -------
Number of Frame: 8 PW Delay(ms):
Jitter Delay : 20 0 PW Pkt Size(Byte):
Jitter Size : 256 0 PW PayLoadOH % :
VLAN : OFF OFF PW BW(Mbps):
CVLAN ID : 0 0 Total PW BW(Mbps):
CVLAN Priority : 0 0
SVLAN ID : 0 0
SVLAN Priority : 0 0
Action : Disabled
Confirm ? No
<< Press ESC key to return to main menu or save system setup >>
NOTE: UDP Number: User Datagram Protocol number

ToS: Type of Service
5.2.6.4. Bundle Statistics Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (C) Bundle Statistics Display
This function is to display the bundle statistics. Use the arrow keys to choose from Working or
Standby, then press enter.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Statistics Display === 10:59:19 08/31/2021
Select Action >> *Working Standby
Working Path sample screen:

QX3440-CCPB-2GE=== Bundle Statistics Display === 00:14:49 12/10/2021
Working Path
PW Jitter Buffer L- R- Size Rx-
ID Path UR/OR/Min/Max/Dep Bit Bit RxLoss Tx-Good Rx-Good Link Err ALM
== ==== == == === === === === === ======== ========== ========== ==== ==== ===
2 Pri 0 0 19 19 19 0 0 0 65269 65268 up no no
2 Sec 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 down no no
<< ESC key to previous menu, SPACE key to refresh, TAB key to next page >>
CXR.
75
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
NOTE: UR: Under-Run

OR: Over-Run
Dep: Depth
5.2.6.5. All Bundle Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (D) All Bundle Display
This function is to display all available bundle. Use the arrow keys to choose from Working or
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === All Bundle Display === 17:49:06 10/06/2021
Select Action >> *Primary Secondary
Primary Path sample screen:

Primary Path
PW UDP/ Str- Num of Jitter
ID Format Type TOS ECID Frame Dest IP/MAC atum TS/Frame Tol/Buf
== ======= ======= === ======= ========= ================= ==== == ===== === ===
1 SAToP IP 0 1 T1UNFRAME 001.001.001.002 3 24 8 20 256
2 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
3 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
4 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
5 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
6 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
7 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
8 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
9 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
10 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
11 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
12 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
13 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
14 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
15 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
16 CESoPSN IP 0 0 E1CAS 000.000.000.000 3 0 8 20 256
CXR.
76
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Secondary Path sample screen:

Secondary Path
PW UDP/ Str- Num of Jitter
ID Format Type TOS ECID Frame Dest IP/MAC atum TS/Frame Tol/Buf
== ======= ======= === ======= ========= ================= ==== == ===== === ===
1 SAToP IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
2 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
3 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
4 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
5 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
6 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
7 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
8 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
9 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
10 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
11 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
12 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
13 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
14 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
15 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
16 AAL1 IP 0 0 nonCAS 000.000.000.000 1 0 0 0 0
5.2.6.6. MAC Address Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (E) MAC Address Display
This function is to display the MAC address and the IP address of the QX3440 at the remote site.
QX3440-CCPA-2GE === MAC Address Display === 17:42:05 09/08/2021
No. MAC Address IP Address

000 00-50-C6-C5-02-30 10. 0. 0. 2 ETH1
5.2.6.7. Bundle Alarm Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (F) Bundle Alarm Display
This function is to display bundle alarm.
CXR.
77
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Alarm Display === 11:47:05 07/07/2021
[Type] [Alarm]
ARP/bundle MAJOR
Rx-Lost/bundle MAJOR
Loss of bundle MAJOR
Underrun/bundle MAJOR
Overrun/bundle MAJOR
Bundle L Bit MAJOR
Bundle R Bit MAJOR
IP Conflict MAJOR
ELEC ETH1 LINK MAJOR
ELEC ETH2 LINK DISABLE
OPTI ETH1 LINK DISABLE
OPTI ETH2 LINK DISABLE
ETH1 LOOPING DISABLE
ETH2 LOOPING DISABLE
NOTE: ARP: Address Resolution Protocol
5.2.6.8. ACR Clock Source Status

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (K) ACR Clock Source Status
This function is to display ACR clock source status.

QX3440-CCPB-2GE=== ACR Clock Source Status === 14:56:36 08/30/2021
Port Enable Status Discon Restart Variance Freq

ACR1 : 1 OFF idle 0 0 0 0
Time Stamp Upload TFTP Setup

Tftp IP Addr : 000.000.000.000
ACR Num : 00
Enable : OFF
NOTE: ACR: Adaptive Clock Recovery
5.2.6.9. Bundle Arrival Time Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (O) Bundle Arrival Time Display
CXR.
78
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
This function is to view the bundle arrival time.

QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Arrival Time Display === 16:33:14 07/06/2021
PW [ --- ETH1 --- ] [ --- ETH2 --- ]
ID ReOrder RxLoss IPG Max/Min/Curr ReOrder RxLoss IPG Max/Min/Curr
== ======= ======= =================== ======= ======= ==================
1 0 0 1.041/0.963/0.965 1 10272 1.000/0.000/1.000
2 0 0 1.042/0.962/0.964 1 10272 1.000/0.000/1.000
61 0 0 1.030/0.972/1.026 1 38032 1.000/0.000/0.000
62 0 0 1.032/0.969/1.028 1 38032 1.000/0.000/0.000
63 0 0 1.030/0.970/1.004 1 38032 1.000/0.000/1.000
64 0 0 1.033/0.967/1.005 1 38032 1.000/0.000/1.000
5.2.6.10. Bundle Round Trip Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (Q) Bundle Round Trip Display
This function is to view the bundle round trip status. Use the arrow keys to choose from Working or
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Round Trip Display === 12:43:58 08/31/2021
Working Path sample screen:

QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Round Trip Display === 10:18:21 07/02/2021
Working Path
PW [ Round Trip(ms) ]
ID Sequence SeqLoss IP Address current min max
== ========== ======== ================ ========== ========== ==========
1 3 0 1.1.1.2 10.344 10.344
5.2.6.11. Bundle Protect Statistics Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (R) Bundle Protect Statistics Display
This function is to view the bundle protect statistics.

CXR.
79
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CCPB === Bundle Protect Statistics Display ===16:30:43 07/06/2021
PW Link State rx Seq_Num Seq_err JB_Loss Diff Delay

ID Pri/Sec Pri/Sec Pri/Sec Pri/Sec (uSec)
== ==== ==== ======== ======== ======== ======== ======== ======== ==========
1 up up 1210 1210 0 1 0 10272 358
2 up up 1213 1213 0 1 0 10272 417
61 up up 643 643 0 1 0 38032 628
62 up up 646 646 0 1 0 38032 674
63 up up 649 649 0 1 0 38032 575
64 up up 652 652 0 1 0 38032 653
5.2.6.12. Bundle 15-Min/1-Hr/7 Days Perf

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (1) Bundle 15-Min/1-Hr/7 Days Perf
This function is to display the bundle performance report of the last one hour in 15-minute
intervals, last 24 hours in 15-minute intervals and last 7 days in 24-hour intervals.
Use the arrow keys to choose from Working or Standby, then press enter.
QX3440-CCPB === 15-Min/1-Hr/7 Days Perf.Report === 12:51:03 08/31/2021
Choose the Port (Bundle ID, 1~64) first.

Please input decimal number (1-64) BACKSPACE to edit
Working Path
Port(Bundle ID): 01
Then press enter, and the screen shows as below.

Port(Bundle ID): 1
-- Valid Seconds in Current 15-Min Interval: 0 seconds
JB-Loss JB-UR JB-OR ETH1-Loss ETH2-Loss

Current 15-Min Interval : 0 0 0 0 0
1st Nearest 15-Min Interval: 0 0 0 0 0
2nd Nearest 15-Min Interval: 0 0 0 0 0
3rd Nearest 15-Min Interval: 0 0 0 0 0
4th Nearest 15-Min Interval: 0 0 0 0 0
-- Valid 15-Min Intervals in Current 24-Hour Interval: 4

Current 24-Hour Interval : 0 0 0 0 0
08/29/2021 : ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
08/28/2021 : ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
CXR.
80
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
08/27/2021 : ----- ----- ----- ----- -----

08/26/2021 : ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
08/25/2021 : ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
08/24/2021 : ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
08/23/2021 : ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

Press TAB key to switch to the Statistics Report screen as below.

QX3440-CCPB === 15-Min/1-Hr/7 Days Stat.Report === 15:03:35 08/30/2021
Port(Bundle ID): 1

Current 15-Min : 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
1st Nearest 15-Min: 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
2nd Nearest 15-Min: 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
3rd Nearest 15-Min: 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
4th Nearest 15-Min: 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%

Current 24-Hour : 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
08/29/2021 :------- ------- ------- ------- -------
08/28/2021 :------- ------- ------- ------- -------
08/27/2021 :------- ------- ------- ------- -------
08/26/2021 :------- ------- ------- ------- -------
08/25/2021 :------- ------- ------- ------- -------
08/24/2021 :------- ------- ------- ------- -------
08/23/2021 :------- ------- ------- ------- -------
<< TAB key to show Performance Report >>

5.2.6.13. Bundle 15-Min/1-Day Perf

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (2) Bundle 15-Min/1-Day Perf
This function is to display the bundle performance report of the last 24 hours in 15-minute
intervals.
Use the arrow keys to choose from Working or Standby, then press enter.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE=== 15-Min/1-Day Perf.Report === 13:52:44 08/31/2021
Choose the Port and Parameter first.

QX3440-CCPB-2GE === 15-Min/1-Day Perf.Report === 14:18:41 08/31/2021
Working Path
Port(Bundle ID): 01
Parameter : JB-Loss
Field Setting Options Default

Parameter JB-Loss, JB-UR, JB-OR, JB-Loss
ETH1-Loss, ETH2-Loss
CXR.
81
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Then press enter, and the screen shows as below.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === 15-Min/1-Day Perf.Report === 14:19:29 08/31/2021

Port(Bundle ID): 1, JB-Loss Working Path
Current 15-Min Interval : 0 0 0 0 0
Current 24-Hour Interval : 0 0 0 0 0
-- Port 1 JB-Loss Last 96 15-Min Interval :

01-08 14:15 > 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
09-16 12:15 > 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -----
17-24 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
25-32 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
33-40 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
41-48 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
49-56 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
57-64 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
65-72 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
73-80 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
81-88 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
89-96 --:-- > ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- -----
<< TAB key to show Statistics Report >>

Press TAB key to switch to the Statistics Report screen as below.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === 15-Min/1-Day Stat.Report === 14:20:27 08/31/2021

Port(Bundle ID): 1, JB-Loss Working Path
Current 15-Min : 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
Current 24-Hour : 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
-- Port 1 JB-Loss Last 96 15-Min Interval :

01-08 > 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000%
09-16 > 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% 0.0000% -------
17-24 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
25-32 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
33-40 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
41-48 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
49-56 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
57-64 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
65-72 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
73-80 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
81-88 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
89-96 > ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
<< TAB key to show Performance Report >>

5.2.6.14. Bundle Arp Status Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (H) Bundle Arp Status Display
Choose from Primary, Secondary or Others, then press enter.

QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Arp Status Display === 14:38:41 08/31/2021
Select Action >> *Primary Secondary Others
CXR.
82
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

QX3440-CCPB-2GE=== Bundle Arp Status Display === 18:17:24 07/06/2021
Primary Path
=============================
IP Address :001.001.001.001
MAC Address:00:50:C6:C5:01:A3
S- C- RX-ARP TX-ARP TX-ARP RX-ARP Bdl

Src. IP Address Src. MAC Address VLAN VLAN REQ REPLY REQ REPLY IP
=============== ================= ==== ==== ======= ======= ======= ======= ===
001.001.001.002 00:50:C6:C3:EA:5F 0 0 377923 377923 756181 755769 Y

Secondary Path
=============================
IP Address : 002.002.220.088
MAC Address: 00:50:C6:C5:06:33

=============== ================= ==== ==== ======= ======= ======= ======= ===
002.002.220.081 00:50:C6:C5:01:2E 0 83 202 202 1744 152 N
Others Path sample screen:

Others Path
===========
S- C- RX-ARP REQ RX-ARP REPLY

Src. IP Address Src. MAC Address VLAN VLAN Others IP Others IP
=============== ================= ==== ==== ========== ============
002.002.220.088 00:50:C6:C5:00:D7 0 83 1747 0
5.2.6.15. Bundle Ping Status Display

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (I) Bundle Ping Status Display
Choose from Primary, Secondary or Others, then press enter.

QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Ping Status Display=== 14:43:20 08/31/2021
Select Action >> *Primary Secondary Others
CXR.
83
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Ping Status Display === 14:44:53 08/31/2021
Primary Path
=============================
IP Address : 002.002.220.188

=============== ================= ==== ==== ======= ======= ======= ======= ===
002.002.220.181 00:50:C6:C5:01:2B 0 83 3460 3460 1780 0 Y

Secondary Path
=============================
IP Address : 002.002.220.088

=============== ================= ==== ==== ======= ======= ======= ======= ===
002.002.220.081 00:50:C6:C5:01:2E 0 83 210 210 1945 152 N
Others Path sample screen:

Others Path
===========
S- C- RX-ARP REQ RX-ARP REPLY

Src. IP Address Src. MAC Address VLAN VLAN Others IP Others IP
=============== ================= ==== ==== ========== ============
002.002.220.088 00:50:C6:C5:00:D7 0 83 1939 0
5.2.6.16. Bundle IP Conflict

Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (J) Bundle IP Conflict
This function is to view the bundle IP conflict information.

QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle IP Conflict === 14:46:09 08/31/2021
S- C-
Src. IP Address Src. MAC Address VLAN VLAN
=============== ================= ==== ====
CXR.
84
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.7. Advanced Status
Controller Menu > (N) Advanced Status

Press “N” from the Controller Menu, the screen of Advanced Status will show as below:
This menu contains some controller card troubleshooting commands for FAE engineers or
developers to look up to.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === A dv a nc e d S ta t u s = == 14 : 46 : 3 6 0 8/3 1 / 20 2 1
N - > B P S Y N C S tat u s D i sp l ay
G - > D P LL S ta t us D i sp l ay
L - > H D LC S ta t us D i sp l ay
5.2.7.1. BP SYNC Status Display

Controller Menu > (N) Advanced Status > (N) BP SYNC Status Display
This function is to view the synchronization status of both primary and redundant controllers from
backplane.
A sample screen is shown as below:

QX3440-CCPB-2GE === BP SYNC Status Display === 14:47:08 08/31/2021
Standby Path
BP Tx Sync Status
JB Sync Status: sync
Sync Word Error: 7
1st Frame Error: 0
Seq Num Error: 10
FP Sync Status: sync
RX/JB Sync Status

JB Sync Status:sync
Sync Word Done:1
Sync Word Done Error:12
Sync Word Error:0
Seq Num Error:0
PCM Error:9
BD Error:11
Mode Chnage Count:0
5.2.7.2. DPLL Status Display

Controller Menu > (N) Advanced Status > (G) DPLL Status Display
CXR.
85
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
This function is to view the DPLL (Digital Phase-Lock Loop) status of both primary and redundant
controllers.
A sample screen is shown as below:

QX3440-CCPB-2GE === DPLL Status Display === 14:47:57 08/31/2021
Working Standby
------- -------
Device Calibrating: normal normal
Signal at XAXB pins: normal normal
Locking to the XAXB: normal normal
SMBus timeout error: normal normal
DPLL Status
Input1 Status: normal normal
Input2 Status: normal normal
Lock status: lock lock
Calibration Status: normal normal
DPLL Sticky
Input1 Sticky: normal normal
Input2 Sticky: normal normal
Lock sticky: lock lock
Calibration sticky: normal normal
5.2.7.3. HDLC Status Display

Controller Menu > (N) Advanced Status > (L) HDLC Status Display
This function is to view the in-band HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) active count statistics.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === HDLC Status Display === 15:09:59 08/30/2021
Use the ARROW keys to select primary (Working) or redundant (Standby) controller and then
press ENTER key. A sample screen is shown as below:
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === HDLC Status Display === 15:15:30 08/30/2021
Working
========= FPGA HDLC Status =========

rx FCS_ok(0x400e1008): 0000
rx FCS_err(0x400e100c): 0000
rx fifo_w(0x400e2000): 0000
rx fifo_r(0x400e2004): 0000
tx fifo_w_pkt8q(0x400e0000): 0000
tx fifo_r_pkt8q(0x400e0004): 0000
rx Flag_cnt(0x400e1000): 0000
rx Flag_abort(0x400e1004): 0000
rx Link(0x400e1010): 0000
========= CPU HDLC Status =========

inband_isr: 13072
hdlc_rx_task: 13072
CXR.
86
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
hdlc_rx_pkt: 0000
hdlc_tx_inband_pkt: 0000
5.2.8. System Setup
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup
For details, see the following sections.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === C on t ro l le r S e t up === 14 : 49 : 5 1 0 8/3 1 / 20 2 1
[S Y ST E M] [ M A P]
A - > S ys t e m C - > T SI Ma p S e t up
S - > S NM P Se t up D - > S el e ct a N e w T SI M a p
B - > P as s w or d E - > C op y a TS I Ma p to A no t he r
H - > T EL N E T/ S SH/ H T TP Se t up F - > C le a r a T S I M a p
I - > U ni t In i t/C l e ar J - > S ig n al i ng C on v ert T ab l e
[P R OT E CT I O N] [ O T HE R ]
G - > L in k Ba c kup F un c ti o n L - > C om m an d L i n e
Q - > E 1/ T 1 P o rt P r ot e ct i on N - > S NT P S e tu p
K - > D S0 - S NC P Se t u p U - > S YS L OG Se t u p
V - > R AD I US Se t u p
M - > I nb a n d P rot e c ti o n
W - > A ny - D S1 Pro t e ct i on
5.2.8.1. System
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (A) System
This menu is allowed to set up configuration for system, console port, and TSI map. Network
system setup is used to do different interface (LAN, WAN) IP setup. You can enable LAN or WAN
or both for point to point communication.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 14:53:42 08/31/2021
ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Please Input: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
[System]
Time/Date : 14:53:43 08/31/2021_
Device Name : QX3440
[Network]
Mode: ROUTER Eth port BPDU: NA
NI EN IPAddress SubnetMask Frame LB Timer Interface
LAN: ON 192.168.001.001 255.255.255.000 Ethernet RJ(electric)
WAN: OFF 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC 00000001
UPLINK: OFF VLAN:OFF CVID:0001 SVID:0001 TPID:88A8 (BRIDGE mode only)
Gateway Interface: LAN Gateway IPAddr: 192.168.001.254
Inband Uses Slot: D
[CONSOLE port]
Baud Rate : 9600
Data Length : 8-Bits
Stop Bit : 1-Bit
CXR.
87
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Parity : NONE
XON_XOFF : XOFF
[TSI map] [Clock]

TSI Function : 1:1(Bidirection) Clock Mode : Normal
Idle Signalling: 1010
The setup procedure is as follows:

If you would like to manage your QX3440 units through inband management, go to “System
Setup (MAP)” to activate TSI map setup first. The command path is: Controller Menu> (S) System
Setup > (C) TSI Map Setup. Choose “IB” (inband) for target slot, and then select the card type and
port you would like to use. Then choose Yes to confirm your new settings.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == S y st e m S et u p ( M AP ) == = 14 : 59 : 5 2 0 8/3 1 / 20 2 1
M A P N O : M AP _ 1 Au t o A c ti v at e : Y e s
X C t yp e : 1 :1 T arg e t S o ur c e
T a r ge t P /T D SL / PO / TS P/ T D S L/P O / TS P / T D S L / PO / TS P / T D S L /P O /T S
Slot : IB = == = = == = == = == == = == = === = = == = = = = == = = == = == = = = = == = == = == =
Port : 1 d
T.S. : 1
C i r cu i t I nf o :
T . S .# : 1
C l e ar : N o
d/v : d
S o u rc e
Slot : A
Port :
T.S. : 01
C o n fi r m? Y es
< < Pr e ss ES C t o re t urn t o C on t ro l le r Se t up m e nu , t h en Pr e s s D to a ct i ve >>
Go back to system setup. First, enable your network by choosing “ON” for EN option. Then, key in
the IP address and subnet mask of the unit you wish to communicate with. You can also choose
HDLC or PPP for the frame. Press ESC to save your new setting. Once you complete the
procedures above, the QX3440 units will start activating WAN network communication.
NOTES: 1. To manage your QX3440 units through LAN, enable the LAN network and key in the IP
address of the unit you would like to manage. It is a simple way to manage a specific
QX3440 unit.
2. To setup inband management, one 64K timeslot must be assigned for link to the controller
(CTRL) through the internal cross-connect (XC). This timeslot must be Slot D/Port4.
Below are the plug-in card types that will be influenced by the timeslot limitation in either
Slot D:
Slot Plug-in Card
Slot D FOM, MQE1, RTA
Although the framing option for each of the 4 ports of a FOM interface can be configured
either "unframed" or "framed", provision for inband management imposes limitation as
follows: when one of these is selected for inband management, the Port 4 in that Slot, D
must be configured to framed. For further information of inband management, please refer
to Chapter 7, Appendix B: Inband Management.
The RTA card supports up to 32 timeslots in normal condition. Due to the timeslot limitation,
CXR.
88
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
a 64K timeslot is reserved in the port 4 of Slot D. Therefore, users can only set up to 31
timeslots for these cards when they are plugged in Slot D.
3. The LB Timer (Loopback Timer) is used to deactivate the loopback action on the interface
which has cross connection to the inband channel (WAN). For example, if the inband
mapped to an E1 interface, then doing a loopback action on the E1 interface will cause
inband management down. Thus when a loopback action was detected on an interface
which has inband mapping, the QX3440 system will deactivate the loopback action
automatically once the LB Timer expired to prevent loss of inband management.
Then, go back to Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (A) System to select the Inband Uses
Slot.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = Sy s t em Se t up (S Y S TE M ) = = = 07 : 21 : 0 8 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 0 7: 2 1:0 9 09 / 01 / 20 2 1_
[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: RO U TE R E t h p o rt BP D U: N A
L A N : O N 19 2 .1 6 8 .0 0 1.0 0 1 2 5 5. 2 55 . 25 5 . 00 0 Et h e rn e t RJ ( e le c tr i c)
W A N : O FF 00 0 .0 0 0 .0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 . 00 0 HD L C 0 0 00 0 0 01
U P L IN K : O FF VL A N :O F F CV I D: 0 00 1 S V I D: 0 001 TP I D: 8 8A 8 ( B R ID G E m o d e o nl y )
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: LAN G a te w ay IP A d dr : 19 2 . 16 8 .0 0 1. 2 54
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D
[ C O NS O LE po r t]
B a u d R at e : 9 60 0
P a r it y : N ON E
The system application for WAN and LAN communication is as below:
QX3440 QX3440
CTRL CTRL (1)
LAN
E1/ (3) E1/
(2) FOM (2) `
FOM
WAN WAN
PC
(1) Use VT100 terminal to enable LAN network (Ethernet Port). This way you can manage a
specific QX3440 unit. If you would like to make a series of QX3440 units to communicate
though WAN network, proceed to step (2).
(2) Once you start managing a QX3440 unit, go to “System Setup (MAP)” in VT100 and set up
inband management. Also choose a desired plug-in card (E1 or FOM) for WAN network
communication. Then, enable the WAN network and key in the IP address in “System Setup”.
Follow the same procedure to set up the units you wish to manage though WAN network.
CXR.
89
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
(3) QX3440 units will start communicating through E1 or FOM card under WAN network.
5.2.8.2. SNMP
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup
The SNMP setup has 7 sub-menus shown as below:

Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = S NM P S e tu p == = 07 : 32 : 5 9 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
A -> S N MP Sy s te m Se t up
B -> V 1 : T ra p S e t up
C -> V 3 : U se r -B a s ed Sec u r it y M o de l S e t up
D -> V 3 : V ie w -B a s ed Acc e s s C on t ro l M o d el Set u p 1
E -> V 3 : V ie w -B a s ed Acc e s s C on t ro l M o d el Set u p 2
F -> V 3 : T ar g et & N o tif y Se t up
G -> L o ad de f au l t S N MPV 3 se t ti n gs
H -> S N MP Po r t s e tt i ngs
SNMP System Setup
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (A) SNMP System Setup
The user must select SNMP model for V1 only, V3 only, V1+V3 or Disable from the screen. The
user can reset the device name, system location, and system contact info.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = S y s te m S e tu p ( S N MP ) == = 07 : 33 : 2 0 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; B A CK S PA C E t o e d it, E SC to ab o rt
D e v ic e N a me : QX 3 440
S y s te m L o ca t io n : CX R
RU E DE L ’O R NE T TE
28 4 10 A B ON D AN T – FR A N CE -
S y s te m C o nt a ct : Na m e: S U PP O RT T el : + 33 (0) 2 3 76 2 88 0 4
E- m ail : s up p or t @c x r. c o m
S N M P M od e l : V 1 on l y
CXR.
90
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
V1: Trap Setup
Press “B” from the SNMP Setup Menu to set up Trap and Community. Users can set a maximum
of five traps IP for SNMPv1. The trap IP is the server’s IP for NMS management. Once an alarm
occurs in the QX3440 controller, the alarm will be sent to the target trap IP address trough LAN or
WAN, depending on the trap system IP you choose.
To set up the Trap IP, follow the procedures below:
Trap IP 1 : 000.000.000.000 Community Name : public

(1)
(2) Trap system IP : WAN

(3) Alarm/Trap Type: Vendor-Spec
(4) TrapObject Type: Vendor-Spec
(5) Trap Compress Window: 00 (minutes)
STEP 1. Key in the trap IP address and its community name. The default setting for community
name is “public”.
STEP 2. The trap system IP is the trap’s source IP address. Select “LAN” or “WAN’ for trap
system IP, and the selection will determine the direction that sends the alarm trap. Note that the
selection should be the same with the network interface (NI) that shows “ON” on the System
Setup (System) screen. If LAN is “ON” and WAN is “OFF”, choose “LAN” for system trap IP. If
WAN is “ON” and LAN is “OFF”, choose “WAN” for trap IP. On the sample screen below, both
LAN and WAN are turned on. In this case, select either LAN or WAN for trap system IP according
to your need.
ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Please Input: hh:mm:ss mm/dd/yyyy, BACKSPACE to edit
[System]
Time/Date : 17:34:43 07/07/2021_
[Network]
Mode: ROUTER Eth port BPDU: NA
WAN: OFF 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC 00000001
STEP 3. Select the Alarm/Trap Type to decide the format of alarm type displayed in SNMP menu.
The alarm type tables for “Vendor Spec” and “Assigned” are listed in Appendix D: cc Alarm Type.
STEP 4. Select the TrapObject Type to decide the format of trap object type displayed in SNMP
menu. The options are “Vendor-Spec” as default or “Individual”
STEP 5. Select the Trap Compress Window to set the duration of the alarm compression. Use
the Backspace key to clear the highlighted text bar and input the preferred duration (00~15
CXR.
91
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
minutes). When the duration is set, any alarm with the same alarm type occurred within the
specified period will be counted as one alarm only.
Example of Local Trap in SNMP menu:
Blue words show the differences between Vendor-Spec and Individual.
Vendor-Spec:
localTrap
[1] ccAlarmQueueString.1 (DisplayString): LOCAL ALARM: Slot 1 : Quad E1#1: LOS-------------
------------------ 15:32:00 05/08/2011
[2] ccAlarmType.1 (Integer): 22
[3] ccAlarmModel.1 (Integer): quad-e1
[4] ccAlarmSlot.1 (Integer): slot-1
[5] ccAlarmPort.1 (Integer): port-1
[6] ccAlarmSeverity.1 (Integer): major
[7] ccAlarmLink.1 (Integer): none
[8] snmpTrapEnterprise.0 (Object ID): QX3440-E
Individual:
localTrap
[1] ccAlarmQueueString.22 (DisplayString): Slot 1 #1: LOS
[2] ccAlarmType.22 (Integer): 22
[3] ccAlarmModel.22 (Integer): quad-e1
[4] ccAlarmSlot.22 (Integer): slot-1
[5] ccAlarmPort.22 (Integer): port-1
[6] ccAlarmSeverity.22 (Integer): major
[7] ccAlarmLink.22 (Integer): none
[8] snmpTrapEnterprise.0 (Object ID): QX3440-E
STEP 6. Go to System Setup (command path: Controller Menu> (S) System Setup> (A) System),
set up the network interface type (LAN and WAN) and key in the IP address.
CXR.
92
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

[System]
Time/Date : 17:36:45 07/07/2021
[Network]
Mode: ROUTER
(6) LAN: ON 192.168.001.001 255.255.255.000 Ethernet RJ(electric)
WAN: OFF 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000 HDLC 00000001
[CONSOLE port]
Baud Rate : 9600
Stop Bit : 1-Bit
Parity : NONE
XON_XOFF : XOFF
[TSI map] [Clock]

The system will automatically assign the trap IP to LAN IP or WAN IP according to the “trap
system IP” and “Network interface” you set up.
Below is the table of trap source IP condition under different LAN and WAN settings.
Option Setting Trap Source IP

LAN EN WAN EN
LAN Off Off No trap
Off With IP On LAN IP
Without IP WAN IP
(0.0.0.0)
On Off LAN IP
On On LAN IP
WAN Off Off No Trap
Off On WAN IP
On Off With IP WAN IP
Without IP LAN IP
(0.0.0.0)
On On WAN IP
Option= “Trap System IP” option on VT: Trap IP (Trap and Community) screen
Setting= “NI” (Network Interface) option on System Setup screen.
V3: User-Based Security Model Setup
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (C) V3: User-Based Security Model
Setup
CXR.
93
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
For SNMPv3, user must setup USM and VACM. For USM, it is used to setup user authentication
and privacy. Press C to setup V3: User-Based Security Model. There are 12 digit numbers for
Engine ID. The user’s name is “cxrmd5” and ‘cxrsha”, the password is “cxr1234”.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === S NM P S e tu p ( U S M) === 07 : 38 : 2 1 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
[ M y E n gi n e] . . .
E n g in e I D : 00 0 0 03 3 700 0 0 00 5 0C 6 C5 0 98 2
B o o ts : 7
T o t al Us e r: 2
[ U s er 01 ] . . .
E n g in e I D : 0 00 0 033 7 0 00 0 00 5 0C 6 C5 0 9 82
U s e r N am e : c xr m d5
A u t h P ro t oc o l: M D5
A u t h K ey : 0 43 E C05 A D 6F 9 A7 A 4F 8 5D F 9 97 B 05D 7 0 1C
P r i v P ro t oc o l: D ES
P r i v K ey : 0 43 E C05 A D 6F 9 A7 A 4F 8 5D F 9 97 B 05D 7 0 1C
S t a tu s : A ct i ve
S t o ra g e : N on V ola t i le
< < ES C => r et u rn t o p rev i o us me n u, LE F T /R I GHT = > pr e v/ n ex t u s e r, F=> f i nd us e r > >

< < E= > ed i t e ng i n e, ENT E R => e di t u s er , C= > clo n e u s er , A = >a d d u s er, D => d el e te >>
If you press Enter, an edit screen will appear. The user must enter a password. A delay will occur
because of transfer time to record the key.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === S NM P S e tu p ( U S M) === 07 : 38 : 2 8 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1

[ M y E n gi n e] . . .
E n g in e I D : 00 0 0 03 3 700 0 0 00 5 0C 6 C5 0 98 2
B o o ts : 7
T o t al Us e r: 2
[ U s er 02 ] . . .
E n g in e I D : 0 00 0 033 7 0 00 0 00 5 0C 6 C5 0 9 82
U s e r N am e : c xr s ha
A u t h P ro t oc o l: S HA
A u t h P as s wo r d: _ __ _ ___ _ _ __ _ __ _ __ _ __ _ _ __ _ ___ _ _ __
P r i v P ro t oc o l: D ES
P r i v P as s wo r d:
S t a tu s : A ct i ve
S t o ra g e : N on V ola t i le
[ S k ip pa s sw o rd w il l no t ch a ng e c u rr e n t k ey. ]
V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 1
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (D) V3: View-Based Access Control
Model Setup 1
Press “D” to setup context and group, the user should be in a group. The default group name is
“initial” and security name is name of user.
CXR.
94
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == S N MP Se t up (V A C M) === 07 : 40 : 2 6 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
[ C o nt e xt ] : (e m p ty )
[ S e cu r it y t o G r o up ] 1/ 2
S e c ur i ty Mo d el : V3 ( USM )
S e c ur i ty Na m e : cx r md5
G r o up Na m e : in i tia l
S t a tu s : Ac t ive
S t o ra g e : No n Vol a t il e
< < ES C => r et u rn t o m enu , UP / DO W N= > co n t ex t /gr o u p, LE F T / R IG H T => p rev / n ex t > >
< < F= > fi n d, EN T E R= > edi t , A = >a d d, D= > d el e te > >
V3: View-Based Access Control Model Setup 2

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (E) V3: View-Based Access Control
Model Setup 2
Press “E” to edit Access and View for VACM, every group can define their own security level and
have read and write access to view. “Item shows (reserved)” means that the item shown is not
currently supported by this version. View contains 1 or more MIB sub-trees. The V3 driver will
check incoming packages.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == S N MP Se t up (V A C M) === 07 : 40 : 4 6 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
[ A c ce s s] 1/ 1
G r o up Na m e : i nit i a l
S e c ur i ty Mo d el : V 3(U S M )
S e c ur i ty Le v el : A uth P r iv
C o n te x t P re f ix : ( res e r ve d )
C o n te x t M at c h : ( res e r ve d )
R e a d V ie w N a me : t wo
W r i te Vi e w N am e : t wo
N o t if y V i ew Na m e : ( res e r ve d )
S t a tu s : A cti v e
S t o ra g e : N onV o l at i le
[ V i ew Fa m il y ] 1 / 1
V i e w N am e : tw o
S u b -t r ee : 1. 3 . 6
Mask : (r e s er v ed)
Type : in c l ud e
S t a tu s : Ac t i ve
S t o ra g e : No n V ol a til e
< < ES C => r et u rn t o p rev i o us me n u, UP / D OW N =>A c c es s /V i ew , L E F T/ R IGH T = >p r ev / ne x t > >

< < EN T ER = >e d it , A= > add , D= > de l et e > >
V3: Target & Notify Setup
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (F) V3: Target & Notify Setup
“F” command is to notify the V3 target (similar to situation with V1 trap).
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = S NM P S e tu p (T a rge t & N ot i fy ) = = = 0 7:4 1 : 14 09 / 01 / 20 2 1
[ T a rg e t] 1/ 1
CXR.
95
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
T a r ge t N a me : m y t ar g et
D o m ai n : UDP
I P Ad d re s s : 1 9 2 .1 6 8.1 . 2 54 No t if y Po r t: 1 6 2
Tag : g r o up 1
T i m eo u t : 3 Re t ry : 0
P a r am e te r : m y p ar a m
S t a tu s : A c t iv e
[ P a ra m et e r] 1/ 1
P a r am Na m e : m y p ar a m
M P Mo d el : V3
S e c M o de l : V 3
S e c L e ve l : N o A ut h NoP r i v
S e c N a me : c x r md 5
[ N o ti f y] 1/ 1
Name : g r o up 1
Tag : g r o up 1
Type : Trap
< < E S C= > re t ur n t o m en u, UP / DO W N= > Ta r g et / Pa ra m e te r /N o ti f y, LE F T/ RI G H T= > pr e v/ n ex t <<
E N T ER = >e d it , A = > ad d , D = > de l et e > >
Load default SNMPV3 settings

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (G) Load default SNMPV3 settings
Press “G” to start loading SNMPV3 settings.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = L oa d d e fa u l t S NMP V 3 s e tt i ng s = = = 0 7:4 1 : 43 09 / 01 / 20 2 1
> > Lo a d d ef a ul t SN M PV3 s et t in g s - a r e y o u s u r e ? [ Y /N ]
Key in “Y”. Then key in “YES” to double confirm.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PA === L oa d d e fa u lt S NM P V3 s e tt i ng s = = = 1 6: 0 2:1 8 01 / 31 / 20 1 9
> > P le a se ke y i n "Y E S" t o c o nf i rm :
Then the loading starts.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PA === L oa d d e fa u lt S NM P V3 s e tt i ng s = = = 1 6: 0 2:1 8 01 / 31 / 20 1 9
= = => Lo a d S NM P V 3 d efa u l t . .. . .
Upon completion, it returns to the SNMP setup screen.
5.2.8.3. SNMP Port Settings

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (H) SNMP Port Setting
CXR.
96
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === SNMP Port Setup === 07:42:20 09/01/2021

ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Change options by TAB
[SNMP Port Speed]

SNMP: AUTO

SNMP AUTO/1000M-FULL/1000M-HALF/100M-FULL/100M-HALF/10M-FULL/1 AUTO
0M-HALF
5.2.8.4. Password
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (B) Password
Only ADMIN privilege can do ADMIN/OPERATOR password setup.
Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press “B” to enable or change password.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = Pa s sw o rd Se t u p = == 07 : 43 : 1 0 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
< < AR R OW LE F T/ R I GH T : S e l ec t U s er ; E n t er : Ac c e pt ; E S C: Ex i t . > >
S e l ec t : *O P ER A T OR A D M IN
Use the ARROW keys to move the cursor and then press ENTER key, the following screen
shows up.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = Pa s sw o rd Se t u p = == 07 : 43 : 4 9 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
S e l ec t : OP E RA T O R *A D M IN
E n ab l e P a ss w ord : N O
C h an g e P a ss w ord : N O
Field Setting Options Default Notes

Selection ADMIN, OPERATOR ADMIN Only ADMIN privilege can do password
setup
Enable Password YES, NO NO Enable/disable the password function
Change Password YES, NO NO
CXR.
97
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.8.5. TELNET/SSH/HTTP Setup
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (H) TELNET/SSH/HTTP Setup
SSH (Secure Shell) is a network protocol that allows data to be exchanged over a secure channel
between two computers. Encryption provides confidentiality and integrity of data. SSH uses
public-key cryptography to authenticate the remote computer and allow the remote computer to
authenticate the user, if necessary.
TELNET (TELecommunication NETwork) is a network protocol used on the Internet or local area
network (LAN) connections.
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) uses TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) over port 80 to
send and receive data packets over the web while HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure)
is an extension of the HTTP and encrypted using Transport Layer Security (TLS) over port 443 for
connection.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = TE L N ET / SS H /H T TP S et u p = = = 07 : 45 : 0 4 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; E N TE R K E Y: S el e ct i t em
S S H S er v er : ON
T E LN E T S er v er : OF F
HT T P S er v er : OF F
H TT P S S er v er : OF F
T EL N ET / SS H Au t o-L o g ou t : 1 20 0 ( s ec o nds )

SSH Server ON, OFF ON
TELNET Server ON, OFF OFF
HTTP Server ON, OFF OFF
HTTPS Server ON, OFF OFF
TELNET/SSH Auto-Logout 300~3600 (seconds) 1200 seconds
NOTE: Make sure the HTTP or HTTPS Server is ON so that you can connect to the QX3440 via a
browser. The supported web browser is as follows:
HTTP Web management: IE/Firefox/Chrome/Edge
HTTPs Web management: IE/Firefox
5.2.8.6. Unit Init/Clear

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (I) Unit Init/Clear
This function is to initiate or clear a plug-in card.
CXR.
98
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Unit Init/Clear === 07:45:57 09/01/2021

SLOT REG. Model Card Model State
==== =============== =============== =============
A
B
C CLKa CLKa
D 3RS232 3RS232
1 8DBRA 8DBRA
2 E&M E&M
3 E&M E&M
4 FXS FXS
5 FXO FXO
6 Quad E1 Quad E1
7 3E1 3E1
8
9
10
11
12
Command : Init

Command Init, Clear Init Init: Initialize the card
Clear: De-register the card
After the initialization procedure completes, go to Controller Menu > (I) System Information to
check the result.
NOTE: The allowance for RTA cards in QX3440 is totally up to 8 cards. If RTA cards exceed 8, the
system will not allow the 9th plug-in card (RTA) to initialize. The state will show
“redundancy”. The system will also issue an alarm message “TOO MANY RTA or RTB
CARD”. You can see from Controller Menu > (Q) Alarm Queue Summary.
5.2.8.7. TSI Map Setup
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (C) TSI Map Setup
Access the TSI Map setup, it allows up to set up to four maps setting, but only one can active.
After choose the map number, select the desired slot and port number for the mapping target.
Next, select the starting timeslot number (T.S) and the timeslot amount (T.S #), and data or voice
mode (d/v) for the target. Also select the desired slot, port and starting timeslot number (T.S) for
the mapping source. After setup, select “Yes” for confirmation.
X C t yp e : 1 :1 T arg e t F O M N ON - C AS S o ur c e F O M N O N -C A S
Slot : A = == = = == = == = == == = == = === = = == = = = = == = = == = == = = = = == = == = == =
Port : P1 1 d D 1 17 d D 17 1 d D 1 17 d D 17
T.S. : 01 2 d D 2 18 d D 18 2 d D 2 18 d D 18
C i r cu i t I nf o : 3 d D 3 19 d D 19 3 d D 3 19 d D 19
4 d D 4 20 d D 20 4 d D 4 20 d D 20
5 d D 5 21 d D 21 5 d D 5 21 d D 21
T . S .# : 0 1 6 d D 6 22 d D 22 6 d D 6 22 d D 22
C l e ar : N o 7 d D 7 23 d D 23 7 d D 7 23 d D 23
d/v : d 8 d D 8 24 d D 24 8 d D 8 24 d D 24
CXR.
99
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
9 d D 9 25 d D 25 9 d D 9 25 d D 25
S o u rc e 10 d D 10 26 d D 26 10 d D 10 26 d D 26
Slot : A 11 d D 11 27 d D 27 11 d D 11 27 d D 27
Port : P1 12 d D 12 28 d D 28 12 d D 12 28 d D 28
T.S. : 01 13 d D 13 29 d D 29 13 d D 13 29 d D 29
14 d D 14 30 d D 30 14 d D 14 30 d D 30
C o n fi r m? Y es 15 d D 15 31 d D 31 15 d D 15 31 d D 31
16 d D 16 16 d D 16
NOTE: 1. For voice cards, users do not have to select the time slot (T.S) data. The system will
automatically adjust the T.S number according to the port number you set up. T.S 01 is for
port1, T.S 02 is for port 2…and T.S 10 is for port 10. The T.S (time slot) number will always
correspond to the port number.
2. Slot:PW →this means PseudoWire Setup's Bundle
After completing the TSI Map Setup, press ESC key, then the following screen shows up.
P l ea s e u s e D -co m m an d ( n ex t s c r ee n ) t o ac t iv a te ma p as cur r e nt ma p .
and V -co m m an d ( m ai n m e n u) to s a ve ma p s t o F l as h me m o ry .
> > Pr e ss an y k e y t o co n t in u e.
After you change the TSI Map, you need to go to “Select a New TSI Map” to activate the new
map.
5.2.8.8. Select a New TSI Map
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (D) Select a New TSI Map
This function is to allow change the active map from previous setting.
Sample below shows the new setting on Map 1 will replace the previous Map 1 by select MAP_1
on Change to TSI Map.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = Sy s t em Se t up (N e w m a p) = = = 07 : 49 : 0 1 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
L a st ac t i va t ed T S I M ap : M A P_ 1
C h an g e t o T S I M a p : M A P_ 1
(T h is i te m wi l l b e i g no r ed i f a nyo n e o f t h e f ol l o wi n g i s en a bl e d. )
[ TS I M a p] s w itc h s ta r t h r/ m i n
M ap 1 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
M ap 2 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
M ap 3 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
M ap 4 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
NOTE: When the TSI Map switch function has been selected. The upper setting of “Change to TSI
Map” will not function.
CXR.
100
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
The TSI Map setting shows below is function by Time duration setting. Sample below shows Map
1 enable from 00:00 to 11:59 and then it will switch to Map 2 from 12:00 to 23:59. The map3 and
map 4 will not function due to disable.
M ap 1 E N ABL E 00 : 00
M ap 2 E N ABL E 12 : 00
M ap 3 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
M ap 4 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
You can view the TSI Map setting from Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (C) Current
TSI Map
5.2.8.9. Copy a TSI Map to another
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (E) Copy a TSI Map to Another
This function is to copy the TSI map from one to another.

Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = S y s te m S e tu p ( C o py ) == = 08 : 06 : 1 9 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
C op y T S I M ap f ro m MA P _ 1 t o M AP _ 2
5.2.8.10. Clear a TSI Map
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (F) Clear a TSI Map
This function is to clear the selected TSI map setting.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = S y s te m S e tu p ( C l ea r ) = = = 08 : 06 : 5 4 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
C l ea r T S I M a p : M A P_ 1
NOTE: Clearing a TSI Map will not delete the inband cross connect configuration.
CXR.
101
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.8.11. Signaling Convert Table
The Signaling Convert Table Setup is for the use with QX3440-M4TE plug-in card only. For
NOTE: more information, please contact the nearest CXR sales representative.
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (J) Signaling Convert Table
This function is to configure a signaling conversion table. The QX3440 supports up to 4 (Index
1~16) conversion tables. Users can name the tables.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E Si g nal i n g C on v er t T a b le Set u p 08 : 07 : 4 4 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
T a b le In d ex : 1
T a b le Na m e : E 1 to T1 E S F E1 to T1 D4 T1 ES F t o E 1 T1 D 4 t o E 1
* S ig 00 0 0 : 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 0 000 0
S ig 00 0 1 : 0 0 0 1 0 00 0 00 0 1 000 0
S ig 00 1 0 : 0 0 1 0 0 00 0 00 1 0 000 0
S ig 00 1 1 : 0 0 1 1 0 00 0 00 1 1 000 0
S ig 01 0 0 : 0 1 0 0 0 10 1 01 0 0 010 1
* S ig 01 0 1 : 0 1 0 1 0 10 1 01 0 1 010 1
S ig 01 1 0 : 0 1 1 0 0 10 1 01 1 0 010 1
S ig 01 1 1 : 0 1 1 1 0 10 1 01 1 1 010 1
S ig 10 0 0 : 1 0 0 0 1 01 0 10 0 0 101 0
S ig 10 0 1 : 1 0 0 1 1 01 0 10 0 1 101 0
* S ig 10 1 0 : 1 0 1 0 1 01 0 10 1 0 101 0
S ig 10 1 1 : 1 0 1 1 1 01 0 10 1 1 101 0
S ig 11 0 0 : 1 1 0 0 1 11 1 11 0 0 111 1
S ig 11 0 1 : 1 1 0 1 1 11 1 11 0 1 111 1
S ig 11 1 0 : 1 1 1 0 1 11 1 11 1 0 111 1
* S ig 11 1 1 : 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 11 1 1 111 1
N o t e: * F or T1 D 4 m ode , on l y ( CD = AB ) wo r kin g

T a b le Na m e : T h r ou g h F XO ( NE ) to PLA R FX O (C I ) t o P L AR FXS ( N E) to E& M

* S ig 00 0 0 : 0 0 0 0 1 11 1 00 0 0 111 1
S ig 00 0 1 : 0 0 0 1 0 00 1 00 0 1 000 1
S ig 00 1 0 : 0 0 1 0 0 01 0 00 1 0 001 0
S ig 00 1 1 : 0 0 1 1 0 01 1 00 1 1 001 1
S ig 01 0 0 : 0 1 0 0 0 10 0 01 0 0 010 0
* S ig 01 0 1 : 0 1 0 1 1 11 1 01 0 1 000 0
S ig 01 1 0 : 0 1 1 0 0 11 0 01 1 0 011 0
S ig 01 1 1 : 0 1 1 1 0 11 1 01 1 1 011 1
S ig 10 0 0 : 1 0 0 0 1 00 0 10 0 0 10 0 0
S ig 10 0 1 : 1 0 0 1 1 00 1 10 0 1 100 1
* S ig 10 1 0 : 1 0 1 0 1 11 1 01 0 1 000 0
S ig 10 1 1 : 1 0 1 1 1 01 1 10 1 1 101 1
S ig 11 0 0 : 1 1 0 0 1 10 0 11 0 0 110 0
S ig 11 0 1 : 1 1 0 1 1 10 1 11 0 1 110 1
S ig 11 1 0 : 1 1 1 0 1 11 0 11 1 0 111 0
* S ig 11 1 1 : 1 1 1 1 0 00 0 01 0 1 111 1

T a b le Na m e : F X S (C I ) t o E& M F XS ( NE ) to ARD FX S (C I ) t o A R D FXO ( N E) to AR D

* S ig 00 0 0 : 0101 0 00 0 11 1 1 111 1
S ig 00 0 1 : 0001 0 00 1 00 0 1 000 1
S ig 00 1 0 : 0010 0 01 0 00 1 0 001 0
S ig 00 1 1 : 0011 0 01 1 00 1 1 001 1
S ig 01 0 0 : 0100 0 10 0 01 0 0 010 0
* S ig 01 0 1 : 0101 1 11 1 01 0 1 000 0
S ig 01 1 0 : 0110 0 11 0 01 1 0 011 0
S ig 01 1 1 : 0111 0 11 1 01 1 1 011 1
S ig 10 0 0 : 1000 1 00 0 10 0 0 100 0
S ig 10 0 1 : 1001 1 00 1 10 0 1 100 1
* S ig 10 1 0 : 0101 1 11 1 01 0 1 111 1
S ig 10 1 1 : 1011 1 01 1 10 1 1 101 1
CXR.
102
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
S ig 11 0 0 : 1 1 0 0 1 10 0 11 0 0 110 0
S ig 11 0 1 : 1 1 0 1 1 10 1 11 0 1 110 1
S ig 11 1 0 : 1 1 1 0 1 11 0 11 1 0 111 0
* S ig 11 1 1 : 1 1 1 1 0 00 0 01 0 1 111 1

T a b le In d ex : 1 3
T a b le Na m e : U s r D e fin e U sr De f i ne Us r D e fi n e Usr D ef i ne
* S ig 00 0 0 : 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 00 0 0 000 0
S ig 00 0 1 : 0 0 0 1 0 00 1 00 0 1 000 1
S ig 00 1 0 : 0 0 1 0 0 01 0 00 1 0 001 0
S ig 00 1 1 : 0 0 1 1 0 01 1 00 1 1 001 1
S ig 01 0 0 : 0 1 0 0 0 10 0 01 0 0 010 0
* S ig 01 0 1 : 0 1 0 1 0 10 1 01 0 1 010 1
S ig 01 1 0 : 0 1 1 0 0 11 0 01 1 0 011 0
S ig 01 1 1 : 0 1 1 1 0 11 1 01 1 1 011 1
S ig 10 0 0 : 1 0 0 0 1 00 0 10 0 0 100 0
S ig 10 0 1 : 1 0 0 1 1 00 1 10 0 1 100 1
* S ig 10 1 0 : 1 0 1 0 1 01 0 10 1 0 101 0
S ig 10 1 1 : 1 0 1 1 1 01 1 10 1 1 101 1
S ig 11 0 0 : 1 1 0 0 1 10 0 11 0 0 110 0
S ig 11 0 1 : 1 1 0 1 1 10 1 11 0 1 110 1
S ig 11 1 0 : 1 1 1 0 1 11 0 11 1 0 111 0
* S ig 11 1 1 : 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 11 1 1 111 1
IMPORTANT:
Each port of one plug-in card only can enable one of three Protection functions: Link back
up, E1/T1 Port, and PDH ring.
5.2.8.12. Link Backup
For link back up screen, please refer to Appendix A.
5.2.8.13. E1/T1 Port Protection
For E1/T1 protection screen, please refer to Appendix C: E1/T1 Protection.
5.2.8.14. DS0-SNCP Setup

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (K) DS0-SNCP Setup
Set DS0-SNCP to “ENABLE” and set Action to “Create”. Then, press ENTER.

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE
Using Map: MAP_1
Action : Create
CXR.
103
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

DS0-SNCP Disable, Enable Disable
Action Save, Create, Status, Save: save the current setup
Clear_Perf Create: DS0-SNCP creation
Status: show the current DS0-SNCP current
status
Clear_Perf: Clear DS0-SNCP Performance
NOTES: For DS0-SNCP Setup, please refer to 3E1 manual for detail.
Select two 3E1 cards for DS0-SNCP circuit level protection and a particular plug-in card as the
protected unit and confirm with the setting.

==============================================================================
Protected Slot: A ( E1 ) [.PPPPP..........................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS
Circuit Group:00
T.S.:01
Count:05
Primary Slot: 1 ( 3E1 ) [.WWWWW..........................]

Secondary Slot: 2 ( 3E1 ) [.SSSSS..........................]

Switch Mode:Non-revertible
Data/Voice:Data
Confirm:Yes
NOTES: 1. “PDH Ring Protection” and “PDH Ring Diagnostic” are optional functions. To access these
two optional functions, you must order the controller card with PDH function, or these two
functions will not show on the VT100 menu. Also, only QE1, QT1, 1FOMA, FOM, Mini QE1
and Mini QT1 plug-in cards support PDH function.
2. DS0-SNCP circuit level protection for 8UDTE card only supports TS and Omnibus mode.
5.2.8.15. Inband Protection
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (M) Inband Protection
This function is to enable and setup the in-band DS0 protection function by create another
standby inband timeslot.
CXR.
104
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Network Network
Management Center Management Center
Line
Working Backup Working
Break
E1 E1 E1 E1
Inband Inband
To enable the Inband Protection, go to (S) System Setup > (A) System Setup (System) under
Network to select Bridge Mode and Set WAN: ON first.
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 1 1: 4 5:1 0 09 / 01 / 20 2 1_
[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: BR I DG E E t h p o rt BP D U: E NA B LE
WAN: ON HD L C 0 0 00 0 0 01
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: G a te w ay IP A d dr : 19 2 . 16 8 .0 0 1. 2 54
B a u d R at e : 9 60 0
P a r it y : N ON E
In Inband Protection Setup screen, there are two selections: Setup or Switch.
Field Description
Setup The setup screen enables the Protection Setup and configures Primary
(Slot/Port/Time Slot) and Secondary (Slot/Port/Time Slot) Inband Time Slot info.
Switch The Inband Protection Status shows the working and backup current status.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == Inb a n d P ro t ec t io n Se t up = = = 11 : 57 : 2 9 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
> > Se l ec t ? * S ET U P S WI T CH
When the Setup has been selected, the Inband Protection Setup screen will show as below:
CXR.
105
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
P r o te c ti o n: EN A B LE
U s i ng Ma p : MA P _ 1
P ri m ar y S l ot : D ( Q u ad - E1 ) [.m . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . ... . . .. . .. . .]
P o rt : P1 N O N -C A S
T . S. : 01
S e c on d ar y S l ot : D ( Q u ad - E1 ) [.m . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . ... . . .. . .. . .]
P o rt : P2 N O N -C A S
T . S. : 01
Sw i tc h M o de : No n -re v e rt i bl e
A ct i on : Se t
Field Setting Options Default Note

Protection Enable, Disable Disable
Using Map Map 1 to 4 Map 1
Primary Slot/Port/T.S Same setup as TSI Map
Second Slot/Port/T.S
Switch Mode Non-revertible, Revertible Non-revertible
Action Set (will check map)
Clear (clear config and map)
Force (ignore exist map)
When the Switch has been selected, the Inband Protection Status screen shows below.
U s i ng Ma p : MA P _ 1
P ri m ar y S l ot : D WO R KI N G
P o rt : P1
T . S. : 1
S e c on d ar y S l ot : E BA C KU P
P o rt : P1
T . S. : 1
Sw i tc h M o de : No n -re v e rt i bl e
A ct i on : Sw i tch
You can also go to Controller Menu > (C) System Configuration > (M) > Inband Protection Status
to view the current status.
Check Alarm Queue Summary: Controller Menu > (Q) Alarm Queue Summary, it will show the
Inband Switch alarm.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == Al a rm Q ue u e = = = 1 6 :3 3 :02 0 2/ 2 8/ 2 01 8
1 C T RL : M A JR : IN B AND S WI T CH to PR I M AR Y --- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - - 1 0 :42 : 1 4 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 01 8

2 C T RL : M A JR : IN B AND S WI T CH to SE C O ND A RY- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - - 1 0 :42 : 1 5 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 01 8
CXR.
106
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.8.16. Any-DS1 Protection

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (W) Any-DS1 Protection
This function is to enable and setup the 1+1 protection between pseudowires (on the controller)
and T1/E1 plug-in card.
Set Protection to “ENABLE” and set Action to “Create”. Then, press ENTER.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = A n y- D S1 Pr o t ec t ion = == 11 : 2 4: 4 4 0 7 / 07 / 20 2 1
U s in g M a p: MA P _ 1
A c ti o n: Cr e a te
Primary Primary
Card TDM/Ethernet Card
Protected Protected
TDM TSI TSI TDM
Card Card
Secondary Secondary
TDM/Ethernet
Card Card
A Chassis C Chassis
Field Setting Options Default Note

Protection Enable, Disable Enable
Using Map Map 1 to 4 Map 1
Action Save Create Save: save the current setup
Create Create: DS1 Protection creation
Status Status: show the current DS1 protection status
Select a primary and a secondary card from PW(Eth), MQE1/T1(TDM), or QE1/T1(TDM) for DS1
protection and a particular plug-in card (MQE1/T1, QE1/T1,12FXS,12FXO, QFXS, or QFXO) as
the protected unit and confirm with the setting.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Any-DS1 Protection === 11:24:44 07/07/2021
Protection Group Creation, Using map 1 Total Group: 0

==============================================================================
Group:01
Primary Slot: 1 (QuadT1) [................................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS
T.S.:01
Secondary Slot: 2 (QuadT1) [................................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS
T.S.:1
Protected Slot: 1 (QuadT1) [................................]

Port:P1 NON-CAS
T.S.:01
Count:01
CXR.
107
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Switch Mode :Non-revertible

Data/Voice :Data
Confirm :No
Table 5-2 DS1 Protection Supported Card

Supported Card
Primary/Secondary Card PW(Eth),
MQE1/T1(TDM),
QE1/T1(TDM)
Protected Card MQE1/T1, QE1/T1,12FXS,12FXO, QFXS and QFXO
Protecting Card Combination PW(Eth)|QT1, PW(Eth)|QE1,

PW(Eth)|MQE1, PW(Eth)|MQT1,
QT1|QT1, QE1|QE1,
MQT1|MQT1, MQE1|MQE1,
PW(Eth)|PW(Eth),
QE1|MQE1, QT1|MQT1
5.2.8.17. Command Line

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (L) Command Line
This function is mainly for FAE support use and for license activation. Some configuration settings
such as the user-defined configurations can also be saved by using the command line.
Press "?", then press ENTER; the system will list all available commands. Then key in a desired
command to get the detail description. Some command may need a further “?” at the end of the
input. For example, key in “hwinfo?”, “upgrade?” or “show?” instead of “hwinfo”, “upgrade” and
“show”. To return to the "Controller Setup" menu, key in "QUIT".
P r e ss ? g et he l p o r QU I T r e tu r n.
1 2 : 02 : 36 Se p 0 1 / 21 > >?
A v a il a bl e C o mm a n ds :
q ui t h e lp p as s c od e s sh k ey g en pi n g
f ba n k f b oot u pg r a de a ut o _s a ve in a c ti v e
t xt c fg d e fcf g f or c e _s y nc h wi n fo fa l i ce n se
r in g h b _ch e c k s ho w c ar d _l o g ne t c ap
n et p er f
1 2 : 02 : 43 Se p 0 1 / 21 > > h e l p
C o m ma n ds Su p po r t :
q ui t - - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > Q u it co m m an d su p p or t .
h el p - - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > T h is he l p m e ssa g e .
p as s co d e - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > P a ss co d e f o r d e b ug mo d e ( co n t ac t wi t h F A E) .
p in g i p - - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > P i ng an i p a ddr e s s.
f ba n k - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > D i sp l ay o r s et f i rm w ar e b a nk i n F las h .
f bo o t - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > D o wn l oa d bo o t-u p co d e ( DA N GE R ! !) .
u pg r ad e c a rd - -- - --- - - - > B a tc h d o w nl o ad f i rm w ar e o f c a r d.
( T yp e ' u p gr a de ? ' t o s e e a ll u pg r ade c om m an d s)
a ut o _s a ve [s e c ] - --- - - -- > D i sp l ay o r s et a u to - sa v e t im e .
i na c ti v e [ se c ] - - --- - - -- > D i sp l ay o r s et d e te c t t im e f o r c a rd i n ac t iv e .
t xt c fg -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > U p lo a d t e xt mod e co n fi g ur a ti o n f o r v i e w o nl y .
d ef c fg -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > S a ve / Cl e a r/ U plo a d /D o wn l oa d d e f au l t c o n fi g .
f or c e_ s yn c - - - -- - --- - - -- > F o rc e d u a l- C PU s y nc an d i g no r e h a rdw a r e c he c ki n g.
h wi n fo di s p C A RD --- - - -- > D i sp l ay H W i nfo f or ex p or t . ( b y J SON f or m at )
h wi n fo up l oa d CA R D - - - -- > U p lo a d H W i n fo v i a T FT P /S F TP .
f al i ce n se im p o rt --- - - -- > I m po r t f e at u re a c ti v at i on li c e ns e da t a .
f al i ce n se do w n lo a d - - - -- > D o wn l oa d li c ens e fi l e v ia TF T P /S F TP.
r in g c h id -- - - -- - --- - - -- > S h ow PD H - Ri n g c h a nn e l I D.
h b_ c he c k -- - - -- - --- - - -- > H B c h ec k co u nt, i f P RI no _ rs p > co u nt, R ed ta k e o ve r .
t es t ts -- - - -- - --- - - -- > T e st a T S .
s ho w m a c -- - - -- - --- - - -- > S h ow MA C ad d res s .
1 2 : 03 : 35 Se p 0 1 / 21 > >
CXR.
108
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
NOTES: 1. On the top right corner, user can press TAB to switch Insert or Replace.
11:17:41 Feb 27/18 Replace
Press ? get help or QUIT return.
11:17:39 Feb 27/18 >>
11:18:27 Feb 27/18 Insert

Press ? get help or QUIT return.
11:17:39 Feb 27/18 >>
For example:
>> inactve  move cursor to ‘v’, TAB to insert, then press ‘i’, then the word become
‘inactive’
>> inactuve  move cursor to ‘u’, TAB to replace, then press ‘i’, then the word become
‘inactive’
2. For instructions of fae_upload, hwinfo disp CARD, hwinfo upload CARD, falicense import,
and falicense download screen, please refer to Appendix H.
5.2.8.18. SNTP Setup
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (N) SNTP Setup
This function is SNTP server setup. Simple Network Timing Protocol (SNTP) is an adaptation of
the Network Time Protocol (NTP) used to synchronize computer clocks on the Internet.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === SNTP setup === 12:11:45 09/01/2021

SNTP ON/OFF : OFF

SNTP server 1 : 000.000.000.000
SNTP server 2 : 000.000.000.000
Update period : 0060 (Min)
SNTP timezone : +0
5.2.8.19. SYSLOG Setup
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (U) SYSLOG Setup
This function supports RFC5424 syslog. The syslog setup is to enable/disable the syslog function
and keyin the syslog server IP. Then you can view the syslog from syslog servers. Suggest
installing Kiwi Syslog Server for Window Environment.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = S Y SL O G S et u p = = = 12 : 12 : 1 5 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
S Y S LO G O N /O F F : OF F
S Y S LO G S e rv e r : 00 0 .00 0 . 00 0 .0 0 0
S Y S LO G S e rv e r2 : 00 0 .00 0 . 00 0 .0 0 0
S Y S LO G P o rt : UD P - 5 1 4
CXR.
109
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.8.20. RADIUS Setup
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (V) RADIUS Setup
This function is to support Radius client function for user to login by the account registered at
Radius Server via console port of QX3440. To enable this function you need to set the account
numbers at radius sever. Please note that local accounts are able to log-in via serial console;
however, local accounts cannot log-in when Radius server is enabled to connect.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PA == = R A DI U S s e tup = == 1 6: 3 6:0 4 01 / 31 / 20 1 9
S er v er 1 : D I SA B LE
I P : 0 0 0. 0 00. 0 0 0. 0 00
Ke y :
P or t : 0 1 81 2
S er v er 2 : D I SA B LE
I P : 0 0 0. 0 00. 0 0 0. 0 00
Ke y :
P or t : 0 1 81 2
Au t h. Co n so l e v i a R A D IU S : D IS A BL E (if s er v er is co n n ec t ed)
F o r M a na g em e nt - P ri v ile g e -L e ve l > >

OP E RA T OR Pr i v il e ge L e ve l : 0 02
AD M IN Pr i v il e ge L e ve l : 0 05

Server1, 2 Enable, Disable Disable
IP Server IP 0.0.0.0
Key Max 64 chars Empty
Port 1~65535 1812 (Radius port)
Auth. Console via RADIUS: Enable, Disable Disable
OPERATOR Privilege Level 0~255 2
ADMIN Privilege Level 0~255 5
5.2.8.21. Multicast Mapping Procedure
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (A) System to set up system configuration
Then move the cursor to "TSI Function" option and use TAB key to set "TSI Function" as 1: N
(Multicast). Press ESC to return and key in Y to return to the "Controller Setup" menu.
CXR.
110
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; P l ea s e I np u t : h h:m m : ss mm / dd / yy y y , B ACK S P AC E t o e d it
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 1 2: 2 3:2 6 09 / 01 / 20 2 1_
[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: BR I DG E E t h p o rt BP D U: E NA B LE
WAN: ON HD L C 0 0 00 0 0 01
G a t ew a y I nt e rf a c e: G a te w ay IP A d dr : 19 2 . 16 8 .0 0 1. 2 54
B a u d R at e : 9 60 0
P a r it y : N ON E
(Target) (Source)
Slot B Slot A
TSI Data/ Voice
TS01 TS01
Slot C
TSI Port 1
TS01
QX3440
Above settings are for Slot A time slot 01 mapping to Slot B time slot 01 and Slot A time slot 01
mapping to Slot C/Port1 time slot 01.
Press "C" from the "Controller Setup" menu (Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (C)TSI Map
Setup) to set system map.
Below example setting is for mapping Slot A's time slot 01 to Slot B's time slot 01.
X C T YP E : 1 :N Ta r g et E1 N O N- C A S S ou r ce E1 NO N -C A S
T a r ge t PO / T S D SL / P O T S P O/ T S D SL / PO T S P O/ T S D S L / PO TS P O /T S D SL / PO T S
S l o t : B == = = = = === = = == = = = == = = = = == = === = = = == = = = == = = == = == = = == = = = == = == = = =
Port : 1 d A 1 17 d 1 d 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d
C i r cu i t I nf o : 3 d 19 d 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
T . S .# : 0 1 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
C l e ar : N o 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
S o u rc e 10 d 26 d 10 d 26 d
Slot : A 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
CXR.
111
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Port : 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
C o n fi r m? Y es 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
16 d 16 d
Another example setting is for mapping Slot A's time slot 01 to Slot C/Port 1's time slot 01.
X C T YP E : 1 :N Ta r g et Q ua d -E 1 N O N- C A S S ou r ce E1 NO N -C A S
T a r ge t PO / T S D SL / P O T S P O/ T S D SL / PO T S P O/ T S D S L / PO TS P O /T S D SL / PO T S
S l o t : C == = = = = === = = == = = = == = = = = == = === = = = == = = = == = = == = == = = == = = = == = == = = =
Port : P1 1 1 d A 1 17 d 1 d 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
T . S .# : 0 1 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
C l e ar : N o 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
S o u rc e 10 d 26 d 10 d 26 d
Slot : A 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
C o n fi r m? Y es 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
16 d 16 d
Press "D" to enable this map as the current map.
P l ea s e u s e D -co m m an d ( n ex t s c r ee n ) t o ac t iv e m a p a s c u rre n t m a p.
and V -co m m an d ( m ai n m e n u) to s a ve ma p s t o F l as h me m o ry .
> > Pr e ss an y k e y t o co n t in u e.
M ap 1 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
M ap 2 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
M ap 3 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
M ap 4 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
CXR.
112
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Enable MAP_3 as the current TSI map. Then press "Y" to confirm the setting or "N" to abort. To
save the new map configuration to flash memory, press "V" from the "Controller Menu".
M ap 1 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
M ap 2 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
M ap 3 E N ABL E 00 : 00
M ap 4 D I SAB L E 00 : 00
5.2.9. System Alarm Setup

Under the Controller Menu, press “M” to set up system alarm as below.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Alarm Setup === 12:27:46 09/01/2021
A -> General Alarm Setup

B -> Bundle Alarm Setup
Press “A” to enter General Alarm Setup page. This menu allows you to enable/disable alarm and
set the severity of different alarm types. Please refer to Appendix D "Alarm Setup Indication" for
setup detail.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === System Alarm Setup === 12:28:34 09/01/2021

[Alarm Action]
ALARM : DISABLE
RELAY : DISABLE PERIOD (s): NA
[Alarm Type]
ALARM CUT OFF : DISABLE
SLOT INACTIVE : DISABLE
SLOT START-UP : DISABLE
CLOCK LOSS : DISABLE
LINK SWITCH : DISABLE
MAP SWITCH : DISABLE
POWER ALARM : DISABLE
CXR.
113
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
TYPE MISMATCH : DISABLE

DUAL-CPU ALARM: DISABLE
MANAGEMENT ALM: DISABLE
SNMP LINK DOWN: DISABLE
The Alarm Relay is applied to configure the Alarm Relay output present on the front panel of
QX3440 controller. The alarm relay circuit will be triggered when an alarm is detected. To return
the alarm relay to the normal state, users are provided with three options. The detailed
description for each option is listed below:
AUTO: The alarm relay will return to normal state in 1 minute once the problem of all detected
alarm is solved. To check the alarm status, see the (Q) Alarm Queue Summary screen. The alarm
status “clear” indicates the problem of the alarm s is solved.
NOTE: The alarm referred above is those which could be auto-cleared. For detailed information,
please refer to Table 5-2 Auto-Cleared Alarm Types.
Table 5-3 Auto-Cleared Alarm Types

Alarm Type of QX3440
Alarm: Enable Relay: Auto Alarm severity level: Major/Critical/Minor
Card Type : CTRL Card
Alarm Type Alarm Queue summary
DUAL-CPU ALARM Rudundant loss/insert
Power Alarm Redundant Power fail/recover
Clock Alarm (for normal clock only) Clock loss/recovered
Slot Inactive Slot no work/slot startup
Slot Start-Up
Card Type : all E1 card (FE1/QE1/MQE1/3E1)
LOS LOS/LOS remove
LOF LOF/LOF remove
AIS AIS/AIS remove
RAI RAI/RAI remove
Card Type : all T1 card (FT1/QT1/MQT1/3T1)
LOS LOS/LOS remove
LOF LOF/LOF remove
AIS AIS/AIS remove
YEL YEL/YEL remove
Card Type : G.shdsl card
CXR.
114
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
“LOS,MASTER-LOOP1” LOS,MASTER-LOOP1
/LOS,MASTER-LOOP1 remove
“LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1
/LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1 remove
“LOS,MASTER-LOOP2” LOS,MASTER-LOOP2
/LOS,MASTER-LOOP2 remove
“LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2” LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2
/LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2 remove
Card Type : G.703 card
LOS LOS/LOS remove
Card Type : RTA/RTB card
LAN-Link down Link up/down
Card Type : DTE card
Unit 1 : Major Unsync/Unsync remove.
PERIOD: Users must set up a time limit first, and the default setting is 2 seconds. That means the
alarm relay will return to normal condition after 2 seconds the alarm is detected.
MANUAL: When alarms are detected and reported to CTRL card, users have to cut off all the
alarms manually by pressing the ACO button on the controller’s front panel, or by activating “(A)
Alarm Cut off” from the main menu. Then, the alarm relay will return to the normal state.
DISABLE: The alarm relay will remain disabled when alarms occur.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == S y st e m A la r m S e tu p == = 13 : 00 : 1 1 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
[ A l ar m A c ti o n]
A L A RM : EN A BLE
R E L AY : DI S ABL E PER I O D ( s) : N A
[ A l ar m T y pe ]
A L A RM CU T O F F : MA J OR
S L O T I NA C TI V E : DI S ABL E
S L O T S TA R T- U P : DI S ABL E
C L O CK LO S S : DI S ABL E
L I N K S WI T CH : DI S ABL E
M A P S W IT C H : DI S ABL E
P O W ER AL A RM : DI S ABL E
T Y P E M IS M AT C H : DI S ABL E
D U A L- C PU AL A RM : DI S ABL E
M A N AG E ME N T A LM : DI S ABL E
SNMP LINK DOWN: DISABLE
Press “B” to enter Bundle Alarm Setup page
CXR.
115
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == B u nd l e A la r m S e tu p == = 13 : 01 : 3 4 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
[ T y pe ] [ A l ar m ]
A R P /b u nd l e D I S AB L E
R x - Lo s t/ b un d le D I S AB L E
L o s s o f b un d le D I S AB L E
U n d er r un / bu n dl e D I S AB L E
O v e rr u n/ b un d le D I S AB L E
B u n dl e L Bi t D I S AB L E
B u n dl e R Bi t D I S AB L E
I P Co n fl i ct D I S AB L E
E L E C E TH 1 L I NK D I S AB L E
E L E C E TH 2 L I NK D I S AB L E
O P T I E TH 1 L I NK D I S AB L E
O P T I E TH 2 L I NK D I S AB L E
E T H 1 L OO P IN G D I S AB L E
E T H 2 L OO P IN G D I S AB L E
5.2.10. Firmware Transfer

Under the Controller Menu, press “W” to enter the screen of File Transfer as below.
Note: Check the current hardware version before firmware upgrade. Make sure the existing
hardware version is compatible to the updated firmware version. For more details, please
contact us.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = Fi l e T ra n sf e r = = = 13 : 14 : 2 5 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
0 - > F T P t yp e : T F TP o r S F TP
A -> D o wn l oa d Ma i nbo a r d F ir m wa r e
C -> D o wn l oa d Co n fig u r at i on
D -> U p lo a d C o nf i gur a t io n
E -> D o wn l oa d Ma i nbo a r d B oo t -u p
R -> C o py Fi r m wa r e t o Re d un d an t
F -> U p lo a d F A E i nfo
5.2.10.1. FTP Type Setup

Press “0” from the File Transfer Menu, the screen will show as below:
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === FTP Type === 15:19:34 08/30/2021

FTP type: TFTP
CXR.
116
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
The File Transfer can be done through a TFTP or SFTP server. Use the TAB key to choose and
press ENTER.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === FTP Type === 15:21:23 08/30/2021
FTP type: SFTP
Really want to change ?
Input YES to confirm the change.
5.2.10.2. Download Mainboard Firmware

NOTE: Please upload configuration as a backup before firmware download.
Press “A” from the File Transfer Menu, the screen will show as below:
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Download Firmware === 15:24:09 08/30/2021

ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Please Input: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn, BACKSPACE to edit
Firmware 1 Version: V13.03.01 (0534)

Firmware 2 Version: V23.01.01 (0006)
Current Firmware Bank: 2
Next Boot Firmware: 2
TFTP Server IP: 000.000.000.000
Firmware File Name:
Upgrade Protection: DISABLE (Using FTP server IP for checking)
<< ESC key ignore and return, ENTER key to start >>
5.2.10.3. Download Mainboard Boot-up

Press “E” from the File Transfer Menu, the screen will show as below:
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Download Bootup Code === 13:17:27 09/01/2021
Current boot-up version: CCPA BOOT V1.02
TFTP Server IP : 192.168.056.236

Download File Name :
CXR.
117
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.10.4. Application of upload / download configuration
The configuration of a properly set up QX3440 device can be quickly uploaded to a TFTP server
and then downloaded to other QX3440 devices even if they are not loaded with plug-in cards.
This simplifies the set up for mass deployment of new devices, each with same plug-in card and
same configuration.
Press “I” from the Controller Menu, and then press “B” from the Tributary Card Information Menu,
the screen will show as below:
Users can retrieve the plug-in card types for which the downloaded configuration will need. The
sample screen is shown below.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = T r ib u ta r y C a rd Inf o r ma t io n = = = 13 : 18: 1 6 0 9 /0 1 /2 0 21
Slot C ar d /I n te r f ac e Se r ia l So f t wa r e V e r si o n R eg . Ca r d Co m me n t
==== = == = == = == = = == = == == = == = = == = = == = === = = == = == = = == = = == = = = == = == = ==
A
B
C
D M 4T E 00 0 23 5 V 1. 0 3 .0 1 (0 0 1 5) M 4T E
E Q FX O 01 2 02 8 V 3. 0 1 .0 1 (0 0 5 5) Q FX O
F Q FX S 20 2 88 8 V 4. 0 4 .0 7 (0 0 2 8) Q FX S
H Q E& M 30 3 36 6 V 6. 0 4 .0 1 (0 0 0 2) Q E& M
J N/ A O CU / D P u np l ug g ed
K N/ A O CU / D P u np l ug g ed
Upload Configuration
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = T r ib u ta r y C a rd Inf o r ma t io n = = = 13 : 18: 1 6 0 9 /0 1 /2 0 21
A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; P l ea s e I np u t : n nn. n n n. n nn . nn n , B A CK S P AC E to ed i t
T F T P S er v er IP : 1 92 . 16 8 .0 0 0. 0 5 9
C o n fi g F i le Na m e :
< < ES C k e y i gn o r e a nd r e tu r n, EN T ER k ey to s t ar t > >
Download Configuration
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = Do w n lo a d C on f ig u r at i on = = = 13 : 20 : 4 5 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
A R R OW KE Y S: Cu r s or mov e ; P l ea s e I np u t : n nn. n n n. n nn . nn n , B A CK S PAC E to ed i t
T F T P S er v er IP : 1 92 . 16 8 .0 0 0. 0 5 9
O v e rw r it e N e t S e tt i ng: N O
CXR.
118
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.10.5. Copy Firmware to Redundant
After completed the download firmware, the Copy Firmware to Redundant Board screen will show
up. Press “Yes” to copy the new firmware to Redundant controller. If the device only has one
controller, this screen won’t show up.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2 = ==C o p y F ir m wa r e t o R e dun d a nt Bo a rd = == 1 3: 2 1:1 3 09 / 01 / 20 2 1
C u rr e nt Fi r mw a r e B ank : 2
N e xt B oo t Fi r mw a r e B ank : 1
= = = > T ra n sf e rr i n g F irm w a re to Re d un d a nt Boa r d

1 0 0 % Tr a ns f er C om p let e !
= = = > P ro g ra m mi n g t h e F l a sh in Re d un d a nt Boa r d
1 0 0 % Pr o gr a mm i n g C omp l e te !
R e m em b er to Re b o ot to R u n t he Ne w F i r mw a re !
= = > > E nt e r p as s w or d : X X XX X
5.2.10.6. Download Firmware Procedure
To download firmware using SNMP port via CXRTerm, perform the following procedure:
Single controller:
Setup the VT-100 connection

Setup TFTP server in PC
Download the firmware file: xxxxxx.run
Do warm reset primary controller board
Firmware download procedure completes
Dual Controllers:
Setup the VT-100 connection

Setup TFTP server in PC
Download the firmware file: xxxxxx.run
Copy Firmware to redundant board
Do warm reset in primary controller board
Firmware download for the primary controller board procedure completes
Do reset in redundant board
Firmware download for the redundant controller board procedure completes
NOTE: The file name of the run code will be provided by CXR and will vary.
The following step by step procedure uses dual controller device as example.
NOTE: The Single controller procedure is included in the Dual controller procedure.
CXR.
119
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Download Firmware File with dual Controller Cards:
Command Path: Controller Menu > (W) Firmware Transfer > (A) Download Mainboard Firmware
When the Download Firmware screen appears, key-in the TFTP Server IP number and Firmware
File Name: xxxxxx.run. (This example uses v11.03.01.run) Then press Enter.The system will ask
you to confirm the download. Ress Y to start the download.
Q X3 4 4 0-CCPB -2 === Download Firmware === 12:37:10 02/27/2018

ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort
Firmware 1 Version : V11.03.01 (0028)

Firmware 2 Version : V11.02.01 (0030)
Current Firmware Bank: 1
Next Boot Firmware : 1
TFTP Server IP : 192.168.000.059
Firmware File Name : V11.03.01.RUN
Upgrade Protection : DISABLE (Using TFTP server IP for checking)
Really want to Download ?
Upon completing the firmware download, the Copy Firmware to Redundant Board screen will
show up. Key in “Y” to copy the new firmware to Redundant controller. If the device only has one
controller, this screen won’t show up.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2 = ==C o p y F ir m wa r e t o R e dun d a nt Bo a rd = == 13:27:36 02/27/2018
C o py fi r mw a re t o R edu n d an t B o ar d - a re you s ur e ?
The screen shows the process of transferring firmware to redundant controller. If password
protected, you need to key-in the password.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2 = ==C o p y F ir m wa r e t o R e dun d a nt Bo a rd = == 1 4 :27 : 3 6 0 2/ 2 7/ 2 01 8
= = = > T ra n sf e rr i n g F irm w a re to Re d un d a nt Boa r d

1 0 0 % Tr a ns f er C om p let e !
= = = > P ro g ra m mi n g t h e F l a sh in Re d un d a nt Boa r d
1 0 0 % Pr o gr a mm i n g C omp l e te !
R e m em b er to Re b o ot to R u n t he Ne w F i r mw a re !
CXR.
120
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
The firmware download procedure has completed.
Configure the Controller Reset

Command Path: Controller Menu > (Z) Controller Reset
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == Re s et Co n t ro l Bo a r d = == 1 7: 5 9:0 9 0 2 / 27 / 20 1 8
> > Se l ec t ? * R ed u nda n t P ri m ar y Sy s tem
Use the arrow keys to select from Redundant, Primary and System and then press Enter.
Select Primary and Warm Restart and then press Enter. A message will prompt, shown in the
bottom of the screen. Key in“Y”, then key in “YES” to confirm the setting (or “N” to abort). The
screen shows Warm Reset: Saving working configuration... Reseting...
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = Re s et Co n tr o l B o ard = == 18 : 0 1: 0 9 0 2 / 27 / 20 1 8
> > Se l ec t ? R ed u nda n t * P ri m ar y Sy s tem

> > Re s ta r t M od e ? *W a r m R es t ar t C ol d Re s t ar t
= = = > W ar m R e se t : S a vin g wo r ki n g c on f i gu r ati o n .. . Re s et i ng . . .
NOTE: For firmware download procedure, Warm Restart is recommended.
After few minutes, the device will automatically load the system hardware configuration.
The initial system configure screen appears.
Download FPGA2 ...
Download FPGA2......
FPGA2 done !
FPGA2 PLL lock !

write_reboot_status_and_awdt_ctrl_to_warm_reset
[Reboot_Status]=1000000
[AWDT_Status]=3
[Next Time will be Warm_restart]
Board_Slot=0
Press ACO key to load default configuration...3...2...1...
Init System Configuration.....Load Previous
Init 3440 PW Configuration.....
Header correct, parse config...
Config syntax correct, set config...Load 3440 PW Previous
Init TSI 90820.....OK!
Primary board.....
irc intr off
Init RS485 SCC4...
CXR.
121
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Press (Z) Controller Reset to reset the redundant Controller Card. Select Redundant and key-in
password (CXR default password: cxr). Please wait for approximate 3 minutes for next screen to
show up.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = R e se t C o nt r o l B oar d == = 1 4 : 52 : 10 0 2 /2 7 /2 0 18
> > Se l ec t ? * R ed u nda n t P ri m ar y Sy s tem
The screen shows the Redundant is synchronizing with Primary. Please wait.
R edu n d an t i s s y nc h r on i zin g wi t h P ri m ar y . ..
(d o n' t in s ert a ny ca r d d ur i n g t his s yn c hr o ni z in g pr o ces s )
. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . ... . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . ... . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . ... . . .. . .. . ..
The screen will return to Controller Menu when the redundant Controller Reset function is
complete. Now the software version has upgraded to V11.03.01.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Controller Menu === 13:35:01 09/01/2021
Serial Number : 750 Redundant Controller: Enabled

HW:Ver.C, FPGA1:V8(10), FPGA2:V5(49) Start Time : 06:13:43 09/01/2021
CPLD:V3(2) Device Name: QX3440
Software Version: V11.03.01(0028)
[DISPLAY] [SETUP]
C -> System Configuration S -> System Setup
B -> Clock source Configuration M -> System Alarm Setup
Q -> Alarm Queue Summary W -> Firmware Transfer
I -> System Information V -> Store/Retrieve Configuration
P -> Performance Report K -> Clock source Setup
L -> PseudoWire Status T -> Bit Error Rate Test
D -> PseudoWire Setup
[LOG] [MISC]
F -> Log Off A -> Alarm Cut Off
O -> Log On X -> Clear Alarm Queue
U -> Choose a Slot Y -> Controller Return to Default
E -> Terminate Session Z -> Controller Reset
>>SPACE bar to refresh or enter a command ===>
5.2.10.7. Controller (CTRL) Firmware Synchronization
Operating the QX3440 with different controller firmware might cause traffic loss if the working
CTRL fails. Please refer to the following procedure for the controller firmware synchronization.
1. From Controller menu, at the top of screen, the Software Version is the working
controller firmware version, record it if necessary. OR
2. From Controller menu, select I-> System Information. Then select A -> Dual CTRL
Information. It shows both the primary and the redundant controller firmware versions,
record them if necessary.
3. If the controller version on both controllers is not the same, from Controller menu, select
W->Firmware Transfer
CXR.
122
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
4. From File Transfer menu, select R -> Copy Firmware to Redundant

5. Press Y to copy the working controller firmware to redundant controller.
6. Wait for the copy to complete
7. The screen will show
===> Transferring Firmware to Redundant Board
100% Transfer Complete !
===> Programming the Flash in Redundant Board
100% Programming Complete !
Remember to Reboot to Run the New Firmware !
8. From Controller Menu, select Z-> Controller Reset
9. From Reset Control Board menu, select option: Redundant to reset the redundant
CTRL and activate the new firmware
Note: Warm Restart is recommended.
10. While resetting, the screen shows
Redundant is synchronizing with Primary...
(Don’t insert any card during this synchronizing process)
NOTE: During the synchronization, QX3440 does not respond to VT-100, Telnet, and SSH. The
synchronization procedure takes approximate 3 minutes to complete. After synchronization completes, the
system responds to VT-100, Telnet, and SSH.
11. From Controller menu, check the software version at the top and select R-> Redundant
CTRL Information to verify the firmware version.
5.2.11. Store/ Retrieve Configuration

Under the Controller Menu, press “V” to store or retrieve the current configuration as the following
screen shows. Use arrow keys to select STORE or RETRIEVE, press ENTER. The current
selection will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
Store Configuration:
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = =S t or e /R e tr i e ve Con f i gu r at i on = == 1 3:4 2 : 26 09 / 01 / 20 2 1
> > Se l ec t ? * S TO R E R ET R IE V E
Then the system will prompt the following message, shown in the bottom line. Enter “Y” to confirm
the setting or “N” to abort.
> > St o re Cu r re n t C o nfi g u ra t io n ? [Y / N ]
Press “Y” from the above screen. The configuration saving starts.
CXR.
123
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
= = = > S av e a n d B a ck u p.. . . .. .
Retrieve Configuration:
Use arrow keys to move the cursor at “RETRIEVE”, which will be highlighted by an asterisk (*).
> > Se l ec t ? S TO R E * R ET R IE V E
Press ENTER from the above screen. Then press “Y” to retrieve last stored configuration, or “N”
to abort it.
> > Re t ri e ve La s t S t ore d Co n fi g ur a ti o n ? [Y/ N ]
Press “Y” and key in YES to confirm. The configuration retrieving starts.
= = = > R et r ie v in g .. . ...
5.2.12. Clock Mode Setup
Controller Menu > (K) Clock Source Setup > (A) Clock Mode Setup
Under the "Clock Mode Setup" menu, use the TAB key to choose "Normal" or “SSM” option.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == C l oc k S o ur c e S e tu p == = 14 : 07 : 0 6 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
A - > C l oc k M o de S et u p
B - > C l oc k S o ur c e S e tup
C - > S S M C on v er s i on Tab l e S e tu p
CXR.
124
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
 For Normal Clock Mode
Under the "Clock Mode Setup" menu, use the TAB key to choose "Normal" option.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === C lo c k M od e S e t up === 14 : 07 : 1 8 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1

C l o ck Mo d e: No r m al
 For SSM (Synchronous Status Message) Clock Mode
Under the "Clock Mode Setup" menu, use the TAB key to choose "SSM" option.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === C lo c k M od e S e t up === 14 : 07 : 1 8 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1

C l o ck Mo d e: SS M
There is alternative access to setup the clock mode:

Under the "Controller Setup" menu, press “S”, then “A” to enter "System Setup (SYSTEM)" menu.
Use arrow keys to move the cursor at "Clock Mode" item and TAB key to choose "Normal" or
“SSM” option.

[System]
Time/Date : 14:08:43 09/01/2021_
[Network]
Mode: BRIDGE Eth port BPDU: ENABLE
WAN: ON HDLC 00000001
Gateway Interface: Gateway IPAddr: 192.168.001.254
Inband Uses Slot: D Note: Slot D port 4 can't use unframe mode!
[CONSOLE port]
Baud Rate : 9600
Stop Bit : 1-Bit
Parity : NONE
XON_XOFF : XOFF
[TSI map]
Either way does same setup to the clock mode.
CXR.
125
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
5.2.13. Clock Source Setup
Controller Menu > (K) Clock Source Setup > (B) Clock Source Setup
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB = == C l oc k S o ur c e S e tu p (N o r ma l M o de ) = = = 14 : 09: 3 3 0 9 /0 1 /2 0 21
A - > C l oc k M o de S et u p
B - > C l oc k S o ur c e S e tup
C - > S S M C on v er s i on Tab l e S e tu p
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB = == C l oc k S o ur c e S e tu p (N o r ma l M o de ) = = = 14 : 53: 3 7 0 9 /0 1 /2 0 21
M a s te r _C l k S ou r c e : IN T E RN A L
S e c on d _C l k S ou r c e : IN T E RN A L
C u rr e nt Cl o c k : MA S T ER _ CL K
C l k_ R ec o ve r _M o d e : MA N U AL
C lo c k H ol d -O v e r : OF F
 For Normal Mode Clock Source Setup:
Configuration options:
Configuration Option Default

Master_Clk Source INTERNAL, Line InterfaceNOTE2, ACR1, ACR2, INTERNAL
ACR3, ACR4, ETH1, ETH2
Second_Clk Source INTERNAL, Line InterfaceNOTE2, ACR1, ACR2, INTERNAL
Clock ACR3, ACR4, ETH1, ETH2
Current Clock MASTER_CLK, SECOND_ CLK, INTERNAL MASTER_CLK
Clk_Recover_Mode AUTOMATIC, MANUAL MANUAL
Clock Hold-Over ON, OFF OFF
NOTES: 1. Clock Hold-Over mode is configured to OFF. The operation of system clock shows below.
When the master clock loss occurs, the system clock will switch to secondary clock. When
the secondary clock loss occurs, the system clock will switch to internal clock.
Clock Hold-Over mode is configured to ON. The operation of system clock has shown as
below.
When the frequency accuracy of system clock is over ±198 ppm, the system clock will apply
the master clock. If the master clock cannot be found, the system clock will switch to
secondary clock. If the secondary clock cannot be found, the system clock will enter to
Hold-Over mode. When the frequency accuracy of system clock is lower than ±198 ppm,
the system clock will track the reference clock.
CXR.
126
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
2. Line Interface indicates the tributary card from the unit slot.
QX3440 is a DCS that only requires Stratum 3 clock accuracy and holdover. Please refer to table
below.
Stratum Level Free-Run Accuracy Holdover per Day in 1st 24 Hrs Slip Rate @ DS-1 Rate
1 1x10-11 N/A ≤ 1 Slip/72 days
2 1.6x10-8 1x10-10 ≤ 1 Slip/13 days
3E 4.6x10-6 1x10-8 ≤7 Slips/1 day
3 4.6x10-6 3.7x10-7 ≤255 Slips/1day
4 32x10-6 N/A N/A
 For SSM (Synchronous Status Message) Mode Clock Source Setup:
Under the "Clock Mode Setup" menu, use the TAB key to choose "SSM" option. Then go back to
the Clock Source Setup menu and press (B) to enter Clock Source Setup (SSM Mode) menu.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PA == = C l oc k M o d e S etu p == = 1 1 :2 5 :28 0 3/ 0 1/ 2 01 8
C l o ck Mo d e: SS M
Go to Quad E1's Port Menu. Under the "Port Menu", press “P” to select the E1/T1 port and then
press "S" to enter the "Port System Setup" menu. Use arrow keys to move to "FDL/HDLC" item,
and press TAB key to select "SSM" option. Press ESC, then Y to confirm.
L O T 6 Q u ad E1 P OR T 1 = = = P or t S y s te m Se t u p = == 14 : 58: 3 4 0 9 /0 1 /2 0 21
F RA M E = ON
C OD E = H D B3
C RC = ON
R AI = ON
A IS = F R AME D
C AS = OFF
S IG N AL L IN G = T R ANS
C GA = N O RM
O OS = B U SY
F DL / HD L C = SSM
F DL Sa b it = Sa4
S SM Sa b it = Sa6
I DL E = D5
P ro t ec t ed = D I SAB L E
M as t er = * * **
I NT F = 120 Ohm
W a r ni n g! ! I f y o u n e ed t o c h an g e F RA M E a n d C A S .
P l ea s e d i sab l e p r ot e ct i on a nd cle a r T S I M AP ( MA P 1 ~4 ) of t hi s p o rt .
CXR.
127
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Then back to the "Controller Menu", press “K” then press “B” to do clock source setup. Then the
following screen will show up. This menu is allowed to set up first, second, and third clock sources.
The "SLOT_A P3" means port 3 of slot A.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB = == Clo c k S o ur c e S et u p ( S SM M o de ) = = = 15 : 0 3: 2 9 0 9 / 01 / 20 2 1
F ir s t C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _A P3 ( D yna m i c S SM )
S e co n d C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _A P1 ( S tat i c S S M)
T hi r d C lo c k S o ur c e : I NT E RN A L ( S tat i c S S M)
C u rr e nt C lo c k : F IR S T_ C LK
C lo c k S t at u s : N OR M AL
S SM Ho l d T im e ( se c ) : 0 0
C lo c k H ol d - Ov e r : O FF
[ S ta t ic S SM mes s a ge ]
I n t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
L i ne Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
E x t er n al Cl o ck S SM Mes s a ge : B
Configuration options:
Field Setting Options

First Clock Source NONE, INTERNAL, EXTERNAL, Line Interfacenote
Second Clock Source NONE, INTERNAL, EXTERNAL, Line Interfacenote
Third Clock Source NONE, INTERNAL, EXTERNAL, Line Interfacenote
SSM Hold Time(sec) 0~99
Clock Hold-Over ON, OFF
Internal Clock SSM Message
Input 0~9, A-F
Line Clock SSM Message SSM code (please refer to SSM Message for E1 Operation table
below)
External Clock SSM Message
NOTE: Line Interface indicates the tributary card from the unit slot.
CXR.
128
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440 MQE1 MQE1
Unit 2
Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
QX3440 MQE1
E1 Network
Unit 1 Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
Port 1
Unit 1 clock source setting Unit 2 clock source setting

• First Clock Source: slot A port3 • First Clock Source: slot A port1
• Second Clock Source: slot A port 1 • Second Clock Source: Internal
• Third Clock Source: internal • Third Clock Source: None
The Unit 1 setting screen shown below, SLOT_A P3 is the current clock.
S e co n d C lo c k S o ur c e : S LO T _A P1 ( S tat i c S S M)
T hi r d C lo c k S o ur c e : I NT E RN A L ( S tat i c S S M)
S SM Ho l d T im e ( se c ) : 0 0
[ S t at i c S SM me s s ag e ]
The Unit 2 setting screen shown below, SLOT_A P1 is the current clock.
S e co n d C lo c k S o ur c e : I NT E RN A L ( S tat i c S S M)
T hi r d C lo c k S o ur c e : N ON E
CXR.
129
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
[ S t at i c S SM me s s ag e ]

Impedance : 75ohm Impedance : 75ohm
SSM Sa-bit : Sa4 SSM Sa-bit : Sa4
5.2.14. SSM Conversion Table Setup

Controller Menu > (K) Clock Source Setup > (C) SSM Conversion Table Setup
This function is to configure a SSM conversion table from DS1 SSM to E1 SSM. The QX3440
supports the configurarion of the conversion tables.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === SSM Conversion Table Setup === 15:21:25 09/01/2021
Please Input binary number (0~1), BACKSPACE to edit
Quality Level DS1 SSM E1 SSM

1 PRS 000010 0010
2 STU 000100 0000
3 ST2 000110 0110
4 ST3 001000 1001
5 SMC 010001 1011
6 ST4 010100 1110
7 DUS 011000 1111
8 RES 100000 1110
Note: DS1 BOC message is 0XXXXXX0 11111111.
Table 5-4 BOC Message for DS1(T1) Operation

QUALITY LEVEL DESCRIPTION DS1 BOC MESSAGE
1 PRS Primary Reference Source (Stratum 1 Traceable) 0000010011111111
2 STU Synchronized Traceablity Unknown 0000100011111111
3 ST2 Stratum 2 Traceable 0000110011111111
5 SMC SONET Minimum Clock Traceable 0010001011111111
7 DUS Do Not Use For Synchronization 0011000011111111
8 RES Reserved For Network Synchronization Use 0100000011111111
Table 5-5 SSM Message for E1 Operation

QUALITY LEVEL DESCRIPTION E1 SSM MESSAGE
0 Quality unknown 0000
1 Reserved 0001
2 Rec. G.811 (Traceable to PRS) 0010
CXR.
130
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QUALITY LEVEL DESCRIPTION E1 SSM MESSAGE

3 Reserved 0011
4 SSU-A (Traceable to SSU type A, see G.812) 0100
5 Reserved 0101
6 Reserved 0110
7 Reserved 0111
8 SSU-B(Traceable to SSU type B, see G.812) 1000
9 Reserved 1001
A Reserved 1010
B Synchronous Equipment Timing Source (SETS) 1011
C Reserved 1100
D Reserved 1101
E Reserved 1110
F Do not use for synchronization 1111
5.2.15. Bit Error Rate Test

This menu is used to do bit error rate testing. Press "T" from the "Controller Menu".
QX3440
TSI E1
loopback
E1 Devices
E1 BERT
AIS
The BERT Test screen will show up as below:

Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = B ER T T e st = == 15 : 22 : 1 8 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
T e s t S lo t : 6 (Q u a dE 1 )
T e s t P or t : P1
P a t te r n T yp e : 2 ex p 20- 1
S p l it Mo d e : S en d AI S
T e s t C ha n ne l : M ap p ed
T e s t M ap : i 1i i iii i i ii i ii i ii i ii i i ii i iii i i ii
T e s t D ir e ct : T o- L ine
U s e r P at t er n : 0 00 0 000 0
P e r io d (s e c) : 0 00 0 000
T e s t E na b le : D IS A BLE

Pattern Type 2exp20-1, 2exp15-1, 2exp20-1
2exp11-1, 2exp9-1, user def
Split Mode No, Send AIS Send AIS Send AIS: send AIS to the other side,
No: no sending AIS.
Test Channel Mapped, Full, Select Full Full: only available for E1 and T1 framed
mode.
Mapped: user should set up map first.
CXR.
131
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

Select: when a channel is set as “1”, this
means this channel is used to do bit error
rate test.
Test Map
Test Direct To Line, To Mapped To Line
Period (sec) Set to 0: means text is permanent
Other value: Stop the test after time out
Test Enable Enable, Disable Disable
NOTE: This function is not available for these plug-in cards: Router, Dry Contact, FXS, FXO, E&M,
Data Bridge, Conference, and Magneto.
AIS: Alarm Indication Signal; SES: Severely Error Second

BER: Bit Error Rate, BER = Bit Error/ (Elapsed Second - SES) x test channel x 64,000
ESR: Error Second Ratio, ESR = Error Second/ Elapsed Second - SES
5.2.16. PseudoWire Setup

Press "D" from the Controller Menu, the PseudoWire Setup screen will show at the bottom of the
Controller Menu.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === P se u do W ir e S e t up === 15 : 26 : 1 2 0 9/0 1 / 20 2 1
P -> B u nd l e P r ote c t M o de Se t up
A -> B u nd l e S o urc e IP Se t up
B -> B u nd l e S e tup
C -> E t he r n et Set u p
K -> A C R C l oc k So u r ce Se t up
F -> B u nd l e P e rfo r m an c e C le a r
T -> B u nd l e R o und T ri p D e la y
R -> P W J i t te r Bu f f er Re c en t er
5.2.16.1. Bundle Protect Mode Setup

Controller Menu > (D) PseudoWire Setup > (P) Bundle Protect Mode Setup
This menu allows to select the desired protect mode: Mode 1 or Mode 2 where mode 1 is for
single controller protection and mode 2 is for dual controller protection.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = B u nd l e P ro t e ct Mod e Se t up == = 15 : 26: 1 1 0 8 /3 0 /2 0 21
M o d e1 : S i ng l e C T RL Pro t e ct
M o d e2 : D u al CT R L P r ote c t
P r o te c t M od e S e l ec t : M o d e1
CXR.
132
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
C a sc a de Ch a n ne l : r e a dy
Field Setting Options Default Setting Note

Protect Mode Mode 1, Mode 2 Mode1
5.2.16.2. Bundle Source IP Setup

Controller Menu > (D) PseudoWire Setup > (A) Bundle Source IP Setup
This menu allows to setup Source IP address, subnet mask, gateway IP, and others. See below
screen for details.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = Bu n d le So u rc e I P Se t up = = = 06 : 41 : 5 7 0 9/0 2 / 20 2 1
M o d e1
P r i ma r y P at h
- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- - -- - -- -
S r c . I P A dd r es s : 0 00. 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0
S u b ne t M a sk : 0 00. 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0
G a t ew a y I P : 0 00. 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0
S r c . M AC Ad d re s s : 0 0:5 0 : C6 : C5 : 00 : 9B
S e c on d ar y P a th
- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- - -- - -- -
S r c . I P A dd r es s : 0 00. 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0
S u b ne t M a sk : 0 00. 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0
G a t ew a y I P : 0 00. 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0
S r c . M AC Ad d re s s : 0 0:5 0 : C6 : C5 : 00 : 9C
A c t iv e T i me r (S ) : 0 5 ( B un d le AR P I n t er v al)
R e m ot e A R P L os s : C ont i n ue
P W SV L AN TP I D : 8 8A8
Field Setting Options Default Setting

Src. IP Address 000.000.000.000
Subnet Mask 000 ~ 255 000.000.000.000
Gateway IP 000.000.000.000
Active Timer 1~99 5
Remote Loss Continue, Stop Continue
PW SVLAN TPID 0~9, A~F 88A8
5.2.16.3. Bundle Setup

Controller Menu > (D) PseudoWire Setup > (B) Bundle Setup
The menu allows to create bundle (pseudowire) with desired configurations including bundle ID,
format, type, ToS, UDP number/ECID, frame, Destination IP/MAC, stratum, number of time slots,
CXR.
133
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
number of frames, Jitter delay, Jitter size, Vlan, CVlan ID, CVlan priority, SVlan ID, and SVlan
priority.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Bundle Setup === 17:57:29 07/05/2021

Mode1 Primary Secondary
Port(Bundle ID): 01 01 -------- Primary ---------
Format : CESoPSN CESoPSN PW Delay(ms):
Type : IP IP PW Pkt Size(Byte):
ToS : 000 0 PW PayLoadOH % :
UDP Number/ECID: 00000 00000 PW BW(Mbps):
Frame : nonCAS nonCAS Total PW BW(Mbps):
Dest IP/MAC: 000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000
Stratum : 3 3
Number of TS : 0 0 -------- Secondary -------
Number of Frame: 0005 5 PW Delay(ms):
Jitter Delay : 020 20 PW Pkt Size(Byte):
Jitter Size : 256 256 PW PayLoadOH % :
VLAN : OFF OFF PW BW(Mbps):
CVLAN ID : 0000 0000 Total PW BW(Mbps):
CVLAN Priority : 7 7
SVLAN ID : 0000
SVLAN Priority : 7
Action : Activate
Confirm ? No
<< Press ESC key to return to main menu or save system setup >>

Port Support
01~64 01 maximum 64
bundle IDs
Format CESoPSN, SAToP CESoPSN
Type IP CESoETH IP
ToS 0~255 0
UDP Number/ECID 1~65535 1-1048575 00000
Frame CESoPSN: NonCAS, E1CAS,
T1CAS
NonCAS
SAToP: T1UNFRAME,
E1UNFRAME
Dest. IP CESoPSN
Enter the destination IP address 000.000.000.000
(Dest. SAToP
MAC) CESoETH Enter the destination MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:00
Stratum 1, 2, 3, 3E, 4 3
Number of TS E1UNFRAME, T1UNFRAME:
nonCAS: 1-31 1-24
Number of Frame When Format is CESoPSN, Frame Number of TS x
5
is E1CAS: 1,2,4,8,16 Number of
When Format is CESoPSN, Frame Frame must be
5
is T1CAS: 1,2,3,4,6,8,12,24 within 8~1500
When Format is CESoPSN, Frame
8
is nonCAS: 1~1500
When Format is SAToP, Frame is
8
T1UNFRAME: 8,16,24,32,40,48,56
When Format is SAToP, Frame is
8
E1UNFRAME: 1~50
Jitter Delay 1 ~ 512 20
Jitter Size 1 ~ 512 20
VLAN OFF,1-VLAN,2-VLAN OFF
CVLAN ID 1 ~ 4094 0
CVLAN Priority 0~7 7
SVLAN ID 1 ~ 4094 0
SVLAN Priority 0~7 7
CXR.
134
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
For example:
(1) When the Format is set to CESoPSN with the Frame to E1CAS and Number of TS to 1, then
the Number of Frame can only be set to 8 or 16. Because the the number of TS x the number of
Frame must be within 8~1500. In other words, the numbers 1, 2 and 4 are invalid.
(2) When the Format is set to CESoPSN with the Frame to nonCAS and Number of TS to 31, then
the Number of Frame can only be set to 1~48. Because the the number of TS x the number of
Frame must be within 8~1500. In other words, the numbers 49~1500 are invalid.
5.2.16.4. Ethernet Setup

Controller Menu > (D) PseudoWire Setup > (C) Ethernet Setup
This menu allows to set up both electrical and optical Ethernet ports.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Ethernet Port Setup === 08:12:27 09/02/2021

ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; Change options by TAB
[Port State]
ETH1: ENABLE
ETH2: ENABLE
[Electrical Port Speed]

ETH1: AUTO
ETH2: AUTO
[Optical Port Speed]

ETH1: 1000M
ETH2: 1000M
[Unidirect Mode]
ETH1: DISABLE
ETH2: DISABLE

Port State ENABLE, DISABLE ENABLE
Electrical Port Speed AUTO,
1000M-FULL, 1000M-HALF,
AUTO
100M-FULL, 100M-HALF,
10M-FULL, 10M-HALF
Optical Port Speed 1000M, 100M 1000M
Unidirect Mode ENABLE, DISABLE DISABLE Optical ports only
NOTE: Unidirect Mode allows the data transmission and communication in a unidirectional
manner.
5.2.16.5. ACR Clock Source Setup

Controller Menu > (D) PseudoWire Setup > (K) ACR Clock Source Setup
This menu allows to setup ACR clock source.
CXR.
135
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

Port Enable Status Discon Restart Variance Freq

ACR1 : 01 OFF idle 0 0 0 0
ACR2 : 01 OFF idle 0 0 0 0
ACR3 : 01 OFF idle 0 0 0 0
ACR4 : 01 OFF idle 0 0 0 0
Time Stamp Upload TFTP Setup

Tftp IP Addr : 000.000.000.000
ACR Num : 0
Enable : OFF

Port 1~64 01
ACR1~4
Enable ON, OFF OFF
5.2.16.6. Bundle Performance Clear

Controller Menu > (D) PseudoWire Setup > (F) Bundle Performance Clear
This menu allows to clear bundle performance data. Press Y to confirm.

P -> Bundle Protect Mode Setup

A -> Bundle Source IP Setup
B -> Bundle Setup
C -> Ethernet Setup
K -> ACR Clock Source Setup

F -> Bundle Performance Clear
T -> Bundle Round Trip Delay
R -> PW Jitter Buffer Recenter
==> Clear performance data - are you sure [Y/N] ?

5.2.16.7. Bundle Round Trip Delay

Controller Menu > (D) PseudoWire Setup > (T) Bundle Round Trip Delay
This menu allows to select the bundle ID for round trip delay test. Select a bundle ID and set the
Test Enable to Enable.
Go to Controller Menu > (L) PseudoWire Status > (Q) Bundle Round Trip Display to see the
bundle round trip delay test result.
CXR.
136
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Round Trip Delay === 08:15:16 09/02/2021

Port(Bundle ID): 01
Test Enable : Enable
Input 0: enable all bundle round trip test

Port (Bundle ID) 1~64 00
Test Enable Disable, Enable Disable
5.2.16.8. PW Jitter Buffer Recenter

Controller Menu > (D) PseudoWire Setup > (R) PW Jitter Buffer Recenter
This menu allows to center the incoming data packets in the storage buffer to reduce packet delay
in a network congestion.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Round Trip Delay === 08:15:16 09/02/2021

Port(Bundle ID): 01
Enable: Yes
Input 0: recenter all bundle

Port(Bundle ID) 0~64 01
Enable No, Yes No
5.2.17. Alarm Cut Off

Press "A" from the Controller Menu, the alarm cut off screen will show at the bottom of the
Controller Menu.
> > Cu t o f f a la r m - are y ou su r e ( Y/ N ) ?
Key in Y to confirm or N to abort.
5.2.18. Clear Alarm Queue
Press "X" from the Controller Menu, the clear alarm queue screen will show at the bottom of the
Controller Menu.
> > Us e T A B k ey t o s ele c t u n it , a n d E N TE R ke y to cl e ar al a r m: ALL S LO T s
> > Cl e ar al a rm q ue u e o f AL L S L OT s - a re you s ur e ? [Y / N]
CXR.
137
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Key in Y to confirm or N to abort.
5.2.19. Return to Default
Press "Y" from the Controller Menu, the return to default screen will show at the bottom of the
Controller Menu.
>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]
Key in Y to confirm, then the following screen appears:
>>Please key in "YES" to confirm:
Key in "YES" to double confirm or press ESC key to abort.
NOTE: When having the controller return to its default setting, the inband cross connect
configuration will not be deleted.
5.2.20. Controller Reset
Press "Z" from the Controller Menu, the system reset screen will show at the bottom of the
Controller Menu.
> > Re s ta r t M od e ? *W a r m R es t ar t C ol d Re s t ar t
Use the ARROW keys to move the cursor and then press ENTER key, the following screen
shows up.
> > Re s et – a r e y ou sur e ? [ Y/ N ]
> > P le a se ke y i n "Y E S" t o c o nf i rm :
CXR.
138
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
6. APPENDIX A: LINK BACKUP

FUNCTION
6.1. Introduction
The Link Backup Function of QX3440 only applies to single E1/T1, FOM in mini slot: A, B, C
and D and 1FOMA in single slot (1 to 12). The Link backup function supports 1:1 and 1 + 1
protection. This occurs when the system is set up so that a backup line (or lines in the case of 1:
n) will be switched into service if the working line fails. In such a case, it must be switched in at
each end of the line.
E1/T1 E1/T1 1FOMA 1FOMA
C C
P P
U U
A B 1 2 POWER 1
FOM FOM
The illustration below is the Link Backup Function Schema.
CXR.
139
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Link Backup Schema

1:1
Active Tributary
.
.
Backup .
.
Slot 12 .
.
.
.
DS0
Cross- Connect Tributary
Active
Backup
1+1
Active Tributary
.
.
Backup .
.
Slot 12 .
.
.
.
DS0
Cross- Connect Tributary
Active
Backup
CXR.
140
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
6.2. Physical Requirement

The physical configuration of a Link Backup Function should consist of one QX3440 unit and
at least 2 E1/T1 cards or at least 2 FOM cards.
6.3. Setup Procedure

To configure the Link Backup Function in the follow procedure:
1. Same configure on both link backup cards

2. Configure Link Backup Function
3. Configure the TSI Map (see TSI Map setup in 5.2.8.7)
Configure Link Backup Function

Command Path Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (G) Link Backup Function
Description This function is to setup the 1:1 or 1+1 protection for single E1/T1, FOM cards in
mini slots
1. From the System Setup (Backup) screen, choose to active/deactive for the backup
function. Detail fields are explaining in the following table.
2. When the setting finished, press ‘ESC’ to save the configuration. A prompt will ask, “Are
you sure? Y/N”. Press ‘Y’. You will automatically return to the Controller Setup screen.
NOTE: Both backup links shall have the same FRAME and CAS setting. Please return to controller
menu and go to unit setup for setting.
QX3440-CCPB === System Configuration (Backup) === 08:37:39 09/02/2021
Backup function : OFF

Mode : non-revertible
Link : Link-A Link-B Link-C Link-D Link-1 Link-2 Link-3 Link-4

Model : FOM MQE1 FOM FE1 8DBRA 8E&M 8E&M 12FXS
=========== ==============================================================
Backup Link : ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
Backup Fun : OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Link Status : Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Link : Link-5 Link-6 Link-7 Link-8 Link-9 Link10 Link11 Link12

Model : 12FXO QuadE1 3E1
=========== ==============================================================
Backup Link : ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------
Backup Fun : OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
Link Status : Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
CXR.
141
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

Backup function OFF, ON (1+1), ON (1:1) OFF
Mode non-revertible, revertible non-revertible
Backup Link Choose the backup link N/A
Configure the TSI Map
Command Path Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (C) TSI Map Setup
Description This function is to do the TSI Map Setup. Select the desired slot and port number
for the mapping target. Next, select the starting timeslot number (T.S) and the
timeslot amount (T.S #), and data or voice (d/v) for target. Also select the desired
slot, port and starting timeslot number (T.S) for the mapping source. After
configuration, select “Yes” for confirmation.
Note: More detail, please see TSI Map Setup in Chapter 5
CXR.
142
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
7. APPENDIX B: INBAND
MANAGEMENT
7.1. Introduction
The advantage of Inband Management is saving money because management is through the line
itself and an additional separate line is not required. On the contrary, the disadvantage is that if
you do anything to break the management channel, you cannot get it back.
In Inband Management, the management function is inserted into the working line. Use the
Router card, management of a local, as well as one or more remote CXR products.
Detail info for Inband Protection Setup, please refer to (S) System Setup > (M) Inband Protection
section.
The diagram below illustrates inband application:
Users can use router card to share one or more 64 Kbps time slot for SNMP management. Each
64 Kbps time slot has enough bandwidth to manage four QX3440. Thus up to four QX3440 can
share a single 64 Kbps bandwidth for SNMP management.
CXR.
143
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Router card of the QX3440

allows Inband Management
through the network
QX3440 #1
E1
UNIT
Management
Network
Management Center W1 W2 W3
Router E1 E1
LAN
10/ 100 BaseT

One TS One TS
QX3440-C QX3440 #2
UNIT E1
Management
Router E1 E1
One TS One TS
Data
Time slot Inband Management
Figure 7-1 Inband Management Diagram
Note: Here we take QX3440 and QX3440-C as an example.
7.2. Inband Management Setup

Procedure
To configure the Inband Management, perform the following procedure:
1. Select the inband slot in Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (A) System
2. Set Trap IP Address and its community in Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP
Setup > (B) V1: Trap Setup
3. Set TSI Map in Controller Menu > (S) System Setup (C) TSI Map Setup.
Configure Inband Slot
Use arrow keys to move the cursor, and then set up the parameters in [Network] section. Then,
choose slot D port 4 or slot 12 port 4 for inband management. When done, press ESC to return to
the Controller Setup Menu.
CXR.
144
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CCPB === System Setup (SYSTEM) === 14:57:20 01/27/2021

[System]
Time/Date : 14:57:20 01/27/2021
[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: R OU T ER Et h po r t B PD U :
NI E N IP A dd r e ss S u bn e tM a sk Fr a m e L B T i m er
L A N : O FF 00 0 .0 0 0 .0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 . 00 0 Et h e rn e t
W A N : O FF 00 0 .0 0 0 .0 0 0.0 0 0 0 0 0. 0 00 . 00 0 . 00 0 HD L C 0 0 00 0 0 01
I n b an d U s es Sl o t : D N ot e : S lo t D p ort 4 c a n' t u s e u n fr a me m o de !
B a u d R at e : 9 60 0
P a r it y : N ON E
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : N(M u l ti c as t ) Clo c k M o de : SSM
Inband Uses Slot: 12 Note: Slot 12 port 4 can't use unframe mode!
NOTE: To setup inband management, one 64K timeslot must be assigned for link to the controller
(CTRL) through the internal cross-connect (XC). In-band timeslot (64Kbps) must be
selected in either Slot D/Port4.
Below are the plug-in cards that will be influenced due to the In-band timeslot limitation selected
in either Slot D or Slot 12:
Slot Plug-in Card
Slot D FOM, MQE1, MQT1, RTA
Slot 12 RTB, 4GH, TDMoE, QE1/QT1, 1FOMA
Although the framing option for each of the 4 ports of a Mini Quad E1/T1, Quad E1/T1, FOM or
1FOMA interface card can be configured either "unframed" or "framed", provision for inband
management imposes the following limitation. When one of these is selected for inband
management, the Port 4 in that Slot, D or 12, must be configured to framed.
The RTA, RTB, 4GH and TDMoE card supports up to 32 timeslots in normal condition. Due to the
timeslot limitation, one 64K timeslot is already reserved in the port 4 of Slot D and Slot 12 for
inband management. When these cards are plugged in either Slot D or Slot 12, only a maximum
of 31 timeslots can be set.
Configure Trap IP address and its community
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (S) SNMP Setup > (B) V1: Trap Setup
For details, refer to V1: Trap Setup on page 91.
CXR.
145
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Trap and Community === 19:37:56 01/31/2019

ARROW KEYS: Cursor move; BACKSPACE to edit, ESC to abort
Get Community : public______ Set Community : public

Trap system IP : WAN

Alarm/Trap Type: Vendor-Spec
TrapObject Type: Vendor-Spec
Trap Compress Window: 00 (minutes)
Configure TSI Map
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup (C) TSI Map Setup.
In the (S) System Setup (System) menu, use arrow keys and the TAB key to set up the HDLC TSI
map. You must select a time slot to use for inband management.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = S y s te m S e tu p ( S Y ST E M) = = = 1 5 :0 6 : 14 01/ 2 7 /2 0 21
[ S y st e m]
T i m e/ D at e : 1 5: 0 6:1 4 01 / 27 / 20 2 1_
[ N e tw o rk ]
M o d e: RO U TE R E t h p o rt BP D U:
W A N : O N 0. 0 .0 . 0 0 . 0. 0 .0 HD L C 0 0 00 0 0 01
B a u d R at e : 9 60 0
P a r it y : N ON E
T S I F u nc t io n : 1 : 1(B i d ir e ct i on ) Clo c k M o de : SSM
< < Press E SC ke y t o re tu rn t o p re vi ous m en u > >
In the example below we decided to map Time Slot 1 of Slot A to Time Slot 1 of the IB (In-band)
Port for this purpose. When you have completed your TSI map, press “ESC” to return to the
Controller Setup menu. Then press “D” from that menu to activate the new map.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === System Setup (MAP) === 15:09:21 01/27/2021
X C t yp e : 1 :1 T arg e t S o ur c e
Slot : A = == = = == = == = == == = == = === = = == = = = = == = = == = == = = = = == = == = == =
Port : 1 d IB 1 17 d 1 d A 1
CXR.
146
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d
C i r cu i t I nf o 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d
T . S .# : 0 1 5 d 21 d
C l e ar : N o 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d
S o u rc e 10 d 26 d
Slot : IB 11 d 27 d
Port : 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d
C o n fi r m? Y es 15 d 31 d
16 d
CXR.
147
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
8. APPENDIX C: E1/T1
PROTECTION
8.1. Introduction
The E1/T1 protection function only applies to Quad E1/T1, Mini Quad E1/T1, and TDMoE/Quad
E1/T1 cards. To apply E1/T1 protection function; two plug-in cards must be inserted next to each
other as a pair so that one plug-in card can be used to protect the other.
NOTE: A pair of Quad E1/T1 and TDMoE/Quad E1/T1 cards should be installed in one of the
following slot groupings: [1&2], [3&4], [5&6], [7&8], [9&10] or [11&12]. The pair of cards
should not be installed in the following groupings: [2&3], [4&5], [6&7], [8&9] or [10&11].
Same rule for a pair of Mini Quad E1/T1 cards should be installed in the following slot
groupings: [A&B], [C&D].
Before removing any card from QX3440 shelf, please make sure its connecting cables are
removed from plug-in card first.
This chapter introduces only 1:1 protection function for a pair of Quad E1/T1. For 1+1
protection function of TDMoE and Quad E1/T1, please refer to the Appendix B of the
TDMoE card User’s Manual.
There are two types of protection available for the Quad E1/T1 and Mini Quad cards. They are
Circuit Protection and Line Protection. Circuit Protection requires the use of a Y-BOX. This Y-Box
is specifically designed to provide a 1:1 circuit protection function for the Quad E1/T1 and Mini
Quad E1/T1 cards of the QX3440 shelf. Line Protection does not require the use of a Y-Box.
Each Quad E1/T1 or Mini Quad E1/T1 card has four ports. The ports of one card protect the
corresponding ports of the other card. For example, Port 1 of the protection card protects Port 1
of the other card. Similarly, Port 2 of the protection card protects Port 2 of the other card, etc.
To configure the E1/T1 Protection function, perform the following procedure.
Select the E1/T1 Protection function in Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (Q) E1/T1
Protection
Set TSI Map in Controller Menu > (S) System Setup (C) TSI Map Setup
NOTE: You MUST set the protection first and then set the TSI map.
CXR.
148
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
8.2. Setting up Circuit Protection

IMPORTANT: Lost of T1/E1 circuit will trigger switching that would cause the clock source to oscillate between
the working and the protection circuit card until the reaction from the remote side stabilized. This
might take a few minutes depending on the setup of the remote units and if another Y-box is
used in the remote side.
8.2.1. Connecting the Y-Box to the QX3440 Shelf

There are two Y-Box types available for the QX3440. One has BNC connectors and can handle
up to 4 lines. The other has RJ 48C connectors and can handle up to 16 lines. For every four lines
you wish to protect you must have one pair of Quad E1/T1 or one pair of mini Quad E1/T1 plug-in
cards in the QX3440.
NOTE: Cable connections between the RJ 48C connectors on the Y-Box and RJ48C connectors
on the QX3440 must be parallel, ie. Pin #1  Pin #1, Pin #2 Pin #2, Pin #4 # 4, and Pin
#5  # 5.
The following setup is using Quad E1 card for demonstration.
If you are using the BNC type Y BOX, use BNC cables to connect it to the QX3440 as shown in
Figure 9-1, below. For illustration purposes, only Port 1 is protected in this sample diagram. To
protect other ports you must connect them in a similar manner.
QUAD E1 QUAD E1
R R
x x
Po rt 4 Po rt 4
Tx Tx
C C R R
P P x
Po rt 3
x
Po rt 3
U U Tx Tx
A B 1 2 POWER 1
R R
x x
Po rt 2 Po rt 2
Tx Tx
R R
x x
Po rt 1 Po rt 1
Tx Tx
Y-BOX
1 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 1 2 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 2 3 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 3 4 A-Tx Line-Tx B-Tx 4
A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx A-Rx Line-Rx B-Rx
Figure 8-1 Connection for QX3440 and Y-BOX with BNC connectors
CXR.
149
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
If you are using the RJ48C type Y BOX, connect it to the QX3440 as shown in Figure 8-2 below.
For illustration purposes, only Port 9 is protected in this sample diagram. To protect other ports
you must connect them in a similar manner.
A B CPU-1 CPU-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 POWER 2
QUAD E1 QUAD E1
C C
T T
Port 4 Port 4
R R
L L Port 3 Port 3
C D 1 2 POWER 1
Port 2 Port 2
Port 1 Port 1
A LINE 9 A LINE 10 A LINE 11 A LINE 12 A LINE 13 A LINE 14 A LINE 15 A LINE 16

Y-BOX B B B B B B B B
A LINE 1
A LINE 2 B A LINE 3 B A LINE 4 B A LINE 5 B A LINE 6 B A LINE 7 B A LINE 8 B
B
Figure 8-2 Connection for QX3440 and Y-BOX with RJ48C connectors
8.2.2. Quad E1 card Location

In our sample setup we installed a Quad E1 card in Slot #9. We will use it as a Master. It will be
the working line. We also installed a Quad E1 card in Slot #10. It will be used as a Slave and will
perform the protection function.
8.2.3. Setting up a VT-100 Monitor

To use your PC as a VT-100 monitor, you may connect the front Console Port of the QX3440 to
the COM Port of the PC (It doesn’t matter which Com Port you connect to.)
Alternatively, if your computer has a USB port rather than COM ports, you may use USB cable to
connect the PC’s USB port to the Console port (USB) of the QX3440 instead.
8.2.4. Step by Step Quad E1 Plug-in card Circuit

Protection Setup
The sample screens below provide step by step instructions for setting up Quad E1 Circuit
Protection. In our sample setup we installed Quad E1 cards in slot #9 and slot #10. Slot #9 will be
the working slot, and slot 10 will stand by.
CXR.
150
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Go to Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (Q) E1/T1 Port Protection, select Setup and press
Enter.
The Setup menu is to setup the protection modes for each protection pair and ports.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === E1/T1 Port Protection === 18:00:49 01/27/2021
>> Select ? *Setup Status
On the Setup Screen, there are four selection for the user to setup such as disable, circuit,
line-non revertive line-revertive, 1+1 non revertive, and 1+1 revertive. The sample below is to
setup the port 1 of slot 9: 10 as circuit protection. It means Slot 9 port 1 is protection working port
and slot 10 port 1 as backup in Circuit mode.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = E 1 / T1 Po r t P ro t e ct i on = = = 1 8 :0 0 : 49 01/ 2 7 /2 0 21
Protect Pair(Master:Backup) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

=========================== =========== =========== =========== ===========
Slot A :B ( FE1: ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot C :D ( :FE1 ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 1 :2 ( FOM:FOM ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 3 :4 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 5 :6 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 7 :8 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Slot 9 :10 (QuadE1:QuadE1) CIRCUIT CIRCUIT DISABLE DISABLE
Slot 11:12 ( : ) ----------- ----------- ----------- -----------
Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

Slot A :B ( FE1: )
Slot C :D ( :FE1 )
Slot 1 :2 ( FOM:FOM )
Slot 3 :4 ( : )
Slot 5 :6 ( : )
Slot 7 :8 ( : )
Slot 9 :10 (QuadE1:QuadE1) 9 -1 9 -2 9 -3
Slot 11:12 ( : )
If protection type changed (ex: from 1:1 to 1+1), Please re-setup map!
NOTE: Protection Working Port Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4

Slot 9 :10 (QuadE1:QuadE1) 9 -1 9 -2 9 -3
Definition: 9-1 means Slot 9 port 1, 9-2 means Slot 9 port 2, and etc.
Force Switch Configuration
The protection setup must be done before the status setup.
Go to Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (Q) E1/T1 Port Protection, select Status and press
Enter.
The Status menu is to setup the ForceSwitch for each protection pair and ports.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = E 1/ T 1 P or t Pr o tec t i on == = 1 8: 0 3:4 1 01 / 27 / 20 2 1
>> Select ? Setup *Status
CXR.
151
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
The Status menu, it is to setup the force switch function to the assigned port of assigned protect
pair.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = E 1 / T1 Po r t P ro t e ct i on = = = 1 8 :0 6 : 58 01/ 2 7 /2 0 21
A R R OW KE Y S: CU R S OR MOV E , T A B: RO L L O P TI O NS
P r o te c t P ai r (M a s te r :Ba c k up ) P o rt 1 P or t 2 P or t 3 P o rt 4
= = = == = == = == = == = = == = === = = == = = == = = == = == = == = = == = == = = = == = == = == == == = == = == = ==
Slot A :B ( F E1 : FE 1 ) - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - - -- - -- - ---
Slot C :D ( : FO M ) - -- - -- - -- - - --- - - -- - -- - - -- - -- - -- -- -- - -- - -- - --
S l o t 1 : 2 ( Qu a dE 1 : ) - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - -- - - -- - -- - ---
S l o t 3 :4 ( : ) -- - -- - -- - -- --- - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - --- -- - - -- - -- - -
S l o t 5 :6 ( : ) -- - -- - -- - -- --- - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - --- -- - - -- - -- - -
S l o t 7 :8 ( : ) -- - -- - -- - -- --- - - -- - -- - - - -- - -- - --- -- - - -- - -- - -
S l o t 9 :1 0 (Q u ad E 1: Q ua d E 1) Fo r ce S wi t ch NO NO - - -- - -- - ---
S l o t 1 1: 1 2 ( : ) - - -- - -- - -- - - -- - - -- - -- - - -- - -- - -- -- -- - -- - -- - --
Function Setting Options Default

ForceSwitch NO, ForceSwitch NO
Press Enter to accept change and key-in “Y” to change the configuration.
> > Ch a ng e c o nf i g ur a tio n (Y / N) ? ( N ot e : to sav e , pl e as e u s e V - co m man d )
8.3. Setting up Line Protection

Line protection is illustrated in the figure below. It does not require the use of a Y-BOX.
Quad E1 E1 Line Quad E1

Card Card
Quad E1 E1 Line Quad E1

Card Card
QX3440 QX3440
Figure 8-3 Line Protection for Quad E1 Card
CXR.
152
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
8.3.1. Step by Step Quad E1 Card Line Protection

Setup
The sample screens below provide step by step instructions for setting up Quad E1 Line
Protection. In our sample setup we installed Quad E1 cards in slot #9 and slot #10. The card in
slot #9 will be working slot, and slot 10 will be standing by.
Go to Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (Q) E1/T1 Port Protection, select Setup and press
Enter.
The Setup menu is to setup the protection modes for each protection pair and ports.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E == = E1 / T1 Po r t P r ot e cti o n = = = 1 7 :4 2 :06 0 8/ 0 2/ 2 01 1
> > Se l ec t ? *S e t up S ta t us
On the Setup Screen, there are four selection for the user to setup such as disable, circuit,
line-non revertive line-revertive, 1+1 non revertive, and 1+1 revertive. The sample below is to
setup the port 2 of slot 9: 10 as LINE-NONREV protection and to setup the port 3 of slot 9: 10 as
1+1-NONREV protection. It means Slot 9 port 2 is protection working port and slot 10 port 2 as
backup in LINE-Non Revertive mode and Slot 9 port 3 is protection working port and slot 10 port
3 as backup in 1+1 Non Revertive mode.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = E 1/ T 1 P o rt Pro t e ct i on == = 16: 5 7 :5 4 0 8 /0 2 /2 0 1 1
= = = == = == = == = == = = == = === = = == = = == = == = = == = = = = == = == = == = = = == = === = = = == = == = == = =
Slot A :B ( F E1 : FE1 ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
Slot C :D ( : FOM ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
S l o t 1 : 2 ( Qu a d E1 : ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
Slot 3 :4 ( : ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
Slot 5 :6 ( : ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
Slot 7 :8 ( : ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
S l o t 9 : 1 0 ( Qu a d E1 : Qua d E 1) C IR C UI T L I N E- N ON R EV 1 + 1 N O NRE V D IS A BL E
S l o t 1 1: 1 2 ( : ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
P r o te c ti o n W or k i ng Por t P o rt 1 P or t 2 P or t 3 P o rt 4
Slot A :B ( F E1 : FE1 )
Slot C :D ( : FOM )
Slot 1 :2 ( Qu a d E1 : )
Slot 3 :4 ( : )
Slot 5 :6 ( : )
Slot 7 :8 ( : )
Slot 9 :10 ( Qu a d E1 : Qua d E 1) 9 -1 9 -2 9 -3
S l o t 1 1: 1 2 ( : )
I f pr o te c ti o n t y pe cha n g ed (e x : f ro m 1: 1 to 1 +1 ) , P le a se r e - s etu p ma p !
> > Ch a ng e c o nf i g ur a tio n (Y / N) ? ( N ot e : to sav e , pl e as e u s e V - co m man d )
Force Switch Configuration

The protection Setup must be set before the status setup.
Go to Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (Q) E1/T1 Port Protection, select Status and press
Enter.
The Status menu is to setup the ForceSwitch for each protection pair and ports.
CXR.
153
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = E 1/ T 1 P or t Pr o tec t i on == = 15 : 19: 1 5 0 8 /0 2 /2 0 11
> > Se l ec t ? Se t u p * S t at u s
The Status menu, it is to setup the force switch function to the assigned port of assigned protect
pair.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = E 1 /T 1 P or t P rot e c ti o n == = 1 7 : 00 : 0 0 08 / 02 / 20 11
= = = == = == = == = == = = == = === = = == = = == = == = = == = = = = == = == = == = = = == = === = = = == = == = == = =
Slot A :B ( F E1 : FE1 ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
Slot C :D ( : FOM ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
S l o t 1 : 2 ( Qu a d E1 : ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
Slot 3 :4 ( : ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
Slot 5 :6 ( : ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
Slot 7 :8 ( : ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
S l o t 9 : 1 0 ( Qu a d E1 : Qua d E 1) F or c eS w i tc h N O NO - -- - -- - -- - -
S l o t 1 1: 1 2 ( : ) - -- - -- - - -- - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - -- - --- - - - -- - -- - -- - -
P r o te c ti o n W or k i ng Por t P o rt 1 P or t 2 P or t 3 P o rt 4
Slot A :B ( F E1 : FE1 )
Slot C :D ( : FOM )
Slot 1 :2 ( Qu a d E1 : )
Slot 3 :4 ( : )
Slot 5 :6 ( : )
Slot 7 :8 ( : )
Slot 9 :10 ( Qu a d E1 : Qua d E 1) 9 -1 9 -2 9 -3
S l o t 1 1: 1 2 ( : )
Function Option Default

ForceSwitch NO, ForceSwitch NO
CXR.
154
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
9. APPENDIX D: QX3440 ALARM

TRAP INFORMATION
9.1. Trap definition

-- trap MIB
A chassis:
localTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE
VARIABLES { ccAlarmQueueString,
ccAlarmType,
ccAlarmModel,
ccAlarmSlot,
ccAlarmPort,
ccAlarmSeverity,
ccAlarmLink }
DESCRIPTION
"Local alarm trap"
::= 3
removeTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE
ccAlarmType,
ccAlarmModel,
ccAlarmSlot,
ccAlarmPort,
ccAlarmSeverity,
ccAlarmLink }
DESCRIPTION
"Local alarm trap remove"
::= 9
C chassis:
localTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE-C
ccAlarmType,
ccAlarmModel,
ccAlarmSlot,
CXR.
155
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
ccAlarmPort,
ccAlarmSeverity,
ccAlarmLink }
DESCRIPTION
"Local alarm trap"
::= 3
ENTERPRISE QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE-C
ccAlarmType,
ccAlarmModel,
ccAlarmSlot,
ccAlarmPort,
ccAlarmSeverity,
ccAlarmLink }
DESCRIPTION
::= 9
D chassis:
localTrap TRAP-TYPE
ENTERPRISE QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE-D
ccAlarmType,
ccAlarmModel,
ccAlarmSlot,
ccAlarmPort,
ccAlarmSeverity,
ccAlarmLink }
DESCRIPTION
"Local alarm trap"
::= 3
ENTERPRISE QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE-D
ccAlarmType,
ccAlarmModel,
ccAlarmSlot,
ccAlarmPort,
ccAlarmSeverity,
ccAlarmLink }
DESCRIPTION
::= 9
CXR.
156
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
9.2. ccAlarmModel: Plug-in card model

type
Number Plug-in card Type Plug-in card Type Description
0 fe1 1-channel E1
1 ft1 1-channel T1
2 rs232-8 8-channel RS232 with X.50 subrate
3 oct-rt-b 8-LAN-port/ 64-WAN-port Router-B
4 v35 6-channel V.35
5 x50 5-channel RS232 with X.50 subrate
6 dtu-6 6-channel U
7 dtu-10 10-channel U
8 mdsl 3-channel MDSL
9 ls-optical 1-channel and 4-channel low speed optical (C37.94)
10 em 8-channel 2W/4W E&M
11 fxs 12-channel and 24-channel FXS
12 router 32 WAN port Router
13 fxo 12-channel and 24-channel FXO
14 afr-e1 1-channel E1 ATM/Frame Relay (discontinued)
15 afr-t1 1-channel T1 ATM/Frame Relay (discontinued)
16 magneto 12-channel Magneto
17 ocudp 8-channel OCU-DP
18 quad-e1 4-channel E1
19 quad-t1 4-channel T1
21 mdsl-a 3-channel MDSL-A
22 v35-a 6-channel V.35-A
23 gshdsl-4 4-channel G.SHDSL (1 pair) w/o line power
24 gshdsl-2 2-channel G.SHDSL (2 pairs) w/o line power
25 g703 8-channel G.703 card at 64 Kbps data rate
26 mquad-e1 Mini Quad E1
27 mquad-t1 Mini Quad T1
28 dry-contact 8-channel Dry Contact I/O
29 fom Fiber optical interface
30 router-a 64 WAN port Router-A
32 controller Controller
37 conference Conference card
38 octDte 8-channel DTEA
39 tri-e1 3-channel E1
40 tri-t1 3-channel T1 (future option)
41 m4te Mini Quad T1/E1 plug-in card
42 sdte Single port DTE for 4200
43 tdmoe TDMoE
44 8DBRA 8-channel Data Bridge Card
45 socudp 1-channel OCU-DP
46 rs232 1-Channel RS232 card
48 rs232a 6-channel RS232 card
50 tta Transfer Trip card
51 dte6 6UDTEA
52 cda6 6CDA
91 x21-a 6-channel X.21-A
92 v36-a 6-channel V.36-A
CXR.
157
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
93 rs422-a 6-channel RS422-A

94 eia530-rs449-a 6-channel EIA530-A/RS449-A
99 unknown Unknown plug-in card type
9.3. ccAlarmSlot: Slot index

Number Slot Number
1 Slot A
2 Slot B
3 Slot C
4 Slot D
5 Slot 1
6 Slot 2
7 Slot 3
8 Slot 4
9 Slot 5
10 Slot 6
11 Slot 7
12 Slot 8
13 Slot 9
14 Slot 10
15 Slot 11
16 Slot 12
9.4. ccAlarmPort: Port index

Number Port Number
1 Port 1
2 Port 2
3 Port 3
4 Port 4
5 Port 5
6 Port 6
7 Port 7
8 Port 8
9 Port 9
10 Port 10
11 Port 11
12 Port 12
CXR.
158
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
9.5. ccAlarmType: Controller alarm

Number Alarm type
0 alarm-cut-off
1 slot-no-work
2 slot-start
3 slot-clock-loss
4 primary-start
5 redundant-loss
6 backup-switch
7 power-fail
8 redundant-chksum-error
9 fan-fail
10 map-switch
11 link-protection
12 redundant-insert
13 redundant-unsync
14 redundant-to-primary
15 plug-in card-type-mismatch
16 link-id-mismatch
17 power-consumption-alarm
18 ssm clock switch
19 management alarm
103 master-clock-loss
104 second-clock-loss
105 redundant-ext-clock-loss
106 qe1t1-1for1-switch
111 ds0-sncp-switch
112 dbra-protection-alarm
113 ring-id-fail-alarm
116 card-sn-mismatch-alarm
117 too-many-rtab-card
121 sntp-alarm
131 externalAlarm
140 pw-arp-alarm
141 pw-rx-los-alarm
142 pw-los-of-bundle-alarm
143 pw-underrun-alarm
144 pw-overrun-alarm
145 pw-lbit-alarm
146 pw-rbit-alarm
147 pw-synce-clock-alarm
148 pw-ip-conflict-alarm
149 ctrl-port-link-alarm
CXR.
159
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
9.6. ccAlarmType: Unit alarm

ccAlarmType for unit alarm has two formats: Vendor Spec and Assigned. Vendor Spec is the
original format that displays only the alarm number. Assigned is the new format that displays the
alarm type description. Select the format in V1: Trap Setup ( Command Path: Controller Menu>
(S) System Setup >(S)SNMP Setup >(B)V1: Trap Setup). The alarm type on the SNMP screen
will show in the format that you choose.
NOTES: E&M, FXO, FXS and TS card do not have alarms, so there is no alarm type to these cards.
For RS232 and EIA530, please refer to DTE-A alarm type table.
E1 Card
Vendor Spec Assigned Alarm type
21 e1-rai(201) RAI
22 e1-ais(202) AIS
23 e1-los(203) LOS
24 e1-lof(204) LOF
25 e1-bpv(205) BPV
26 e1-es (206) ES
27 e1-uas(207) UAS
28 e1-css(208) CSS
29 ais-ins (209) AIS-INSERT
30 e1-tcpa (210) TCPA
T1 Card
21 t1-yel(221) YEL
22 t1-ais(222) AIS
23 t1-los(223) LOS
24 t1-lof(224) LOF
25 t1-bpv(225) BPV
26 t1-es (226) ES
27 t1-uas(227) UAS
28 t1-css(228) CSS
29 t1-ais-ins(229) AIS-INSERT
30 t1-tcpa(230) TCPA
DTE-A (V.35/X.21/V.36/..) / 5RS232 (5X50) Card

20 dte-unsync(501) UNSYNC
8DBRA Card
20 dbra-protection-alarm(112) DBRA protection alarm
8RS232 (8X50) Card

20 x50-unsync(502) UNSYNC
20 dte-ext-clk-loss(511) EXT-CLK-LOSS
21 dte-rts-loss(512) RTS-LOSS
22 dte-remote-alarm(513) REMOTE-ALARM
CXR.
160
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
V.110 Card
20 dte-ext-clk-loss(511) EXT-CLK-LOSS
21 dte-rts-loss(512) RTS-LOSS
22 dte-remote-alarm(513) REMOTE-ALARM
MDSL Card
20 mdsl-master-los(361) LOS,MASTER-LOOP
21 mdsl-slave-los(362) LOS,SLAVE-LOOP
22 mdsl-master-es-15m(363) ES15M,MASTER-LOOP
23 mdsl-slave-es-15m(364) ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP
24 mdsl-master-ses-15m(365) SES15M,MASTER-LOOP
25 mdsl-slave-ses-15m(366) SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP
26 mdsl-master-es-24h(367) ES24H,MASTER-LOOP
27 mdsl-slave-es-24h(368) ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP
28 mdsl-master-ses-24h(369) SES24H,MASTER-LOOP
29 mdsl-slave-ses-24h(370) SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP
30 mdsl-mclk-loss(371) MCLK LOSS
31 mdsl-sealing-current(372) SEALING CURRENT
QE1/Mini QE1
20 e1-rai(201) RAI
21 e1-ais(202) AIS
22 e1-los(203) LOS
23 e1-lof(204) LOF
24 e1-bpv(205) BPV
25 e1-es (206) ES
26 e1-uas(207) UAS
27 e1-css(208) CSS
28 TCPA(210) TCPA
QT1/Mini QT1 Card

20 t1-yel(221) YEL
21 t1-ais(222) AIS
22 t1-los(223) LOS
23 t1-lof(224) LOF
24 t1-bpv(225) BPV
25 t1-es (226) ES
26 t1-uas(227) UAS
27 t1-css(228) CSS
28 t1-ais-ins(229) AIS-INS
29 t1-tcpa(230) TCPA
3E1
20 e1-rai(201) RAI
21 e1-ais(202) AIS
22 e1-los(203) LOS
23 e1-lof(204) LOF
24 e1-bpv(205) BPV
25 e1-es (206) ES
26 e1-uas(207) UAS
27 e1-css(208) CSS
28 ais-ins(209) AIS-INSERT
CXR.
161
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
G.703 Card
20 g703-los(541) LOS
G.shdsl Card
20 gshdsl-htuc-los-loop1(301) LOS,MASTER-LOOP1
21 gshdsl-htuc-los-loop2(302) LOS,MASTER-LOOP2
22 gshdsl-htur-los-loop1(303) LOS,SLAVE-LOOP1
23 gshdsl-htur-los-loop2(304) LOS,SLAVE-LOOP2
24 gshdsl-htuc-e1t1-los-lof(305) LOS/LOF,MASTER-E1
25 gshdsl-htur-e1t1-los-lof(306) LOS/LOF,SLAVE-E1
26 gshdsl-htuc-es-15m-loop1(307) ES15M,MASTER-LOOP1
27 gshdsl-htuc-es-15m-loop2(308) ES15M,MASTER-LOOP2
28 gshdsl-htur-es-15m-loop1(309) ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1
29 gshdsl-htur-es-15m-loop2(310) ES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2
30 gshdsl-htuc-e1t1-es-15m(311) ES15M,MASTER-E1
31 gshdsl-htur-e1t1-es-15m(312) ES15M,SLAVE-E1
32 gshdsl-htuc-ses-15m-loop1(313) SES15M,MASTER-LOOP1
33 gshdsl-htuc-ses-15m-loop2(314) SES15M,MASTER-LOOP2
34 gshdsl-htur-ses-15m-loop1(315) SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP1
35 gshdsl-htur-ses-15m-loop2(316) SES15M,SLAVE-LOOP2
36 gshdsl-htuc-e1t1-ses-15m(317) SES15M,MASTER-E1
37 gshdsl-htur-e1t1-ses-15m(318) SES15M,SLAVE-E1
38 gshdsl-htuc-es-24h-loop1(319) ES24H,MASTER-LOOP1
39 gshdsl-htuc-es-24h-loop2(320) ES24H,MASTER-LOOP2
40 gshdsl-htur-es-24h-loop1(321) ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1
41 gshdsl-htur-es-24h-loop2(322) ES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2
42 gshdsl-htuc-e1t1-es-24h(323) ES24H,MASTER-E1
43 gshdsl-htur-e1t1-es-24h(324) ES24H,SLAVE-E1
44 gshdsl-htuc-ses-24h-loop1(325) SES24H,MASTER-LOOP1
45 gshdsl-htuc-ses-24h-loop2(326) SES24H,MASTER-LOOP2
46 gshdsl-htur-ses-24h-loop1(327) SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP1
47 gshdsl-htur-ses-24h-loop2(328) SES24H,SLAVE-LOOP2
48 gshdsl-htuc-e1t1-ses-24h(329) SES24H,MASTER-E1
49 gshdsl-htur-e1t1-ses-24h(330) SES24H,SLAVE-E1
50 gshdsl-sealing-current(331) SEALING CURRENT
51 gshdsl-mclk-loss(332) MCLK LOSS
52 gshdsl-htuc-dte-rts(333) RTS,MASTER-DTE
53 gshdsl-htur-dte-rts(334) RTS,SLAVE-DTE
54 gshdsl-htuc-dte-extclk(335) EXTCLK,MASTER-DTE
55 gshdsl-htur-dte-extclk(336) EXTCLK,SLAVE-DTE
56 gshdsl-dying-gasp-alarm(337) DYING GASP ALARM
57 gshdsl-loop-attenu-alarm(338) LOOP ATTENU ALARM
58 gshdsl-low-noise-margin(339) LOW NOISE MARGIN
59 gshdsl-htur-link-down(340) HTUR LINK DOWN
FOM Card/1FOM-A Card

20 fom-opt-local-lof (601) LOF,LOCAL-OPTICAL
21 fom-opt-local-los (602) LOS,LOCAL-OPTICAL
22 fom-opt-local-rai (603) RAI,LOCAL-OPTICAL
23 fom-opt-remote-lof(604) LOF,REMOTE-OPTICAL
24 fom-opt-remote-los(605) LOS,REMOTE-OPTICAL
25 fom-opt-local-es (606) ES, LOCAL-OPTICAL
26 fom-opt-local-ses (607) SES, LOCAL-OPTICAL
CXR.
162
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
27 fom-opt-local-uas (608) UAS, LOCAL-OPTICAL

36 fom-e1-local-lof (617) LOF, LOCAL-E1
37 fom-e1-remote-lof (618) LOF, REMOTE-E1
38 fom-e1-local-es (619) ES, LOCAL-E1
39 fom-e1-local-ses (620) SES, LOCAL-E1
40 fom-e1-local-uas (621) UAS, LOCAL-E1
41 fom-e1-local-bpv (622) BPV, LOCAL-E1
C37.94 Card
20 lso-los(441) LOS
21 lso-yel(442) YEL
22 lso-es (443) ES
23 lso-ses(444) SES
24 lso-uas(445) UAS
Dry Contact/ Dry Contact-B

20 dc-n1-p1(701) Input port 1, pair 1
21 dc-n1-p2(702 Input port 1, pair 2
OCU DP Card
20 ocudp-los(461) LOS
21 ocudp-oos(462) OOS
24 ocudp-es (465) ES
25 ocudp-ses(466) SES
26 ocudp-uas(467) UAS
27 ocudp-loopbk(468) LOOPBK
28 ocudp-test(469) TEST
29 ocudp-lof(470) LOF
RT-A Card
20 lan1-link-down(401) LAN1-LINK DOWN
RT-B Card
CXR.
163
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
TDMoE Card
20 tdmoe-arp-lost(1001) ARP_LOST
21 tdmoe-rx-lost(1002) RX_LOST
22 tdmoe-cell-lost(1003) CELL_LOST
23 tdmoe-jit-buf-underrun(1004) UNDERRUN
24 tdmoe-jit-buf-overrun(1005) OVERRUN
25 tdmoe-eth1-link-down(1006) ETH1_LINK_DOWN
29 tdmoe-sfp1-tx-power-high(1010) SFP1 Transmit Power High
30 tdmoe-sfp2-tx-power-high(1011) SFP2 Transmit Power High
31 tdmoe-sfp1-tx-power-low(1012) SFP1 Transmit Power Low
32 tdmoe-sfp2-tx-power-low(1013) SFP2 Transmit Power Low
33 tdmoe-sfp1-rx-power-high(1014) SFP1 Receive Power High
34 tdmoe-sfp2-rx-power-high(1015) SFP2 Receive Power High
35 tdmoe-sfp1-rx-power-low(1016) SFP1 Receive Power Low
36 tdmoe-sfp2-rx-power-low(1017) SFP2 Receive Power Low
37 tdmoe-sfp1-tx-bias-high(1018) SFP1 Transmit Bias High
38 tdmoe-sfp2-tx-bias-high(1019) SFP2 Transmit Bias High
39 tdmoe-sfp1-tx-bias-low(1020) SFP1 Transmit Bias Low
40 tdmoe-sfp2-tx-bias-low(1021) SFP2 Transmit Bias Low
41 tdmoe-bp-pri-hb-lost(1022) Primary Heart Beating Lost
42 tdmoe-bp-sec-hb-lost(1023) Secondary Heart Beating Lost
43 tdmoe-bp-bundle-sw-to-pri(1024) Bundle Switch to Primary
44 tdmoe-bp-bundle-sw-to-sec(1025) Bundle Switch to Secondary
45 tdmoe-bundle-l-bit(1026) Bundle L-BIT
46 tdmoe-bundle-r-bit(1027) Bundle R-BIT
8UDTEA Card
Oversampling Mode
20 rts-loss(521) RTS_ LOSS
Terminal Server Mode

20 term-conn(525) Terminal Connect
21 term-disconn(526) Terminal Disconnect
Through Clock Mode

20 lolc(522) Loss of Line Clock
21 loch(523) Loss of Channel
22 cre(524) Clock Receiver Error
CXR.
164
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
9.7. Alarm Setup Indication

Access (M) System Alarm Setup from the VT100 main menu to activate the alarm actions listed
below.
Model = 32 (controller) for all CTRL alarm. (Please refer to Page 157 Plug-in card model type)
Slot: N=A~D, 1~12, 0(none), 99=external. R=103 (ctrl1-external), 104 (ctrl2-external).
Port: M=1~12, 254 (none)
Alarm Setup Alarm Action for (type/slot/port) Type Slot Port Notes
Alarm Cut Off Alarm cut off 0 0 254 No relay
Slot Inactive Slot N inactive 1 N 254 A1
Slot Start-up Slot N startup 2 N 254 C1

Slot N (P M) clock loss N M
3
External clock loss 99 254
Master Clock (Slot N P M) Loss 103 N M
Clock Loss Second Clock (Slot N P M) Loss 104 N M
A4/C4
CTRL1/2 EXT clock loss 105 R 254
CTRL1/2 redundant EXT clock loss 105 R 254
SSM switch to Slot N (P M) N M
18
SSM switch to Internal 0 254
Link switch to 6 254 Backup
Link switch to 6 M QE1 1:1
Link switch to 106 M QE1 1:1
Link Switch N
Protection on 11 M PDH SPRing
DS0-SNCP switch to 11 0iiijjjj(b) i=port, j=ts
DS0-SNCP switch to 111 0iiijjjj(b) i=port, j=ts
Map Switch Map switch to 10 0 M m=1-4
Power fail alarm 7
A3/C3
Power Alarm Fan fail alarm 9 0 254
Power consumption 17
Card type mismatch 15 254
Type Mismatch N
Link ID mismatch 16 M
Primary start 4
Redundant loss 5 A2
Redundant checksum error 8
Dual-CPU Alarm 0 254
Redundant insert 12 C2
Redundant unsync 13
Redundant to primary 14
Log-in/out 19 P
Management Alarm 0 No relay
SNTP server X fail/ok 121 X
CXR.
165
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Alarm Setup Alarm Action for (type/slot/port) Type Slot Port Notes
SNMP LINK DOWN 149 0 254
NOTE: An/Cn: Cn will clear alarm relay for An.
CXR.
166
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
10. APPENDIX E: SETTING UP AN

QX3440 PDH SHARED
PROTECTION RING
10.1. Overview
A PDH Shared Protection Ring can be an ideal solution for voice and data transmission networks,
in that, if any one E1 connection is broken, the voice and data communication system will still
function. This protection is made possible by mapping a loopback to where the channel came
from.
In a PDH Shared Protection Ring, each line is split in two directions. The working line (outside line
in the diagram below) travels in a counter-clockwise direction. The protection line (inside line)
travels in a clockwise direction.
While the is no theoretical limit to the number of nodes in a ring, each node needs 2-3 seconds to
stabilize SSM clock switching after a break occurs. In our sample diagram below we have used
five nodes.
NOTE: ULSR ring does not support E1 unframed mode. Users must use E1 frame mode to set up
a ULSR ring.
CXR.
167
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
E1
HDLC Router
Port A
TS31
4E1
TS1-30 TS1-30
Management PC
MASTER HDLC Inband
Inband Mamnagement is set up by
assigning1 DS0 (64K) for inband
Port B Port C
management purposes on the TSl
4E1 4E1 timeslot map of each QX3440 unit.
TS1-31
Clk: A/Internal TS1-31 TS1-31
TS1-2 HDLC
Port C TS3-4
Port A Port B Port D
TS27
4E1 4E1 4E1 4E1
TS30
TS5-31 TS1-31 TS1-31

Clk: A/B Clk: A/B
SLAVE #1
TS1-12 SLAVE #4
TS17-31
TS27
Port D Port B Port A TS15-16
Port C
4E1 HDLC
TS30 4E1 4E1 TS13-14
4E1
TS5-6 HDLC
Port C TS7-8
Port A Port B TS28 Port D
4E1 4E1 4E1 4E1
TS29
TS1-4 TS1-31
TS1-31
TS9-31
Clk: A/B Clk: A/B TS1-8 SLAVE #3
SLAVE #2 TS13-31
TS28
Port D Port B Port A TS11-12 Port C
4E1 HDLC
TS29 4E1 4E1 TS9-10 4E1
10.2. Setup Instructions

1. Nodes
Set up four nodes, each of which consists of a QX3440 device equipped with four Mini-Quad E1
cards (or alternatively four E1 Fiber Optical Module). Each of these nodes will be referred to as
Slaves.
2. Master Unit
Set up a Master unit, which consists of a QX3440 device equipped with three Quad E1 cards (or
alternatively, three Mini-quad E1 cards or three E1 FOM (Fiber Optical Module) cards, and a
single Router card.
CXR.
168
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
3. VT-100
Each QX3440 can be set up individually using a VT-100 monitor.
4. Clocks
The clocks must be set up on each of the QX3440 units. If you have no SSM source at the
MASTER unit, set the clock for this unit at NORMAL. SLAVE units must have their clock set at
SSM.
QX3440-CCPB === Clock Source Setup (Normal Mode) ===14:48:01 01/28/2021
Master_Clk Source : INTERNAL

Second_Clk Source : INTERNAL
Current Clock : MASTER_CLK
The clocks on the SLAVE units will be set up as shown in the screen below.
QX3440-CCPB === Clock Source Setup (SSM Mode) === 14:50:07 01/28/2021
First Clock Source : INTERNAL (Static SSM)

Second Clock Source : INTERNAL (Static SSM)
SSM Send (hex) : B
SSM Hold Time(sec) : 00

Internal Clock SSM Message: B [Clock Status]
Line Clock SSM Message: B Clock Hold-Over : OFF
Hold-Over State : Normal
Frame Pulse Period: 8000.00
5. FDL (Facilities Data Link) / HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control)
On the Port System Setup screen, set the FDL/HDLC to SSM for all ports in the ring (ie. Slave unit
ports and Master unit ports). This setting is highlighted on the sample setup screen below.
SLOT 7 Quad E1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 14:52:53 01/28/2021
FRAME = ON
CODE = HDB3
CRC = ON
RAI = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
FDL/HDLC = SSM
FDL Sabit = Sa4
SSM Sabit = Sa6
IDLE = D5
Protected = CIRCUIT
Master = MASTER
CXR.
169
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
INTF = 120 Ohm
Warning!! If you need to change FRAME and CAS.

Please disable protection and clear TSI MAP(MAP1~4) of this port.
6. TSI Function
The TSI function for all the QX3440 devices must be set at 1: N (Multicast).
This setting is highlighted on the sample setup screen below.

[System]
Time/Date : 15:00:09 01/28/2021_
[Network]
Mode: BRIDGE Eth port BPDU: ENABLE
WAN: ON HDLC 00000001
Gateway Interface: Gateway IPAddr: 192.168.001.254
[CONSOLE port]
Baud Rate : 9600
Stop Bit : 1-Bit
Parity : NONE
XON_XOFF : XOFF
[TSI map]
TSI Function : 1:N(Multicast) Clock Mode : Normal
7. Map Setup
You must do your mapping for the Master Unit. This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The
source port is Slot1, Port 3 and the target port is Slot1, port 1.

XCtype: 1:N Target QuadE1 NON-CAS Source QuadE1 NON-CAS
Target P/T D SL/PO/TS P/T D SL/PO/TS P/T D SL/PO/TS P/T D SL/PO/TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18
1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19 3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20 3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20
T.S.# : 31 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24 3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24
1 9 d 1 3 9 1 25 d 1 3 25 3 9 d 1 2 9 3 25 d 1 2 25
Source 1 10 d 1 3 10 1 26 d 1 3 26 3 10 d 1 2 10 3 26 d 1 2 26
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11 1 27 d 1 3 27 3 11 d 1 2 11 3 27 d 1 2 27
Port : P3 1 12 d 1 3 12 1 28 d 1 3 28 3 12 d 1 2 12 3 28 d 1 2 28
T.S. : 01 1 13 d 1 3 13 1 29 d 1 3 29 3 13 d 1 2 13 3 29 d 1 2 29
1 14 d 1 3 14 1 30 d 1 3 30 3 14 d 1 2 14 3 30 d 1 2 30
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15 1 31 d 1 3 31 3 15 d 1 2 15 3 31 d 1 2 31
1 16 d 1 3 16 3 16 d 1 2 16
This is a sample TSI map for the master unit. The source port is slot 1port 1 and the target port is
slot 1 port 2.
CXR.
170
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

XCtype:1:1 Target Quad-E1 NON-CAS Source Quad-E1 NON-CAS
Target PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS PO/TS D SL/PO TS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P2 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
Circuit Info:2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19 1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20 1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 30 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
Clear : No 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d 1 1 24 1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
2 9 d 1 1 9 2 25 d 1 1 25 1 9 d 1 3 9 1 25 d 1 3 25
Source 2 10 d 1 1 10 2 26 d 1 1 26 1 10 d 1 3 10 1 26 d 1 3 26
Slot : 1 2 11 d 1 1 11 2 27 d 1 1 27 1 11 d 1 3 11 1 27 d 1 3 27
Port : P1 2 12 d 1 1 12 2 28 d 1 1 28 1 12 d 1 3 12 1 28 d 1 3 28
T.S. : 01 2 13 d 1 1 13 2 29 d 1 1 29 1 13 d 1 3 13 1 29 d 1 3 29
2 14 d 1 1 14 2 30 d 1 1 30 1 14 d 1 3 14 1 30 d 1 3 30
Confirm?Yes 2 15 d 1 1 15 2 31 d IB 1 1 15 d 1 3 15 1 31 d 1 3 31
2 16 d 1 1 16 1 16 d 1 3 16
This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port is slot 1 port 2 and the target port is
slot 1 port 3.

XCtype:1:1 Target Quad-E1 NON-CAS Source Quad-E1 NON-CAS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P3 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17
T.S. : 01 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18
Circuit Info:3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19 2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19
3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20 2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20
T.S.# : 31 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21
Clear : No 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22
d/v : d 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23
3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24 2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d 1 1 24
3 9 d 1 2 9 3 25 d 1 2 25 2 9 d 1 1 9 2 25 d 1 1 25
Source 3 10 d 1 2 10 3 26 d 1 2 26 2 10 d 1 1 10 2 26 d 1 1 26
Slot : 1 3 11 d 1 2 11 3 27 d 1 2 27 2 11 d 1 1 11 2 27 d 1 1 27
Port : P2 3 12 d 1 2 12 3 28 d 1 2 28 2 12 d 1 1 12 2 28 d 1 1 28
T.S. : 01 3 13 d 1 2 13 3 29 d 1 2 29 2 13 d 1 1 13 2 29 d 1 1 29
3 14 d 1 2 14 3 30 d 1 2 30 2 14 d 1 1 14 2 30 d 1 1 30
Confirm?Yes 3 15 d 1 2 15 3 31 d 1 2 31 2 15 d 1 1 15 2 31 d IB 1
3 16 d 1 2 16 2 16 d 1 1 16
CXR.
171
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. Note that this map sets up the HDLC Inband
Management mapping.

XCtype:1:1 Target In-Band Source Quad-E1 NON-CAS
Slot : IB ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d 1 1 31 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
Circuit Info: 1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 01 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
1 9 d 1 3 9 1 25 d 1 3 25
Source 1 10 d 1 3 10 1 26 d 1 3 26
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11 1 27 d 1 3 27
Port : P1 1 12 d 1 3 12 1 28 d 1 3 28
T.S. : 31 1 13 d 1 3 13 1 29 d 1 3 29
1 14 d 1 3 14 1 30 d 1 3 30
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15 1 31 d 1 3 31
1 16 d 1 3 16
8. Ring Enabling
From the Master Unit QX3440 Controller Setup screen press R to set up PDH Ring Protection.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Controller Setup === 15:13:59 01/28/2021
[SYSTEM] [MAP]
A -> System C -> TSI Map Setup
S -> SNMP Setup D -> Select a New TSI Map
B -> Password E -> Copy a TSI Map to Another
H -> TELNET/SSH/HTTP Setup F -> Clear a TSI Map
I -> Unit Init/Clear
[PROTECTION] [OTHER]
G -> Link Backup Function L -> Command Line
Q -> E1/T1 Port Protection N -> SNTP Setup
K -> DS0-SNCP Setup U -> SYSLOG Setup
R -> PDH Ring Protection
T -> PDH Ring Diagnostic V -> RADIUS Setup
The PDH Ring Protection screen will appear.
Under normal operating conditions, Alarm Filtering happens first due to alarm the system then
switches to "ring protection" mode. After that Switching Interval determines when to switch back
to normal.
CXR.
172
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === PDH Ring Protection === 15:14:51 01/28/2021

PDH Ring Protection: ENABLE Ring Station : SLAVE
Switching Interval : 005 Alarm Filtering: 030
Slot(Model) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
============== ======= ======= ======= =======
A ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
B ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
C ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
D ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
1 (Quad E1 ) ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE
2 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
3 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
4 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
5 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
6 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
7 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
8 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
9 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
10 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
11 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
12 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
You must now repeat steps 7 and 8 for each of the QX3440 Slave units in order to complete the
PDH Shared Protection Ring setup procedure.
CXR.
173
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
11. APPENDIX F: SETTING UP AN

QX3440 PDH SHARED
PROTECTION RING (T1)
11.1. Overview
A PDH Shared Protection Ring can be an ideal solution for voice and data transmission networks,
in that, if any one T1 connection is broken, the voice and data communication system will still
function. This protection is made possible by mapping a loopback to where the channel came
from.
In a PDH Shared Protection Ring, each line is split in two directions. The working line (outside line
in the diagram below) travels in a counterclockwise direction. The protection line (inside line)
travels in a clockwise direction.
While the is no theoretical limit to the number of nodes in a ring, each node needs 2-3 seconds to
stabilize SSM clock switching after a break occurs. In our sample diagram below we have used
five nodes.
CXR.
174
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
T1
HDLC Router
Port A
TS24
4T1
TS1-23 TS1-23
Management PC
MASTER HDLC Inband
Inband Mamnagement is set up by
assigning1 DS0 (64K) for inband
Port B Port C
management purposes on the TSl
4T1 4T1 timeslot map of each QX3440 unit.
TS1-24
Clk: A/Internal
TS1-2 HDLC
Port C TS3-4
Port A Port B Port D
TS20
4T1 4T1 4T1 4T1
TS5-24 TS1-24 TS1-24
SLAVE Clk: A/B Clk: A/B TS1-12

SLAVE
#1 TS17-24 #4
4T1 HDLC
TS23 4T1 4T1 TS13-14
4T1
TS5-6 HDLC
Port C TS7-8
Port A Port B TS21 Port D
4T1 4T1 4T1 4T1
TS1-4 TS1-24
TS1-24
TS9-24
Clk: A/B Clk: A/B SLAVE
SLAVE TS1-8
TS13-24 #3
#2
4T1 HDLC
TS22 4T1 4T1 TS9-10 4T1
11.2. Setup Instructions

1. Nodes
Set up four nodes, each of which consists of a QX3440 device equipped with four Quad T1 cards.
Each of these nodes will be referred to as Slaves.
2. Master Unit
Set up a Master unit, which consists of a QX3440 device equipped with three Quad T1 cards, and
a single Router card.
CXR.
175
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
3. VT-100
Each QX3440 can be set up individually using a VT-100 monitor.
4. Clocks
The clocks must be set up on each of the QX3440 units. If you have no SSM source at the
MASTER unit, set the clock for this unit at NORMAL. SLAVE units must have their clock set at
SSM.

Master_Clk Source : INTERNAL

Second_Clk Source : INTERNAL
The clocks on the SLAVE units will be set up as shown in the screen below.
QX3440-CCPB === Clock Source Setup (SSM Mode) === 17:23:51 01/29/2021
First Clock Source : SLOT_1 P1 (Static SSM)

Second Clock Source : SLOT_1 P2 (Static SSM)
Third Clock Source : NONE
SSM Hold Time(sec) : 00______
5. FDL (Facilities Data Link) / HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control)
On the Port System Setup screen, set the FDL must be set at FDL and FRAME (must be ESF &
T1.403) for all ports in the ring (ie. Slave unit ports and Master unit ports). This setting is
highlighted on the sample setup screen below.
SLOT 5 Quad T1 PORT 1 === Port System Setup === 17:29:11 01/29/2021
FRAME = ESF&T1.403
CODE = B8ZS
YEL = ON
AIS = FRAMED
CAS = OFF
SIGNALLING= TRANS
CGA = NORM
OOS = BUSY
INBAND = OFF
IDLE = FF
CXR.
176
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
INTF = LONG HAUL

LBO = 0 dB
FDL = FDL
Protected = DISABLE
Master = ****
6. TSI Function
The TSI function for all the QX3440 devices must be set at 1: N (Multicast).
This setting is highlighted on the sample setup screen below.

[System]
Time/Date : 17:37:55 01/29/2021_
[Network]
Mode: ROUTER Eth port BPDU:
WAN: ON 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 HDLC 00000001
[CONSOLE port]
Baud Rate : 9600
Stop Bit : 1-Bit
Parity : NONE
XON_XOFF : XOFF
[TSI map]
TSI Function : 1:N(Multicast) Clock Mode : Normal
7. Map Setup
You must do your mapping for the Master Unit. This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The
source port is Slot1, Port 3 and the target port is Slot1, port 1.

XCtype:1:1 Target Quad-T1 NON-CAS Source Quad-T1 NON-CAS
Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18
1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19 3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20 3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20
T.S.# : 24 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24 3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24
1 9 d 1 3 9 3 9 d 1 2 9
Source 1 10 d 1 3 10 3 10 d 1 2 10
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11 3 11 d 1 2 11
Port : P3 1 12 d 1 3 12 3 12 d 1 2 12
T.S. : 01 1 13 d 1 3 13 3 13 d 1 2 13
1 14 d 1 3 14 3 14 d 1 2 14
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15 3 15 d 1 2 15
1 16 d 1 3 16 3 16 d 1 2 16
CXR.
177
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port is slot 1 port 1 and the target port
is slot 1 port 2.

Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P2 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19 1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20 1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 23 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
Clear : No 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d IB 1 1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
2 9 d 1 1 9 1 9 d 1 3 9
Source 2 10 d 1 1 10 1 10 d 1 3 10
Slot : 1 2 11 d 1 1 11 1 11 d 1 3 11
Port : P1 2 12 d 1 1 12 1 12 d 1 3 12
T.S. : 01 2 13 d 1 1 13 1 13 d 1 3 13
2 14 d 1 1 14 1 14 d 1 3 14
Confirm?Yes 2 15 d 1 1 15 1 15 d 1 3 15
2 16 d 1 1 16 1 16 d 1 3 16
This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. The source port is slot 1 port 2 and the target port
is slot 1 port 3.

Slot : 1 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P3 3 1 d 1 2 1 3 17 d 1 2 17 2 1 d 1 1 1 2 17 d 1 1 17
T.S. : 01 3 2 d 1 2 2 3 18 d 1 2 18 2 2 d 1 1 2 2 18 d 1 1 18
3 3 d 1 2 3 3 19 d 1 2 19 2 3 d 1 1 3 2 19 d 1 1 19
3 4 d 1 2 4 3 20 d 1 2 20 2 4 d 1 1 4 2 20 d 1 1 20
T.S.# : 24 3 5 d 1 2 5 3 21 d 1 2 21 2 5 d 1 1 5 2 21 d 1 1 21
Clear : No 3 6 d 1 2 6 3 22 d 1 2 22 2 6 d 1 1 6 2 22 d 1 1 22
d/v : d 3 7 d 1 2 7 3 23 d 1 2 23 2 7 d 1 1 7 2 23 d 1 1 23
3 8 d 1 2 8 3 24 d 1 2 24 2 8 d 1 1 8 2 24 d IB 1
3 9 d 1 2 9 2 9 d 1 1 9
Source 3 10 d 1 2 10 2 10 d 1 1 10
Slot : 1 3 11 d 1 2 11 2 11 d 1 1 11
Port : P2 3 12 d 1 2 12 2 12 d 1 1 12
T.S. : 01 3 13 d 1 2 13 2 13 d 1 1 13
3 14 d 1 2 14 2 14 d 1 1 14
Confirm?Yes 3 15 d 1 2 15 2 15 d 1 1 15
3 16 d 1 2 16 2 16 d 1 1 16
This is a sample TSI map for the Master unit. Note that this map sets up the HDLC Inband
Management mapping.

XCtype:1:1 Target In-Band Source Quad-T1 NON-CAS
Slot : IB ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : 1 d 1 1 24 1 1 d 1 3 1 1 17 d 1 3 17
T.S. : 01 1 2 d 1 3 2 1 18 d 1 3 18
1 3 d 1 3 3 1 19 d 1 3 19
1 4 d 1 3 4 1 20 d 1 3 20
T.S.# : 01 1 5 d 1 3 5 1 21 d 1 3 21
CXR.
178
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Clear : No 1 6 d 1 3 6 1 22 d 1 3 22
d/v : d 1 7 d 1 3 7 1 23 d 1 3 23
1 8 d 1 3 8 1 24 d 1 3 24
1 9 d 1 3 9
Source 1 10 d 1 3 10
Slot : 1 1 11 d 1 3 11
Port : P1 1 12 d 1 3 12
T.S. : 24 1 13 d 1 3 13
1 14 d 1 3 14
Confirm?Yes 1 15 d 1 3 15
1 16 d 1 3 16
8. Ring Enabling
From the Master Unit QX3440 Controller Setup screen press R to set up PDH Ring Protection.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Controller Setup === 17:39:52 01/29/2021
[SYSTEM] [MAP]
A -> System C -> TSI Map Setup
S -> SNMP Setup D -> Select a New TSI Map
B -> Password E -> Copy a TSI Map to Another
H -> TELNET/SSH/HTTP Setup F -> Clear a TSI Map
I -> Unit Init/Clear
[PROTECTION] [OTHER]
G -> Link Backup Function L -> Command Line
Q -> E1/T1 Port Protection N -> SNTP Setup
K -> DS0-SNCP Setup U -> SYSLOG Setup
R -> PDH Ring Protection
T -> PDH Ring Diagnostic V -> RADIUS Setup
The PDH Ring Protection screen will appear.
Under normal operating conditions, Alarm Filtering happens first due to alarm the system then
switches to "ring protection" mode. After that Switching Interval determines when to switch back
to normal.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === PDH Ring Protection === 17:40:48 01/29/2021
PDH Ring Protection: ENABLE Ring Station : MASTER
Switching Interval : 005 Alarm Filtering: 030
Slot(Model) Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 Port 4
============== ======= ======= ======= =======
C ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
D ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
1 (Quad T1 ) ENABLE ENABLE DISABLE DISABLE
2 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
3 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
4 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
5 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
6 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
7 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
8 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
9 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
10 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
11 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
12 ( ) ------- ------- ------- -------
CXR.
179
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
12. APPENDIX G: 3E1/3T1

DS0-SNCP CIRCUIT LEVEL
PROTECTION SETUP
This chapter provides procedures for building a DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Ring with
QX3440 units and 3E1 cards.
NOTE: For the setup on QX3440-C, please refer to QX3440-C manual. For the 3T1 DS0-SNCP
circuit level protection setup, please refer to the 3T1 Interface Card manual.
12.1. Physical Requirements

The physical configuration of a DS0-SNCP circuit level protection ring should consist of at least
three QX3440 units, two of which serve as interconnected units and one as an intermediate unit.
The units are connected by E1 lines. To ensure link diversity, the east and west E1 line is
recommended to exit the same unit at the ports of different 3E1 card.
On each QX3440 unit there will be a primary path and a secondary path (detailed setup
procedure is described in the following section). Both primary and secondary paths are used to
protect either a data or voice interface.
Below is the detailed list for applicable interface for 3E1 protection:
Data Interface E1, T1, Mini Quad E1, Mini Quad T1, Router, FOM, TS, DTE, G.shdsl, dry contact,
C37.94, RS232
Voice Interface E&M, FXS, FXO, Magneto, QE&M, QFXS, QFXO
NOTES: A maximum of ninety-three DS0-SNCP circuit level protection rings can be set in QX3440
chassis (31 DS0x3).
The illustration below is a sample application of a DS0-SNCP circuit level protection ring, and also
the physical topology that corresponds to the setup procedure in the next section.
CXR.
180
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Interconnected Unit
Slot C
Protected Interface
(Voice or Data)
Slot 7 Slot 8
3E1/3T1 3E1/3T1
Port 2 Port 2
Port 1 Port 1
Device A
Primary Secondary
3E1/3T1
Slot 2
Port 1
Device C Intermediate Unit
3E1/3T1
Slot 3
Port 1
3E1/3T1 Device B 3E1/3T1
Port 1 Port 1
Port 2 Port 2
Slot 2 Protected Interface Slot 1

(Voice or Data)
Primary Secondary
Slot C
Interconnected Unit
Figure 12-1 Sample Application for 3E1/3T1 DS0-SNCP Circuit Level Protection Ring Setup
NOTE: The physical configuration of a DS0-SNCP circuit level protection ring should consist of at
least two interconnected units and one intermediate unit. The latter one is used to pass E1
signal only.
CXR.
181
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
12.2. Setup Procedures

Clock Setup
Press (K) from the Controller Menu to access Clock Source Setup. Choose a connected 3E1 port
as the master clock source and the other 3E1 port as the secondary clock source. When the
master clock source is lost, the clock source will automatically switch to the secondary. If the
secondary is also lost, the internal clock will take over.
The function of the Clock Holdover Mode is to use stored data to maintain clock accuracy when
the master clock loses its controlling input. In our example, Device A should be Internal clock, and
Device B and C should be in Clock Holdover Mode. The master clock source for device B is Slot
2, port 2, and for C device is Slot 3 port 1. Below is a setup sample for Device B.
Master_Clk Source : SLOT_2 P2

Second_Clk Source : SLOT_1 P2
Clk_Recover_Mode : AUTOMATIC
Clock Hold-Over : ON
Building Cross-Connections
First, build cross-connections for the interconnected units: Device A and Device B. For Device A,
follow the command path: Controller Menu> (S) System Setup > (K) DS0-SNCP setup. On the
screen of DS0-SNCP Setup, choose “ENABLE” for DS0-SNCP, and “Create” for Action. Then,
press ENTER for detailed configuration setup.
DS0-SNCP : ENABLE
Using Map: MAP_1
Action : Create
<< ESC key ignore and return, ENTER key accept change >>
On the screen of DS0-SNCP Creation, choose the protected interface by selecting the slot and
port where the desired interface locates. Then, key in the desired T.S (timeslot) and count (the
amount of the timeslot). The total timeslot number for the protected slot will show up in dot format
as [...............................], and the location of the alphabet “P” (protected) indicates
the timeslot number that is occupied by the currently working DS0-SNCP ring. Same procedures
should be used on setting up the primary and secondary timeslot on 3E1 cards. Note that the T.S
CXR.
182
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
for the primary and secondary slot should be the same. As the sample screen shows, the number
in the T.S column for primary and secondary are both “1”.
On the sample screen below, we choose E1 as the protected interface, port 1 of the 3E1 card in
slot 7 as primary, and port 1 of the 3E1 card in slot 8 as secondary. The total timeslot number is
31. The working (W) DS0-SNCP occupies timeslot 1 of both primary and secondary 3E1 cards.
The location of “P” (protected) and “W” (working) indicates the occupied timeslot number for the
DS0-SNCP circuit. To create more DS0-SNCP circuits on other timeslots, go to the TSI Map
Setup (command path: Main Menu > (S) System Setup > (C) TSI Map Setup) and choose other
timeslots for DS0-SNCP.
When alarms (LOS, LOF, and AIS.INS) occur in the primary slot, the working timeslot may switch
from the primary to the secondary slot. If you wish the system to switch the working timeslot from
secondary back to primary once the primary slot is repaired, select “revertible” for switch mode. If
not, choose “Non-revertible”.
After all setup procedures are done, select “Yes” to confirm with the settings. The same setup
procedure should be applied to Device B.
NOTE: P= Protected, W= Working, S= Standby
When the protected interface is a data card:
Below is a sample screen of DS0-SNCP setup with a protected data interface: E1 card. A
DS0-SNCP circuit is created on timeslot 1.

ARROW KEYS: CURSOR MOVE, TAB: ROLL OPTIONS

==============================================================================
Protected Slot: D (E1 ) [.P..............................]
Port: NON-CAS
T.S.:01
Count:01
Primary Slot: 7 (3E1 ) [.W..............................]

Secondary Slot: 8 (3E1 ) [.S..............................]


Data/Voice :Data
Confirm :Yes
If you create another DS0-SNCP circuit on timeslot 10 and press Yes to confirm, the screen will
show as below:


==============================================================================
Protected Slot: C (E1 ) [.P..............................]
Port: NON-CAS
T.S.:01
CXR.
183
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Count:01
Primary Slot: 7 (3E1 ) [.W.......W......................]

Secondary Slot: 8 (3E1 ) [.S........S.....................]


Data/Voice :Data
Confirm :Yes
When the protected interface is a voice card:
Below is a sample screen of DS0-SNCP setup with a protected voice interface: FXS card. A
DS0-SNCP circuit is created on timeslot 1. Note that for voice interface, the timeslot number
starts from timeslot 01, not timeslot 00.

==============================================================================
Protected Slot: 9 ( FXS ) [P...............................]
Port:P1
T.S.:01
Count:01
Primary Slot: 7 ( 3E1 ) [.W..............................]

Port:P1 CAS Protection Delay: 00
Secondary Slot: 8 ( 3E1 ) [.S..............................]


Data/Voice :Voice
Confirm :Yes
If you create another DS0-SNCP circuit on timeslot 02 and press Yes to confirm, the screen will
show as below:


==============================================================================
Protected Slot: 9 ( FXS ) [PP..............................]
Port:P2
T.S.:02
Count:01
Primary Slot: 7 ( 3E1 ) [.WW.............................]

Secondary Slot: 8 ( 3E1 ) [.SS.............................]


Data/Voice :Voice
Confirm :Yes
CXR.
184
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Second, build a bypass connection for the intermediate unit: Device C. Follow the command:
Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (C) TSI Map Setup. Access the TSI Map setup, select the
desired slot and port number for the mapping target. Next, select the starting timeslot number
(T.S) and the timeslot amount (T.S #), and data or voice mode (d/v) for the target. Also select the
desired slot, port and starting timeslot number (T.S) for the mapping source. After setup, select
“Yes” for confirmation.

XCtype:1:1 Target 3E1 NON-CAS Source 3E1 NON-CAS
Slot : 2 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d 3 1 1 17 d 1 1 d 2 1 1 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d
Circuit Info: 3 d 19 d 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
T.S.# : 01 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
Clear : No 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
Source 10 d 26 d 10 d 26 d
Slot : 3 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : P1 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 01 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
Confirm?Yes 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
To create another DS0-SNCP circuit on timeslot 10, go over the same procedure again and set
T.S. to “10”. Then, select “Yes” to confirm.

XCtype:1:1 Target 3E1 NON-CAS Source 3E1 NON-CAS
Slot : 2 ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ========== ===== ==========
Port : P1 1 1 d 3 1 1 17 d 1 1 d 2 1 1 17 d
T.S. : 10 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d
3 d 19 d 3 d 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
T.S.# : 01 5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
Clear : No 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
d/v : d 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d 25 d
Source 10 d 3 1 10 26 d 10 d 2 1 10 26 d
Slot : 3 11 d 27 d 11 d 27 d
Port : P1 12 d 28 d 12 d 28 d
T.S. : 10 13 d 29 d 13 d 29 d
14 d 30 d 14 d 30 d
Confirm?Yes 15 d 31 d 15 d 31 d
Then, go back to the previous layer and select “(D) Select a New TSI Map” for bypass activation.

Last activated TSI Map: MAP_1
Change to TSI Map : MAP_1
CXR.
185
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
[TSI Map] switch start hr/min

Map1 DISABLE 00:00
Map2 DISABLE 00:00
Map3 DISABLE 00:00
Map4 DISABLE 00:00
Use MAP1 only for DS0-ANCP application. On the “Select a New TSI map” screen, select Map 1
for TSI map.
NOTE: For DS0-SNCP setup, the map number should always be Map 1(default configuration).
Diagnosis
To diagnose the DS0-SNCP circuit level protection rings, access DS0-SNCP Setup through the
command path: main menu > (S) System Setup > (K) DS0 SNCP Setup. Select “Status” for
Action and press ENTER.

DS0-SNCP : ENABLE
Using Map: MAP_1
Action : Status
The following screen will show up. The index shows the currently built DS0-SNCP circuit and their
detailed information. You can use the commands listed at the bottom of the screen to make
diagnosis on each DS0-SNCP circuit.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === DS0-SNCP Information === 17:59:56 01/29/2021
DS0-SNCP : ENABLE Total DS0-SNCP: 2
Index Protected Primary Secondary d/v Mode

Slot Port TS Slot Port TS Slot Port TS
==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Non-revertible
2 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Non-revertible
ESC:return, SPACE:next page, D:delete, F:force switch, M:change mode

L:lock on working, P:lock on primary, S:lock on secondary, U:unlock
 ESC: Return to the previous page

 SPACE: Go to the next page for more DS0-SNCP information
Delete: Delete a DS0-SNCP ring from the index.
Press D on the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you to choose the
SNCP circuit you would like to delete. If you want to delete one circuit, key in the circuit’s index
number in both “from” and “to” columns as the example below. Then, press Enter and select Yes
for “confirm to do”.
CXR.
186
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

Delete Index From:1 To 1__ Confirm To Do? Yes
==============================================================================
The circuit you choose to delete will be cleared from the index:
==============================================================================
To delete the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether, key-in the first index
number in the “from” column, and the last index number in the “to” column. In the example below,
we key-in “Delete index from 1 to 2, which means to delete index 1 and 2 altogether. Then, press
Enter and select “Yes” for “confirm to do.”
Both SNCP circuits for index 1 and 2 will be cleared.

==============================================================================

L:lock on working, P:lock on primary, S:lock on secondary, U:unlock
NOTE: The by-pass XC in intermediate unit should be deleted.
Force Switch:
Switch the working timeslot between the primary (working) and the secondary (stand-by).
Press F on the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you which SNCP
circuit you would like to switch the working timeslot. Key-in the desired circuit’s index number.
Then, press ENTER and choose Yes for “Confirm to do”.

Force Switch (to Other) Index From:1 To 1 Confirm To Do? Yes
==============================================================================
CXR.
187
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
The working timeslot will then switch from the original one to the other. In the sample screen, the
original working timeslot for index 1 circuit is “Primary”. Once it has been force switched, the
working timeslot will switch to “Secondary”. The working timeslot is indicated by the “W” mark
beside the slot number.
==============================================================================
1 D 01 7 1 01 W8 1 01 D Non-revertible
To force switch the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether, key-in the first
index number in the “from” column, and the last index number in the “to” column.
Change Mode: Change the DS0-SNCP circuit level protection mode between revertible and
non-revertible
Press M on the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you which SNCP
circuit you would like to switch the mode. Key in the circuit’s index number and press Enter. Then,
select “Yes” for “Confirm to do”.

==============================================================================
The circuit you choose will switch from the original mode to the other (Non-revertible to revertible,
or vise versa). In the sample screen, the original mode for index 1 circuit is “Non-revertible”. After
we activate “Change Mode” for the circuit of index 1, its mode will change to Revertible.

==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D revertible
To change the mode of a continuous order of index number altogether, key-in the first index
number in the “from” column, and the last index number in the “to” column.
Lock on Working: Lock the data path on the working slot and port
Press L on the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you to select the
SNCP circuit which you would like to lock on its currently working timeslot. Key in the circuit’s
index number and press Enter. Then, select “Yes” for “Confirm to do”.
The working timeslot will then be locked and will not switch automatically. The locked circuit will
also change its mode to “Lock”.
CXR.
188
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

Force Lock on working - Index From:1 To 1 Confirm To Do? Yes
==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Lock
To activate “Lock on Working” on the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether,
key-in the first index number in the “from” column, and the last index number in the “to” column.
Lock on Primary: Lock the data path on the primary timeslot
Press P from the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you to select the
SNCP circuit which you would like to lock the primary timeslot as the working timeslot. Key in the
circuit’s index number and press Enter. Then, select “Yes” for “Confirm to do”.

==============================================================================
The working timeslot will then be locked in the primary slot and port, and will not switch
automatically. The locked circuit will also change its mode to “Lock”.

==============================================================================
1 D 01 W 7 1 01 8 1 01 D Lock
To activate “Lock on Primary” on the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether,
Lock on Secondary: Lock the data path on the secondary timeslot
Press S from the screen of DS0-SNCP information. A prompt message will ask you to select the
SNCP circuit which you would like to lock the secondary timeslot as the working timeslot. Key in
the circuit’s index number and press Enter. Then, select “Yes” for “Confirm to do”.

==============================================================================
CXR.
189
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
The working timeslot will then be locked on the secondary slot and port, and will not switch
automatically. The locked circuit will also change its mode to “lock”.

==============================================================================
1 D 01 7 1 01 W 8 1 01 D Lock
To activate “Lock on Primary” on the circuits with a continuous order of index number altogether,
Unlock: Unlock the locked timeslot
Bit Error Rate Test
BERT (Bit Error Rate Test) is used to diagnose channel connection with predetermined stress
patterns. You can use BERT at one end with a loopback at the remote end, or in pairs with one at
either end of a transmission link. The loopback test can be set by using hardware loopback or
software loopback (command path: 3E1 Unit Menu> (L) Unit Loopback Setup).
The example below shows the setup procedure of BERT at Device A with a loopback at Device B.
CXR.
190
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Device A
Interconnected Unit
Slot C
Protected Interface
(Data)
Slot 7 Slot 8
3E1 3E1
Port 2 Port 2
Port 1 Port 1
Primary Secondary
3E1 3E1
Port 1 Port 1
Port 2 Port 2
Slot 2 Protected Interface Slot 1

(Data)
Primary Secondary
Slot C
Device B
Interconnected Unit
BERT
Loopback Test
Figure 12-2 Application for BERT and Loopback Diagnosis
First, lock the data path between the E1 card (protected interface) of Device A to the E1 card
(protected interface) of Device B. On both devices, access DS0-SNCP setup and use the
command “Lock on Primary” to lock the data path. (Command Path: Controller Menu> (K)
DS0-SNCP Setup> Action: Status).
On Device A, lock the primary data path with the protected E1 card at slot C:
Force Lock on primary - Index From:1 To 1__ Confirm To Do? Yes

===================================================================
1 C 01 W 7 1 10 8 1 10 D Lock

On Device B, lock the primary data path with the protected E1 card at slot C:
CXR.
191
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

Force Lock on primary - Index From:1 To 1 Confirm To Do? Yes

===================================================================
1 C 01 W 2 2 01 1 2 01 D Lock

Second, access the 3E1 port menu of Device B. Choose (L) Unit Loopback Setup from the 3E1
port menu. Select “LOCAL” (local loopback) for Near-end Loopback and press ENTER.
SLOT 2 3-E1 PORT 1 === Port Loopback Test === 18:12:18 01/29/2021
ARROW KEYS : CURSOR MOVE , ENTER KEY : ITEM SELECT
- NEAR-END LOOPBACK : OFF *LOCAL PLB LLB
- SEND LOOPBACK ACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:

*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND LOOPBACK DEACTIVATE CODE TO FAR-END:
*PAYLOAD LINE
- SEND TEST PATTERN:
*OFF PRBS-FULL
- STATUS:
Third, go back to Device A and activate Bit Error Test. Follow the command path: Controller
Menu> (T) Bit Error Test to access BERT test. The function of each configuration is listed below.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === BERT Test === 18:13:39 01/29/2021

Test Slot : C ( FE1 )

Test Port : 01
Pattern Type : 2exp20-1
Split Mode : Send AIS
Test Channel : Mapped
Test Map : i1iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
Test Direct : To-MAP
User Pattern : 01011101
Period(sec) : 0000000
Test Enable : DISABLE
Test Slot/ Test Port: Select the protected slot and port for BERT diagnosis. Our example is to
use the E1 card of Device A as the interface that sends outgoing BERT pattern. Therefore, the
test slot should be the location of the E1 card: slot C. Then, choose port one as the test port for
the E1 card.
Pattern Type: The transmitted bit sequence that determines the BERT pattern. The options
include: 2exp9-1, 2exp11-1, 2exp15-1 and user def (user define). When set as user def, you’ll
have to set the User Pattern according to your need.
Split Mode: Choose to send BERT with or without AIS (Alarm Indication Signal).
CXR.
192
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Test Channel: Choose the timeslot that you want to use for BERT diagnosis. “Mapped” means
all the mapped timeslots. “Full” means all the timeslots. “Select” means to select the timeslot in
the following “Test Map” column.
Test Map: available for setup only when the user chooses “Select” for Test Channel. Move the
cursor to select the test channel. The screen will show the channel number you select.
Test Map : iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii CH :01
Test Direction: BERT direction that determines the testing path. Choose “To Line” to make
BERT goes straight from the testing timeslot to the selected interface. Choose “To Mapped” to
make BERT goes from the testing timeslot to the cross connect, than to the mapped interface.
Period: Period is the testing time duration for the BERT diagnosis. You can set up the testing time
limit (sec.) by yourself. The default rate is 000000 and will make the BERT diagnosis goes on
forever.
Test Enable: After you have set all the parameters mentioned above, choose “Enable” to
activate the BERT test. After you enable the BERT test, the system will show the current testing
status on the screen as below: You can also inject an error to the BERT pattern using the right
arrow key. If the sent out pattern is the same with the received pattern, the channel being
diagnosed is in normal condition.
Pattern: 2exp20-1 SYNC Elapsed Second: 77

Bit Error : 0 BER : 0.0
Error Seconds : 0 ESR : 0.0
SES : 0 SESR : 0.0 Pattern: 2exp20-1
SYNC
<< ESC KEY : EXIT, LEFT ARROW : RESET ERROR, RIGHT ARROW :INJECT AN ERROR >>
CXR.
193
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
13. APPENDIX G: FAE PACKAGE

13.1. FAE Support
FAE package provides detailed instructions for users to send information to FAE support when
they have any problems performing operation. Follow the two-step instructions as below:
1. Upload FAE package

2. Send file back to FAE support
Step 1. Upload FAE Package
The full menu path for upload FAE package is as follows:
O > Log on
W > Firmware Transfer
F > Upload FAE info
Enter TFTP server IP to upload information. A sample screen is shown as below. Config name
and FAE package name are fixed so please remember them or write them down.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Upload FAE package === 20:04:36 01/31/2019
TFTP Server IP : 000.000.000.000

Upload Config Name : FAE812.cfg
Upload FAE package : FAE812.pkg
A prompt message will ask you to confirm the uploading. Enter “YES” to continue.
QX3440-CCPB-2GE === Upload FAE package === 14:42:38 09/25/2017

TFTP Server IP : 192.168.56.17

Upload Config Name : FAE310315.cfg
Upload FAE package : FAE310315.pkg
14:42:58 09/25/17 Prepare config data for upload.....

14:43:00 09/25/17 Uploading Config file Sent 332 Blocks[15;53HSent 1
84 Blocks 14:43:02 09/25/17 Prepare data for upload.....
14:43:26 09/25/17 Uploading FAE package Sent 312 Blocks[17;53HSent 1
84 Blocks
<< Press ESC key to continue >>
CXR.
194
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Step 2. Send File to CXR Support
At last, users need to send the two FAE package files (*.cfg & *.pkg) back to CXR support. The
engineer will analyze the data first to find out the problem and fix it.
13.2. Activate iNET LCT/8UDTE/PDH Ring

To activate iNET LCT, 8UDTE, or PDH Ring function, follow the three-step instructions as below:
1. Inform CXR for your hardware info.

2. You will receive licence file from CXR.
3. Activate the license.
Step 1. Inform CXR for your hardware info.
O > Log on
S > System Setup
L > Command Line
Key in hwinfo disp SLOT then press ENTER, the system will show the info you need. Copy and
paste the info shown and send to CXR representatives.
Table 13-1 Hardware Info Display Commands

Commands Description
hwinfo disp <SLOT> Display <SLOT> hardware info.
Pri PRIMARY (CONTROLLER)
Red REDUNDANT (CONTROLLER)
A~D & SLOT A~D & 1~12
1~12
NOTE: The argument in < > should be substituted for the available slot.
A sample screen is as below:

1 5 : 43 : 14 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >>h w i nf o d i sp pr i
D i s pl a y s lo t P R I ( C ONT R O LL E R) HW in f o ( i n J S O N f or m at )
P l e as e c o py be l o w i nfo a nd pa s te on t ex t fi l e :
{
" pi d ": 34 4 8
" ci d ": 1
" wE x p" : " 2 01 5 - 02 - 24"
" hw l is t ": [
{
"h w sn " : " 3 14 7 58"
"h w ve r ": " Ve r .J"
}
]
}
A b o ve da t a f or H W i nfo e xp o rt .
1 5 : 43 : 19 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >>h w i nf o d i sp re d
D i s pl a y s lo t R E D ( C ONT R O LL E R) HW in f o ( i n J S O N f or m at )
{
" pi d ": 34 4 8
" ci d ": 1
" wE x p" : " "
CXR.
195
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
" hw l is t ": [
{
"h w sn " : " 0 "
"h w ve r ": " Ve r .A"
}
]
}
1 5 : 43 : 52 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >>h w i nf o d i sp 8
D i s pl a y s lo t 8 ( 8 U DTE ) H W i nf o ( i n J S ON f o rm a t)
{
" pi d ": 34 4 8
" ci d ": 54
" wE x p" : " 2 01 5 - 04 - 21"
" hw l is t ": [
{
"h w sn " : " 3 74 4 3"
"h w ve r ": " Ve r .B"
}
]
}
Or you can: Key in hwinfo upload SLOT then press ENTER. To upload hardware info via TFTP.
Table 13-2 Hardware Info Upload Commands

Commands Description
hwinfo <SLOT> Upload <SLOT> hardware info.
upload Pri PRIMARY (CONTROLLER)
Red REDUNDANT (CONTROLLER)
A~D & SLOT A~D & 1~12
1~12
NOTE: The argument in < > should be substituted for the available slot.
A sample screen is as below:
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = == Up l oa d HW Inf o == = 1 6: 0 6:1 4 04 / 17 / 20 1 7
U p l oa d s l ot PR I (C O NTR O L LE R ) H W i nf o (i n JS O N f o rm a t)
T F T P S er v er IP : 1 92 . 16 8 .1 1 .5 _ _ _
T F T P S er v er IP : H WI N FO - 31 4 75 8 . ur g
Step 2. You will receive license file from CXR.
After CXR receives your requirement as well as hardware info correctly, you will soon receive
license file from CXR.
CXR.
196
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Step 3. Activate the license.
Follow below steps to activate the function you purchase.
O > Log on
S > System Setup
L > Command Line
Key in falicense import then press ENTER, the system will ask you to copy from license file and
paste.
A successful activation screen example is as below:
1 6 : 33 : 31 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >>f a l ic e ns e i m po r t
P l e as e c o py fr o m l i cen s e f i le an d p a s te bel o w : ( EN T ER ac c e pt , ES C br e ak )
3 J F X2 B IF G JY F FG F 4 PB I XHZ V I 5F W SB L 3U 5 4X W A RC A TDN 7 3 HJ O CN M CF S L5 5 L FA C XSJ 2 L 4I 3 SQ W 2K X TZ 2 G E
Q 6 5 PZ I 6U K BW B 3H N 5 6K T OFM A W 6P K L3 P UG I 34 D E IB Z G2G Z M SU F SX I 5Y U NH 7 C SM 5 G6Z A W 35 I 3O D XZ I GS E K C
6 G O RZ Y FV F AM 3 F5 X 4 ME X 4JF Q H 3K A MS O BS K LB Z K LZ V TFW X B D5 U VR N FL R HG G A 7V Z ZYW R T ET 7 PJ I JF W 5B Z H W
7 S S OF 6 D6 2 MF 5 AK L E YO K 7BC M X 3P N EY 7 RH C 64 4 6 TZ 6 NIB P I HQ H OH R II G BT J B JF Q GZR Y G WP P 7F G DL Y 6S N U F
A 2 O GA F 3A R LF 5 K
C T R L- P ri m ar y : A c ti v ate P ri m ar y P D H- R i ng . Ac t i va t e P ri m ar y iX C 344 0 .
C T R L- S ec o nd a ry : Ac t iva t e R e du n da n t P D H- R ing . Ac t iv a te Re d u nd a nt i X C3 4 40 .
1 6 : 34 : 24 Ap r 1 7 / 14 >>
If fail to activate the function, the screen will show as below:
N A M 34 4
E n t er ch a rs to o le s s
A S D AK V JH A FR Q WP O W ER U WIT U H WK M SL K J
D e c od i ng fa i l! F il e ma y co n ta i n u nr e c og n ize d ch a rs !
Or, you may key in falicense download then press ENTER, in order to download license file via
TFTP.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB = == Do w nl o ad L ic e nse F il e = = = 16 : 57: 3 3 0 4 /1 7 /2 0 1 7
T F T P S er v er IP : 1 92 . 16 8 .1 1 .5
D o w nl o ad Fi l e N a me : t es t .1 . en c
1 6: 5 7 :4 3 04 / 1 7/ 1 4 Do w nl o a di n g . . . .. R e ce i v ed 0 B l o ck s
1 6: 5 7 :4 3 04 / 1 7/ 1 4 Re c ei v e d 3 33 b y te s
1 6: 5 7 :4 3 04 / 1 7/ 1 4 Pr o ce s s in g ...
C T R L- P ri m ar y : A c ti v ate P ri m ar y P D H- R i ng . Ac t i va t e P ri m ar y iX C 344 0 .
C T R L- S ec o nd a ry : Ac t iva t e R e du n da n t P D H- R ing . Ac t iv a te Re d u nd a nt i X C3 4 40 .
< < Pr e ss ES C k e y t o co n t in u e > >
NOTE: Go to Controller Menu > (I) System Information > (D) Activation Status for more info.
CXR.
197
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
14. APPENDIX H: USER DEFINED

CONFIGURATION
Sometimes the preset system configuration will not fit for all circunstances, hence QX3440 offers
a tool by using command line for users to do their custom software configuration. This function is
useful and time-saving especially when there are some other QX3440 units with the system
requirements. Users may upload and apply the same settings to other QX3440 units in just
minutes.
NOTE: 1. The default configuration for each module type (including controller card) is
Slot-Independent.
2. If you prefer to load the factory default configuration, press the ACO button during the
startup countdown (ie. 3….2…1).
The user defined configuration includes the following:

Function Availability
Clock setting Yes
Password Yes
Device name, location, contact Yes
SNMP model, trap&community Yes
Telnet, SSH, SNTP, SYSLOG, RADIUS Yes
All protection (link backup, E1/T1 protection) Yes (Enable/Disable)
Alarm Yes
The user defined configuration does not include the following:

Function Availability
IP and other network setting No
SNMPv3 No
Unit Registration No
TSI Map No
Some exceptions for the plug-in modules to support the user-defined configuration function
include the following:
Plug-in Modules Availability

RTA Yes, for alarm settings only
RT, TS, QFXS, QFXO, Q2EM, Q4EM, No
OCUDP
CXR.
198
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
14.1. Save Default Configuration

Users may define desired configuration and save for further usage by using the Save to Default
Configuration command in VT-100 terminal.
Go to the Controller menu as shown below.

Controller Menu > (S) System Setup > (L) Command Line
Press "?", the system will list all available commands.

1 1 : 51 : 58 Oc t 0 5 / 18 >>?
q ui t h e lp p as s c od e p in g fb a n k
f bo o t u p gra d e a ut o _ sa v e i na c ti v e tx t c fg
d ef c fg f o rce _ s yn c h wi n f o f al i ce n se ri n g
h b_ c he c k t e stt s s ho w
1 1 : 52 : 04 Oc t 0 5 / 18 >>h e l p
C o m ma n ds Su p po r t :
q ui t - - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > Q u it co m m an d su p p or t .
h el p - - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > T h is he l p m e ssa g e .
p as s co d e - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > P a ss co d e f o r d e b ug mo d e ( co n t ac t wi t h F A E) .
a rp -- - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > P r in t A R P t a ble .
p in g i p - - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > P i ng an i p a ddr e s s.
f ba n k - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > D i sp l ay o r s et f i rm w ar e b a nk i n F las h .
f bo o t - -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > D o wn l oa d bo o t-u p co d e ( DA N GE R ! !) .
u pg r ad e c a rd - -- - --- - - - > B a tc h d o w nl o ad f i rm w ar e o f c a r d.
( T yp e ' u p gr a de ? ' t o s e e a ll u pg r ade c om m an d s)
s ys l og -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > D u mp lo c a l s yst e m l o g.
r ed l og -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > D u mp re d u nd a nt l o g.
a ut o _s a ve [s e c ] - --- - - -- > D i sp l ay o r s et a u to - sa v e t im e .
i na c ti v e [ se c ] - - --- - - -- > D i sp l ay o r s et d e te c t t im e f o r c a rd i n ac t iv e .
t xt c fg -- - -- - - -- - --- - - -- > U p lo a d t e xt mod e co n fi g ur a ti o n .
( F or vi e w o n ly, n ot fo r d o wn l o ad )
f or c e_ s yn c - - - -- - --- - - -- > F o rc e d u a l- C PU s y nc an d i g no r e h a rdw a r e c he c ki n g.
h wi n fo di s p C A RD --- - - -- > D i sp l ay H W i nfo f or ex p or t . ( b y J SON f or m at )
h wi n fo up l oa d CA R D - - - -- > U p lo a d H W i n fo v i a T FT P .
f al i ce n se im p o rt --- - - -- > I m po r t f e at u re a c ti v at i on li c e ns e da t a .
f al i ce n se do w n lo a d - - - -- > D o wn l oa d li c ens e fi l e v ia TF T P .
r in g c h id -- - - -- - --- - - -- > S h ow PD H - Ri n g c h a nn e l I D.
1 1 : 52 : 57 Oc t 0 5 / 18 >>
Key in “defcfg” command with a “?” mark. Other available commands in associated to the “defcfg”
command will appear.
s ta t us s a ve c le a r u pl o ad do w n lo a d
Key in “defcfg save” and press Enter. A prompt asking for confirmation. Key in YES to continue.
See the example below:
17:46:39 Oct 11/18 >>defcfg save

Save current configuration to default...
>>Please key in "YES" to confirm: YES
Saving...done.
Copy to Redundant...
17:49:59 Oct 11/18 >>
Once it is done, you may check the default configuration status by using “defcfg status” command.
17:49:59 Oct 11/18 >>defcfg status
Default config version: V11.07.01 (0011)
Default config build date: 17:49:58 10/11/2018
17:52:36 Oct 11/18 >>
CXR.
199
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
To return to the "Controller Setup" menu, key in "QUIT".
14.2. Upload Default Configuration

Upon completion the storage of the default configuration, key in “defcfg upload” and press
ENTER.
16:05:18 Oct 29/18 >> defcfg upload
The following screen appears. Key in the TFTP Server IP, Config File Name and press ENTER to
start the upload.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = U pl o ad De f a ul t Co n f ig == = 1 6: 1 4:0 5 10 / 29 / 20 1 8
T F T P S er v er IP : 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 0 0
14.3. Download Default Configuration

Upon completion the uploading of the default configuration, key in “defcfg download” and press
ENTER.
16:05:22 Oct 29/18 >> defcfg download
The following screen appears. Key in the TFTP Server IP, Config File Name and press ENTER to
start the download.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E = = = D ow n lo a d D e fa u lt C o nf i g = == 16 : 39: 0 5 1 0 /2 9 /2 0 18
T F T P S er v er IP : 0 00 . 00 0 .0 0 0. 0 0 0
CXR.
200
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
14.4. Clear Default Configuration

The saved user defined configuration can be cleared to accept new configuration. If users need to
change their own defined configuration and apply to other QX3440 units, a clear command will be
helpful.
Key in “defcfg clear” and press ENTER. A prompt asking for confirmation. Key in YES to continue.
1 6 : 57 : de f cf g c l e ar
C l e ar fl a sh se c t or : de f a ul t c o nf i g. . .
> > P le a se ke y i n "Y E S" t o c o nf i rm : Y E S
C l e ar . .. d on e .
1 6 : 58 : 59 Oc t 2 9 / 18 >>
Once it is done, you may check the default configuration status by using “defcfg status” command.
1 7 : 36 : 45 Oc t 2 9 / 18 >>d e f cf g s t at u s
D e f au l t c on f ig i n f las h no t e x is t o r da m age d !
1 7 : 36 : 55 Oc t 2 9 / 18 >>
14.5. Using the New Default Configuration

To start using the stored/downloaded new configuration, press Y from the Controller Menu.
Q X 3 44 0 -C C PB - 2G E === C on t ro l le r M e n u = == 12 : 00 : 0 5 0 9/0 3 / 20 2 1
C -> S ys t em Co n f ig u rat i o n S -> Sy s te m S e tu p

B -> C lo c k S ou r c e C onf i g ur a ti o n M -> Sy s te m A l ar m Se t up
Q -> A la r m Q ue u e S u mma r y W -> Fi r mw a re Tr a n sf e r
I -> S ys t em In f o rm a tio n V -> St o re / Re t ri e v e C onf i g ur a ti o n
P -> P er f or m an c e R e por t K -> Cl o ck So u rc e Se t up
L -> P se u do W ir e St a tus T -> Bi t E r ro r R a t e T est
N -> A dv a nc e d S t at u s D -> Ps e ud o Wi r e S e tu p
O -> L og On
A -> Al a rm Cu t O f f
X -> Cl e ar Al a rm Q ue u e
U - > C ho o se a S l ot Y -> Co n tr o ll e r R e tu r n t o De f au l t
Z -> Co n tr o ll e r R e se t
NOTES: 1. The current working (in use) configuration remains unchanged when the user-defined
configuration is downloaded.
2. A newly installed plug-in card will run with the new downloaded user-defined configuration.
3. When applying power to the QX3440, the system will boot up with previously stored
configuration, instead of the new downloaded user-defined configuration.
CXR.
201
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
4. To apply the downloaded user-defined configuration to all modules, use (Y) Controller
Return to Default command from the VT-100 controller menu.
The return to default screen will show at the bottom of the Controller Menu.
>> Return to default - are you sure ? [Y/N]
>>Please key in "YES" to confirm:
CXR.
202
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
15. APPENDIX I: BUNDLE SETUP

CONFIGURATION
15.1. Port(Bundle ID)

Bundle ID (1~64) can support at a maximum of 64 bundle IDs. Each bundle has continuous time
slots numbers.
Although the bundle time slot channels are successive, users can map pseudowire bundle time
slots to other interface cards (see below QT1 for example.) in a noncontinuous order.
For example:
1. Create bundle ID 2 with 2 time slots
QX 34 40 -CCP B-2GE == = Bu nd le S et up == = 20 :57 :18 1 2/09 /20 21

AR RO W KE YS : Cu rs or m ov e; Ch an ge o pt io ns by T AB , or b y ty pi ng
Mo de 1 Pr im ar y Se co nd ar y
Po rt (Bu nd le I D): 02 02 -- -- -- -- Pr im ar y -- -- -- -- -
For ma t : CE So PS N AA L1 PW D el ay (ms ): 21 .00 0
Ty pe : IP IP PW P kt S iz e(By te ): 66
To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
UD P Nu mb er /EC ID : 00 00 2 00 00 0 PW B W(Mb ps ): 0.52 8
Fr am e : no nC AS no nC AS To ta l PW B W(Mb ps ): 0.52 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
Nu mb er o f TS : 2 0 -- -- -- -- Se co nd ar y -- -- --
Nu mb er o f Fr am e: 00 08 0 PW D el ay (ms ):
Ji tt er D el ay : 02 0 0 PW P kt S iz e(By te ):
Ji tt er S iz e : 25 6 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % :
VL AN : OF F OF F PW B W(Mb ps ):
CV LA N ID : To ta l PW B W(Mb ps ):
CV LA N Pr io ri ty :
SV LA N ID :
SV LA N Pr io ri ty :
Ac ti on : Ac ti va te
Co nf ir m ? No
<< Pr es s ES C ke y to re tu rn t o ma in me nu o r sa ve s yst em s et up >>
NOTE: Port (Bundle ID) 02 in the above Bundle Setup screen indicates the pseudowire slot port 2
in the System Setup (Map).
CXR.
203
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
2. Map PW port 2 time slot 1 to slot 2 QE1 port 1 time slot 3.
QX 34 40 -CC PB -2GE == = Sy st em S et up (MA P) == = 20 :29 :10 1 2/09 /20 21

MA P NO : MA P_1 Au to A ct iv at e: Ye s
XC ty pe : 1:1 Ta rg et PW N ON-CA S Sou rc e Q ua dT1 NO N-CA S
Ta rg et P /T D SL /PO /TS P /T D SL /PO /TS P/T D SL /PO /TS P /T D SL /PO /TS
Sl ot : PW == = == == == == == == = == == == == == === = == == == == = === = == == == == =
Po rt : P2 1 d 2 1 3 17 d 1 d 17 d
T.S. : 01 2 d 18 d 2 d 18 d
Ci rc ui t In fo: 3 d 19 d 3 d PW 2 1 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
T.S.# : 01 6 d 22 d 6 d 22 d
Cl ea r : No 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
d/v : d 8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d
So ur ce 10 d 26 d 10 d
Sl ot : 2 11 d 27 d 11 d
Po rt : P1 12 d 28 d 12 d
T.S. : 03 13 d 29 d 13 d
14 d 30 d 14 d
Co nf ir m?Ye s 15 d 31 d 15 d
16 d 32 d 16 d
<< Pr es s ES C to r etu rn t o Co nt ro ll er Se tu p me nu, th en P re ss D t o a ct iv e >>
NOTE: PW Slot in the above System Setup (Map) screen indicates the bundle (=pseudowire) and
PW Slot Port P2 indicates the Port (Bundle ID) 02 in the Bundle Setup screen.
3. Map PW port 2 time slot 2 to slot 2 QE1 port 1 time slot 6.
QX 34 40 -CC PB-2GE == = Sy st em S et up (MA P) == = 20 :29 :10 1 2/09 /20 21

MA P NO : MA P_1 Au to A ct iv at e: Ye s
XC ty pe : 1:1 Ta rg et PW N ON-CA S Sou rc e Q ua dT1 NO N-CA S
Ta rg et P /T D SL /PO /TS P /T D SL /PO /TS P/T D SL /PO /TS P /T D SL /PO /TS
Sl ot : PW == = == == == == == == = == == == == == === = == == == == = === = == == == == =
Po rt : P2 1 d 2 1 3 17 d 1 d 17 d
T.S. : 02 2 d 2 1 6 18 d 2 d 18 d
Ci rc ui t In fo: 3 d 19 d 3 d PW 2 1 19 d
4 d 20 d 4 d 20 d
5 d 21 d 5 d 21 d
T.S.# : 01 6 d 22 d 6 d PW 2 2 22 d
Cl ea r : No 7 d 23 d 7 d 23 d
d/v : d 8 d 24 d 8 d 24 d
9 d 25 d 9 d
So ur ce 10 d 26 d 10 d
Sl ot : 2 11 d 27 d 11 d
Po rt : P1 12 d 28 d 12 d
T.S. : 06 13 d 29 d 13 d
14 d 30 d 14 d
Co nf ir m?Ye s 15 d 31 d 15 d
16 d 32 d 16 d
<< Pr es s ES C to r etu rn t o Co nt ro ll er Se tu p me nu, th en P re ss D t o a ct iv e >>
15.2. Format (CESoPSN/SAToP)

 To create unframed bundle, select SAToP.
 To create framed bundle, select CESoPSN.
CXR.
204
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
QX 34 40 -CC PB-2GE == = Bu nd le S et up == = 20 :57 :18 1 2/09 /20 21

To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
VLAN : OF F OF F PW B W(Mb ps ):
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
15.3. Type (IP/CESoETH)

 To create bundle with layer3 IP type, select IP.
 To create bundle with layer2 mef8 type, select CESoETH.

To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
CVL AN I D : To ta l PW B W(Mb ps ):
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
15.4. ToS (Type of Service)

The ToS range is from 0 to 255. The higher the value, the higher the priority.
CXR.
205
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE

To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
Below shows ToS and DSCP Settings at Layer 3. The second byte in an IPv4 packet is the
Type of Service (ToS) byte. The first three bits of the ToS byte are referred to as the IP
Precedence bits. These same three bits, in conjunction with the next three bits, are known
collectively as the DSCP bits.
Layer 3 IPv4
Version ToS 8
LEN ID Offset TTL Proto FCS IP-SA IP-DA Data
Length bits
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IP Precedence Unused bits: Flow

control for DSCP
DSCP
Common decimal and binary values for TOS to DSCP conversion is as followings:
TOS (Dec) TOS (Bin) DSCP (Bin) DSCP (Dec)
0 00000000 000000 0
32 00100000 001000 8
64 01000000 010000 16
96 01100000 011000 24
128 10000000 100000 32
160 10100000 101000 40
192 11000000 110000 48
224 11100000 111000 56
CXR.
206
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
15.5. UDP Number/ECID

UDP Number/ECID(1~65535/1~1048575)

To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
VL AN : OF F OF F PW B W(Mb ps ):
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
 Set up UDP number (1~65535) when the bundle type is set to IP
The UDP number must be unique, no repeated. For example, Bundle ID 01 uses UDP 1 then
Bundle ID 02 is not allowed to use UDP 1 again.
 Set up ECID (1~1048575) when the bundle type is set to CESoETH
The ECID must be unique, no repeated. For example, Bundle ID 01 uses ECID 1 then
Bundle ID 02 is not allowed to use ECID 1 again.
The bundle recognizes each other by their UDP/ECID. For example, if you set up local
bundle with UDP 2, then the corresponding bundle on the remote side should also be set up
with UDP 2.
NOTE: ECID = Emulated Circuit Identifier

UDP = User Datagram Protocol
UDP is a protocol used for computers to send messages. With UDP, in IP network,
there is no need to set up special channels before data communication.
15.6. Frame
When the bundle format is set to CESoPSN:
Select the bundle frame from nonCAS, E1CAS and T1CAS
 To create bundle with E1 CAS voice, select E1CAS.

 To create bundle with T1 CAS voice, select T1CAS.
 To create E1 or T1 bundle without CAS, select nonCAS.
CXR.
207
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
When the bundle format is set to SAToP:

Select the bundle frame from E1UNFRAME or T1UNFRAME
 To create E1 unframed bundle, select E1UNFRAME.

 To create T1 unframed bundle, select T1UNFRAME.

To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
15.7. Dest IP/MAC

Dest IP/MAC:(xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx)

AR RO W KE YS: Cu rs or m ov e; Ch an ge o pt io ns by T AB , or b y ty pi ng
To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
 Set up Dest IP (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) when the bundle type is set to IP
CXR.
208
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
This Dest IP is the remote side’s bundle Src. IP. Following is the CESoETH mef8 bundle
example:
 Set up MAC address(xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx) when the bundle type is set to CESoETH.
This MAC is the remote side’s source MAC address. Following is the CESoETH mef8 bundle
example:
CXR.
209
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
15.8. Stratum
Stratum:(1/2/3/3E/4)
Set up the stratum level in ACR side according to your reference clock source.

To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
Table 15-1 Stratum Clock Requirements

Time To First
Stratum Level Compliance Accuracy Clock Source
Frame Slip
Stratum 1 G.811 PRC 1 x 10-11 72 Days GPS
Stratum 2 G.812 Type II 1.6 x 10-8 7 Days ANT20
Stratum 3 E G.812 Type III 1.0 x 10-6 3.5 Hours Firebert6000
6 Minutes (255
TCXO internal
Stratum 3 G.812 Type IV 4.6 x 10-6 frame slips in 24
clock
hours)
Stratum 4 32 x 10-6 N/A
15.9. Number of TS
Number of TS:(1~31 in CESoPSN format; 24 for T1 unframe; 32 for E1 unframe)
When the bundle format is set to CESoPSN:

 Specify the number of time slot to be used from 1 to 31.
When the bundle format is SAToP and bundle frame is T1 unframe:

 The number of time slot is 24.
When the bundle format is SAToP and bundle frame is E1 unframe:
CXR.
210
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
 The number of time slot is 32.
Bundle Format CESoPSN SAToP SAToP

Bundle Frame nonCAS, E1CAS, T1 unframe E1 unframe
T1CAS
Number of TS 1~31 24 32

To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
15.10. Number of Frame

Number of Frame:
Bundle Format SAToP SAToP CESoPSN
Bundle Frame T1 unframe E1 unframe nonCAS E1CAS T1CAS
Number of Frame 8, 16, 24, 32, 1~50 1~1500 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8,
40, 48, 56 12, 24
Number of TS 24 32 1~31
When the bundle format is SAToP and bundle frame is T1 unframe:

 Specify the number of frames from 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, or 56.
When the bundle format is SAToP and bundle frame is E1 unframe:

 Specify the number of frames from 1 to 50.
When the bundle format is CESoPSN and bundle frame is nonCAS:

 Specify the number of frames from 1 to 1500.
When the bundle format is CESoPSN and bundle frame is E1CAS:

 Specify the number of frames from 1, 2, 4, 8 or 16
When the bundle format is CESoPSN and bundle frame is T1CAS:
CXR.
211
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
 Specify the number of frames from 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12 or 24
Please note that the number of time slot multiplies the number of
frames must be within the range of 8 to 1500.
For example:
(1) We set bundle format to CESoPSN, bundle frame to E1CAS and time slot number to 1, then
the Number of Frame can only be set to 8 or 16. As mentioned Number of TS*Number of
Frame must be within 8 to 1500 in between, thus 1, 2 or 4 (number of frame) are invalid.
(2) We set bundle format to CESoPSN, bundle frame to nonCAS and time slot number 31, then
the Number of Frame can only be set to 1 to 48. As mentioned Number of TS*Number of
Frame must be within 8 to1500 in between, thus 49 to 1500 (number of frame) are invalid.

To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
15.11. Jitter Delay

Jitter Delay(Delay):1~512
Jitter Delay + Packet Creation Time = One-way delay (single trip delay)
If a bigger Jitter Delay is set, a bigger one-way delay occurs.
Bundle setup
ANT20 Measured One-way
Number Number of Frame Round Trip Delay Delay
Format Type Frame Jitter Delay (ms) (ms)
of TS (Bytes)
CESoPSN IP nonCAS 1 8 1 4.2 2.10
CXR.
212
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Bundle setup
ANT20 Measured One-way
Number Number of Frame Round Trip Delay Delay
Format Type Frame Jitter Delay (ms) (ms)
of TS (Bytes)
In the same way, if a bigger Number of Frame is set, a bigger one-way delay occurs. That is
because the more the frames, the longer it takes to create the packet.
Bundle setup ANT20 Measured One-way

Round Trip Delay delay
Number Number of Frame (ms) (ms)
Format Type Frame Jitter Delay
of TS (Bytes)

To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
15.12. Jitter Size

Jitter Size (Jitter Buffer):1~512
CXR.
213
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
Jitter Buffer
IN IN IN
Delay
Delay
Delay
OUT OUT OUT

Ideal Case Delay too big Delay too small
Risk of overflow Risk of empty
Delay should be smaller than buffer size. Also, the difference between buffer size and delay
should be larger than the time it takes to reconstruct a packet (otherwise an overrun may occur
when the packet arrives). Configuring the Jitter Buffer parameters correctly avoids underrun and
overrun situation.
Overrun occurs when the jitter buffer is full and has no room for new data to enter (the entering
rate exceeds the exiting one).
Underrun occurs when the Jitter Buffer is empty (the entering rate is lower than the exiting one).

To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
CXR.
214
User’s Manual
CCPB-2GE
15.13. VLAN
CVLAN:
A VLAN tag with TPID value 0x8100.
The bundle’s ARP and UDP work in CVLAN mode.
SVLAN:
A VLAN tag with TPID value 0x88A8.
The bundle’s ARP and UDP packets work in SVLAN mode.
QinQ:
Two VLAN tags with SVLAN TPID=88A8 and CVLAN TPID=8100.
The bundle’s ARP and UDP packets work in the QinQ mode.
QX 34 40 -C-CC PA -WE B == = Bu nd le S et up == = 20 :57 :18 1 2/09 /20 21

To S : 00 0 0 PW P ay Lo ad OH % : 75 .75 8
De st I P/MA C: 00 1.00 1.00 1.00 2 0 00.00 0.00 0.00 0
St ra tu m : 3 1
SV LA N ID :
Co nf ir m ? No
CXR.
215

Qx3440 Cpu CCPB 2ge Um en

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Qx3440 Cpu CCPB 2ge Um en

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE

ES Para preservar el medio ambiente, al final de la vida útil de su producto,

PT No final de vida útil do producto, por favor coloque no ponto de recolha

DK Når produktet er udtjent, bor det børtskaffes via de sæ rlige indsamlingssteder i

NO Ved slutten av produktets levetid bør det avhendes på en kommunal miljøstasjon

SW Lämna vänligen in produkten på lämplig återvinningsstation när den är förbrukad.

SU Hävitä tuote käytöiän päättyessä viemällä se asianmukaiseen keräyspisteeseen.

CZ Po skončení jeho životnosti odložte prosím výrobek na přislušném sbĕrném místé

SK Po skončení jeho životnosti odovzdajte prosím zariadenie na príslušnom zbernom

SLO Ko se izdelku izteče življenska doba, ga odnesite na ustrezno zbirno mesto

GR Στο Тέλος тης λειτουργικής Ζωής του προϊόντος παρακαλώ

 Seul le personnel qualifié peut installer et entretenir le matériel.

3.2.3.1. DB9 Console Port ...........................................................................42

5.2.4.5. Primary CTRL Syslog .....................................................................70

5.2.10.2. Download Mainboard Firmware ..................................................117

10.2. Setup Instructions ........................................................................................168

Figure 2-13 Alarm Relay ......................................................................................................34

1.1. Function Description

The QX3440-CPU-CCPB-2GE controller supports SAToP/ CESoPSN/ MEF8 Pseudowire

E1/T1 E1/ T1 E1/T1

Mini- Slot plug - in Cards Single- Slot plug-in Cards :

Figure 1-1 QX3440-CHPA Application Illustration

E1/T1 E1/ T1 E1/T1

Plug- in(3) Mi ni P lug-in (A)

Mi ni P lug -In (D)

8 - channel OCU - DP* ECA

Figure 1-2 QX3440-C-CHPA Application Illustration

4 - channel E&M voice plug-in card

Figure 1-3 QX3440-D-CHPA Application Illustration

1.3. Specifications for QX3440

Alarm Relay Max. Current: 1A for 24VDC, 0.625A for 48VDC

Single AC plug-in power supply Single AC: 100 to 240 Vac,

Network Line Interface - E1

Network Line Interface - Mini 4E1

Network Line Interface - Mini 4T1

Network Line Interface - 3E1

Network Line Interface - 3T1

Network Line Interface - 4E1

Network Line Interface - 4T1

Fiber Optical Interface (FOM)

Optical Module Fiber Direction Wavelength (nm) Connector Distance (km)

G.SHDSL Line Interface

Serial and Digital Access

DTE Interface (V.35)

DTE Interface (RS449)

DTE Interface (RS232/V.24)

DTE Interface (RS232-X.50 mux. 8-port)

Note 1: Sync- with rate up to 19.2 Kbps achieved by oversampling at 64 Kbps

DTE Interface (RS232 with V.110 encoding, 6-port)

DTE Interface (RS232 with V.110 encoding, 3-port)

DTE Interface (RS232)

DTE Interface (X.21/RS232/RS422)

Mux mode 0.6K, 1.2K, 2.4K, 4.8K, 9.6K, 19.2K,

Mode 2: N*64K Mode

Note: When oversampling is enabled in MODE2, port 5 ~ 6 will be disabled.

Mode 3: Hybrid Mode

DTE Interface (RS232)

Mode 4: Clock Pass Through

Mode 5: N x 64K with Local and Remote Loopback

Note: Port 5~6 are disabled in Mode 5.

8 Port OCU-DP Interface Card

Machine maintenance OCU/DP card operation:

Voice and Analog Access